EPSON
EPSON TERMINAL PRINTER
5Q-B50/2550
TECHNICAL
MANUAL
Y502999010-A
SQ.-BSO/2SS0
TECHNICAL MANUAL
EPSON
NOTICE
• All rights reserved. Reproduction of any part of this manual in any from
whatsoever without SEIKO EPSON's express written permission is forbidden.
• The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice.
• All efforts have been made to ensure the accuracy of the contents of this manual.
However, should any errors be detected, SEIKO EPSON would greatly appreciate
being informed of them.
• The above notwithstanding SEIKO EPSON can assume no responsibility for any
errors in this manual or the consequences thereof.
© Copyright 1989 by SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION
Nagano, Japan
REV.-A
PRECAUTIONS
Precautionary notations throughout the text are categorized relative to 1) personal injury, and 2) damage
to equipment:
DANGER
Signals a precaution which, if ignored, could result in serious or fatal personal
injury. Great caution should be exercised in performing procedures preceded by
a DANGER headings.
WARNING
Signals a precaution which, if ignored, could result in damage to equipment.
The precautionary measures itemized below should always be observed when performing repair/maintenance procedures.
DANGER
1. DANGER OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS INCORRECTRY REPLACED.
REPLACE ONLY WITH SAME OR EQUIVALENT TYPE RECOMMENDED BY SEIKO
EPSON CO. DISCARD USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO GOVERNMENTS, SAFETY
INSTRUCTION.
2. ALWAYS DISCONNECT THE PRODUCT FROM BOTH THE POWER SOURCE AND THE
HOST COMPUTER BEFORE PERFORMING ANY MAINTENANCE OR REPAIR
PROCEDURE.
3. NO WORK SHOULD BE PERFORMED ON THE UNIT BY PERSONS UNFAMILIAR WITH
BASIC SAFETY MEASURES AS DICTATED FOR ALL ELECTRONICS TECHNICIANS IN
THEIR LINE OF WORK.
4. WHEN PERFORMING TESTING AS DICTATED WITHIN THIS MANUAL, DO NOT
CONNECT THE UNIT TO A POWER SOURCE UNTIL INSTRUCTED TO DO SO. WHEN
THE POWER SUPPLY CABLE MUST BE CONNECTED, USE EXTREME CAUTION IN
WORKING ON POWER SUPPLY AND OTHER ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS.
WARNING
1. REPAIRS ON EPSON PRODUCT SHOULD BE PERFORMED ONLY BY AN EPSON
CERTIFIED REPAIR TECHNICIAN.
2. MAKE CERTAIN THAT THE SOURCE VOLTAGE IS THE SAME AS THE RATED
VOLTAGE, LISTED ON THE SERIAL NUMBER/RATING PLATE. IF THE EPSON PRODUCT HAS A PRIMARY-AC RATING DIFFERENT FROM THE AVAILABLE POWER
SOURCE, DO NOT CONNECT IT TO THE POWER SOURCE.
3. ALWAYS VERIFYTHATTHE EPSON PRODUCT HAS BEEN DISCONNECTED FROM THE
POWER SOURCE BEFORE REMOVING OR REPLACING PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
AND/OR INDIVIDUAL CHIPS.
4. IN ORDER TO PROTECT SENSITIVE J.LP CHIPS AND CIRCUITRY, USE STATIC
DISCHARGE EQUIPMENT, SUCH AS ANTI-STATIC WRIST STRAPS, WHEN ACCESSING INTERNAL COMPONENTS.
5. REPLACE MALFUNCTIONING COMPONENTS ONLY WITH THOSE COMPONENTS
RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER; INTRODUCTION OF SECOND-SOURCE
ICs OR OTHER NONAPPROVED COMPONENTS MAY DAMAGE THE PRODUCT AND
VOID ANY APPLICABLE EPSON WARRANTY.
ii
REV.-A
iii
REV.-A
PREFACE
This manual describes functions, theory of electrical and mechanical
operations, maintenance, and repair of the 50-850/2550.
The instructions and procedures included herein are intended for the
experienced repair technician, and attention should be given to the
precautions on the preceding page. The chapters are organized as follows:
Chapter 1
Provides a general product overview, lists specifications,
and illustrates the main components of the printer.
Chapter 2
Describes the theory of printer operation.
Chapter 3
Discusses the options
Chapter 4
Includes a step-by-step guide for product disassembly,
assembly, and adjustment.
Chapter 5
Provides Epson-approved techniques for troubleshooting.
Chapter 6
Describes preventive maintenance techniques and lists
lubricants and adhesives required to service the equipment.
• The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice.
iv
REV.-A
REVISION TABLE
REVISION
A
DATE ISSUED
CHANGE DOCUMENT
April 28, 1989
1st issue
v
REV.-A
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CHAPTER 2.
OPERATING PRINCIPLES
CHAPTER 3.
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENTS
CHAPTER 4.
DISASSEMBLV, ASSEMBLV, AND ADJUSTMENT
CHAPTER 5.
TROUBLESHOOTING
CHAPTER 6.
MAINTENANCE
APPENDIX
vi
REV.-A
CHAPTER 1
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1.1
FEATURES
1-1
1.2
SPECIFICATIONS
1-3
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.3
1.4
Hardware Specifications
1-3
1.2.1.1
Printing
1-3
1.2.1.2
Paper Feed
1-4
1.2.1.3
Paper
1-5
1.2.1.4
Ink
1-10
1.2.1.5
Electrical Specifications
1-11
1.2.1.6
Reliability
1·11
1.2.1.7
Environmental Conditions
1-11
1.2.1.8
Dimensions and Weight
1-12
Software Specifications
1-13
1.2.2.1
Control Code Level............................................ 1-13
1.2.2.2
Input Data Buffer Size
1-13
1.2.2.3
Characters
1-13
1.2.2.4
Printing
1-14
INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS
1-18
1.3.1
Parallel Interface Specifications
1-18
1.3.2
RS-232C Serial Interface Specifications
1-21
FUNCTIONS
1-24
1.4.1
Operating Controls
1-24
1.4.1.1
Power Switch
1-24
1.4.1.2
Control Panel
1-24
1.4.1.3
SelecType
1-28
1.4.1.4
Self Test Function
1-31
1.4.1.5
Hexadecimal Dump Function
1-32
1.4.1.6
Printhead Cleaning and Capping
1-33
1.4.1.7
Ink Charge Function
1-34
1.4.1.8
Paper Load/Eject Function
1-35
1.4.1.9
TOF Adjustment Function
1-36
1.4.2
1.4.1.10 Tear Off Function
1-37
1.4.1.11 Reverse Paper Feed Protection
1-38
Reset Function
1-39
1.4.2.1
Initialization Timing and Operation
1-39
1.4.2.2
Default Values
1-40
1-i
REV.-A
1.4.3
1.5
Various Detection Functions
1-40
1.4.3.1
Ink-End Detection Function
1-40
1.4.3.2
Paper-Out Detection and
Forms Override Functions
1-41
1.4.3.3
Cover Open Detection Function
1-42
1.4.3.4
Error Detection Mechanism
1-42
1.4.1.5
Buzzer
1-43
MAIN COMPONENTS
1-44
1.5.1
Printer Mechanism
1-44
1.5.2
SEIPS/SANPSE Board Unit
1-45
1.5.3
SEIMA Board
1-46
1.5.4
SEIPNL Board
1-47
1.5.5
Housing
1-48
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 1-1.
SQ-850/SQ-2550 Exterior View
1-2
Figure 1-2.
Nozzle Configuration
1-3
Figure 1-3.
Head Adjust Lever
1-4
Figure 1-4.
Cut Sheet Printable Area
1-5
Figure 1-5.
Fan-fold Paper Printable Area
1-7
Figure 1-6.
Envelope Printable Area
1-8
Figure 1-7.
Label Dimensions
1-9
Figure 1-8.
Normal Character Matrix
1-15
Figure 1-9.
Subscript Character Matrix
1-15
Figure 1-10. Superscript Character Matrix
1-15
Figure 1-11. Interface Timing Chart
1-18
Figure 1-12. 57-30360 36-pin Connector
1-18
Figure 1-13. Handshaking for RS-232C Interface
1-21
Figure 1-14. Serial Data Transmission Timing
1-22
Figure 1-15. Serial Interface Connector
1-22
Figure 1-16. Control Panel
1-24
Figure 1-17. Head Cleaning Timing Chart
1-33
Figure 1-18. Ink Path Conditions at Delivery from the Factory
1-34
Figure 1-19. Paper Conditions Just After Printing
1-38
Figure 1-20. Printer Mechanism Model-441 0/4460
1-44
1-ii
REV.-A
Figure 1-21. SEIPS Board Unit
1-45
Figure 1-22. SANPSE Board Unit
1-45
Figure 1-23. SEIMA Board
1-46
Figure 1-24. SEIPNL Board
1-47
Figure 1-25. Housing
1-48
LIST OF TABLES
Table 1-1.
Expendables and Options
1-2
Table 1-2.
Envelope Specifications
1-8
Table 1-3.
Dimensions and Weight
1-12
Table 1-4.
Fonts
1-13
Table 1-5.
Print Speed, Printable Columns, and
Character Pitch
Table 1-6.
1-14
Printing Mode, Horizontal Dot Density,
and Character Size
1-16
Table 1-7.
Bit Image Printing
1-17
Table 1-8.
8-bit Parallel IIF Connector Pin Assignment
1-19
Table 1-9.
Printer Select/Deselect Control with
the DC 1/DC3 Code
1-20
Table 1-10. Serial Interface Handshaking
1-21
Table 1-11. RS-232C Serial l/F Connector Pin Assignment
1-23
Table 1-12. Operation Flow in the SelecType Mode
1-29
l-iii
REV.-A
REV.-A
1.1 FEATURES
The SO is a high speed 24-nozzle ink jet printer which provides high performance, a low price, high
speed printing, and an advanced auto paper handling mechanism. The SO has the following features,
in addition to those of the conventional SO-series printers.
•
With the standard printer driver ESC/P-84, this printer is compatible with the widest range of
computers of any of the SO-and LO-series models.
•
Advanced auto paper handling mechanism. Paper selection and load/eject operation can be
performed using only the control panel. When the optional CSF (Cut Sheet Feeder) is mounted,
switching between cut sheets and fan-fold paper (using the standard push tractor) can be performed
without removing the CSF.
•
Low noise: 50 dB (A) or less
•
Highest printing speed in its class
Draft characters:
500 CPS
LO characters:
165 CPS
•
An 80-column model for personal use and a 136-column model for office work are available.
•
Printer operation and selection of various settings are made easier due to the employment of a control
panel with a multifunctional LCD (Liquid Crystal Display).
•
The amount of ink remaining can be seen at a glance because the ink cartridge includes an ink-level
indicator. The ink cartridge can be easily replaced from the front of the printer.
•
Printing labels or envelopes is possible. Envelopes can be printed automatically with the optional
CSF.
•
Optional ID modules are available for easy interfacing to various computers, and font modules
provide a wide range of fonts.
•
Maintenance is easier than for the conventional SO-series printers.
1-1
REV.-A
Figure 1-1. 5Q-850/5Q-2550 Exterior View
Table 1-1 lists the expendables and options.
Table 1-1. Expendables and Options
Code number
Name and Description
Expendable
5020002
Exclusive ink cartridge
Option
C806111
Double-bin cut sheet feeder for the 50-2550
C806101
Single-bin cut sheet feeder for the 50-2550
C806091
Double-bin cut sheet feeder for the 50-850
C806081
Single-bin cut sheet feeder for the 50-850
C800042
Pull tractor unit for the 50-2550
C800032
Pull tractor unit for the 50-850
#8143 New serial interface
#8148 Intelligent serial interface
#8165 Intelligent IEEE-488 interface
1-2
REV.-A
1.2 SPECIFICATIONS
This section describes the hardware and software specifica ions of the printer.
1.2.1 Hardware Specifications
This section describes the hardware specifications of the printer.
1.2.1.1 Printing
Printing method:
On-demand type ink-jet system
Pin configuration:
24 nozzles (12 nozzles x 2 rows)
Dot pitch:
0.14 mm (1/180")
Column spacing:
2.54 mm (10 CPI)
0.14 mm (180 DPI)
Nozzle Stagger 2
Nozzle Stagger 1
~2
o :;:l:1
0
o
0#3
o
o
o
0
:=h
O.282mm
0
0
0
0
0
o
o
o
o
'24 {
O.141mm(1/180')
"'41mm
j
'23
(1/18)
Figure 1-2. Nozzle Configuration
1-3
REV.-A
Gap between the printhead and platen:
1.2
+
0.1 mm (from the nozzle surface to the platen)
NOTE: When printing on thick paper, such as an envelope, the platen gap can be adjusted manually
to prevent the paper from being stained with ink.
•
Dashed line:
Standard (1.2 mm)
•
Solid line:
Wide (1.8 mm)
Figure 1·3. Head Adjust Lever
1.2.1.2 Paper Feed
Feeding methods:
Friction feed
Push tractor feed
Push-pull tractor feed (when the optional tractor is used)
Minimum line spacing:
1/360" (0.07 mm)
Line spacing:
1/6" or 1/8", or any of n/60", n/180", and n/360" (programmable: "n"
is a user-defined value)
Paper insertion:
From the rear
Cut sheets and envelopes: From the upper paper entrance
Fan-fold paper and labels: From the lower paper entrance
Paper feeding speed:
62 msec. (Line spacing: 1/6")
4.0 IPS (inches/sec., continuous paper feeding)
WARNING
•
Do not turn the manual paper feed knob, unless a paper jam occurs. The reasons are as
follows:
Usually, reverse paper feeding is prohibited by the software to prevent the paper from
becoming stained. If the knob is operated manually, this protection is defeated.
Positions set in the SelecType mode, such as TOF or tear-off positions, will be shifted .
•
Never feed the paper in reverse when printing labels, Because the labels could adhere to
the printer.
1-4
REV.-A
1.2.1.3 Paper
Cut sheets
Paper width:
50-850 : 182 to 257 mm (7.17 to 10.12")
50-2550: 182 to 364 mm (7.17 to 14.33")
Paper length:
94 to 364 mm (3.70 to 14.33")
Paper thickness:
0.065 to 0.10 mm (0.0026 to 0.004")
Paper quality:
High quality paper (see Table 1-2.)
Paper weight:
52 g/m 2 to 82 g/m 2 (45 to 70 kg/14 to 22 Ib)
WARNING
• 5et the printer in the friction drive mode.
• Do not use paper that is wide than the specified limit.
• Do not manually feed paper in the reverse direction after printing is completed.
182-364mm(7.2 -14.3 inch)(136 columns)
3'0~m, 182-257mm(7.2 -10.1 inch)( 80 columns)
0.12 in.
or more
...
Printable Area
3.0mm,0.12inch
~
__- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - i
or more
8.5mm
0.35inch or more
P
r
i
n
t
a
b
I
e
364mm
maximm
A
r
e
a
25mm
0.98inch
.......L_ _- - ' - _
----.-a .5 m m
..J
L....
~.33inch
Figure 1-4. Cut Sheet Printable Area
NOTE 1: The parenthesized values apply for the 50-2550.
NOTE 2: The form override function enables printing as close as approximately 13.5 mm from the
bottom edge of the paper. However, paper feed accuracy is not guaranteed outside of the
printable area shown above by the oblique lines.
1-5
REV.-A
Fan-fold paper
Paper width:
SO-850 : 101 to 279 mm (4.00 to 11.00")
SO-2550: 101 to 406 mm (4.00 to 16.00")
Paper thickness:
0.065 to 0.10 mm (0.0026 to 0.004")
Paper quality:
High quality paper (See Table 1-2.)
Paper weight:
52 to 82 g/m 2 (45 to 70 kg/14 to 22 Ib)
1-6
REV.-A
WARNING
•
Release the friction feed mechanism.
•
Do not manually feed the paper in the reverse direction after printing is completed.
• When using push-pull feed, be sure to match the vertical positions of the sprockets on the
push tractor and the pull tractor.
• When using push-pull feed, set the paper so that there is no slack between the push tractor
and the pull tractor.
101-406mm(4.0-16.0 in.)(136 columns)
101-279mm(4.0-11.0 in.)( 80 columns)
13mm,0.51 in.
or more
I
I *1)
Printable Area
----1*----t.--------------------l*--'-I~--
I
I
Printable
Area
8.5mm,0.33 In.
or mfe
8.5mm,O.33 In.
O'l
Printable
Area
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
------------------------------------------------0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
k
~
F
XYZT
()
()
*1) 80 columns:
13mm or more when using 4-9 in. width paper
21 mm or more when using
10 in. width paper
46mm or more when using
11 in. width paper
136 columns:
13mm or more when using 4-15 in. width paper
31 mm or more when using
16 in. width paper
Figure 1-5. Fan-fold Paper Printable Area
1-7
REV.-A
Envelopes
See Table 1-2.
Table 1-2. Envelope Specifications
Type
No.10
No.6
Height
92 (3.625")
105 mm (4.125")
Width
165 (6.5")
241 mm (9.5")
Thickness
0.16 mm to 0.52 mm
(0.0063" to 0.0205")
Weight
12 Ib to 24 Ib
(45g/m2 to 91 g/m2)
NOTE: The form override function enables printing as close as approximately S.5 mm from the bottom
edge of an envelope. However, paper feed accuracy is not guaranteed outside of the printable
area shown above by the oblique lines.
WARNING
• Set the envelope so that the longer side is becomes parallel to the platen.
• Print at normal room temperature.
• Do not manually feed the paper in the reverse direction after printing is comp leted.
• Total paper thickness at the printable area and the non-printable area must not vary more
than 0.25 mm (0.009S").
I..
fooI·-t------------
I
105mm(4.125N)
or
----------~.
241mm(9.5 N)
~
I
8.5mm(O.33 N)
XYZI
T
92mm(3.625 N)
or
165mm(6.5 N)
~/7////////////~
8.5mm(O.33 N)
_.L..-_--.-_
Figure 1-6. Envelope Printable Area
1-8
T
25mm(1 N)
~
REV.-A
Labels
Dimensions:
63.5 X 23.8 mm (2.5 X 15/16")
101.6 X 23.8 mm (4.0 X 15/16")
101.6 X 36.5 mm (4.0 X 23/16")
NOTE: Dimensions are those of one label on a sheet.
Total paper thickness:
0.19 mm or less
Notes for handling:
•
Print labels at normal room temperature.
•
•
Use only tractor feed labels.
The dimensions shown above are for the label itself. For the dimensions
of the entire sheet, those for fan-fold paper are applicable.
•
Never manually feed the paper in the reverse direction. (A label might
adhere to the printer.)
Recommended paper:
AVERY CONTINUOUS FROM LABELS
AVERY MINI-LINE LABELS
101.6mm(4 in.)
63.5mm(2.5 in.)
23.8mm
(0.94 in.)
36.5mm~
(1.44 in.)
1-----------------------'
Figure 1-7. Label Dimensions
1-9
REV.-A
1.2.1.4 Ink
Type:
Exclusive ink cartridge
Color:
Black
Ink cartridge capacity:
105 to 115 cc
Unused residual ink:
20 cc (average value)
Cartridge dimensions:
109(W) X 157(0) X 44.5(H) mm
Cartridge weight:
Approx. 320 g
Ink consumption:
0.05 IJ-cc (per 1 dot, see Sections 1.4.1.6 and 1.4.1.7.)
Life of ink cartridge:
Approx. 6 million characters
(continuous Draft printing/25 dots per character)
Approx. 3 million characters
(continuous LQ printing/48 dots per character)
I
NOTE 1: The figures shown above are for when approximately 75 cc of the, total 115 cc is used for
actual printing.
Shelf life:
Within two years from the production date
(at normal room temperature)
Temperature range:
-30° to 65°C (transit)
- 30° to 40°C (storage)
NOTE 2: If the cartridge is transported at 65°C, it must not remain at that temperature for more than
120 hours. If it is transported at 40°C, it should not remain at that temperature for more than
one month.
NOTE 3: When the cartridge is stored at 40°C, the shelf life is reduced to one month.
NOTE 4: Ink will freeze if it is stored for a long time at - rc or less. If this occurs, use the ink after
thawing it. (The time for thawing ink (from -30°C to 25°C) is approximately 2.5 hours at room
temperature.)
Impact resistance:
Within one drop from 90 cm height (packed/unpacked)
Vibration resistance:
2G, 5 to 55 Hz (packed/unpacked)
NOTE 5: The word "packed" means packed in the cartridge packing box.
1-10
REV.-A
Ink safety:
No flash point
•
Irritant to eyes and skin due to strong alkalinity.
•
The result of the AMES test (mutagenicity test for Salmonellas) was
negative.
•
It is not immediately poisonous if swallowed. (LD50 = 5,000mg or
more)
•
pH is 12.9 (at 20 C).
DANGER
• If the ink comes into contact with eyes or a wound, consult a doctor immediately.
• If the ink comes into contact with skin (hands), wash it off immediately with soap and plenty
of water. If any irritation develops, consult a doctor.
1.2.1.5 Electrical Specifications
Power supply voltage:
108 to 132 VAC (120 V version)
198 to 264 VAC (2201240V version)
Frequency range:
49.5 to 60.5 Hz
Rated current:
Max. 1.0 AIAC (120 V version)
Max. 0.6 AlAC (2201240 V version)
Insulation resistance:
10 M ohms or more at 500 VDC
(between the AC line andchassis)
Dielectric strength:
1250 VAC (RMS) 1 min. (between the AC line and chassis)
(120 V version)
3750 VAC (RMS) 1 min. (between the AC line and chassis)
(2201240 V version)
1.2.1.6 Reliability
MCBF (Mean Cycles Between Failure):
5 million lines (excluding the printhead)
MTBF (Mean Time Between Failure):
SO-850 : 4000 POH (Power On Hour, Duty: 25%)
SO-2550: 6000 POH (Duty: 25%)
Printhead MCBF:
30,000 lines (Can be reused after cleaning.)
Life of printhead:
200 million dots or more (per nozzle), or two years or more nrmal use
1.2.1.7 Environmental Conditions
Operating
Temperature:
5° to 35°C (NOTE 1)
Storage
- 30° to 40°C (NOTE 2)
Transit
- 30° to 65°C (NOTE 3)
1-11
REV.-A
NOTE1:
For the printhead or mechanism only, 5°C to 40°C.
NOTE2: When the printer is stored at 40°C, the shelf life of the ink will be reduced to one month.
NOTE3: When the printer is transported at 65°C, it should not remain at that temperature for more
than 120 hours. When it is transported at 40°C, it should not remain at that temperature for
more than one month.
Humidity:
Operating
10 to 80% (non-condensing) (NOTE 4)
Storage
5 to 85% (non-condensing) (NOTE 5)
Transit
5 to 85% (non-condensing) (NOTE 5)
NOTE4:
For the printhead only, 10 to 85% (non-condensing).
NOTE5:
For the printhead only, 5 to 90% (non-condinsing).
Vibration resistance:
Impact resistance:
Operating
0.15G, 10 to 55 Hz (X, Y, and Z directions)
Storage
0.50G, 10 to 55 Hz (X, Y, and Z directions)
Operating
1G, within
msec. (X, Y, and Z directions)
Storage
2G, within
msec. (X, Y, and Z directions)
1.2.1.8. Dimensions and Weight
See Table 1-3.
Table 1-3. Dimensions and Weight
5Q-850
Height
Width
Model-4410
537 mm (NOTE)
I
664 mm (NOTE)
I
Model-4460
I
486.5 mm
613.5 mm
265 mm
449.6 mm
Approx. 12.0Kg
I
142.5 mm
177 mm
Depth
Weight
5Q-2550
I
Approx. 14.4Kg
NOTE: Include paper feed knob
1-12
Approx. 6.4 Kg
I
Approx. 7.7 Kg
REV.-A
1.2.2. Software Specifications
This section describes the standard software specifications of the printer.
1.2.2.1 Control Code Level
EPSON ESC/P 24-84
1.2.2.2 Input Data Buffer Size
Approx. 8K bytes
1.2.2.3 Characters
Character code: 8 bits
Character set:
96 ASCII characters
14 international character sets
See Table 1-4.
Fonts:
Table 1-4. Fonts
Family No.
10CPI
12CPI
15CPI
Proportiona I
EPSON Roman
0
0
0
0
0
EPSON Sans Serif
1
0
0
0
0
EPSON Courier
2
0
0
0
EPSON Prestige
3
0
0
0
EPSON Script
4
0
0
0
EPSON OCR-B
5
0
x
EPSON OCR-A
6
0
EPSON Orator
7
0
EPSON Orator-S
8
0
--
0
*
*
*
*
0
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
EPSON Draft
NOTE:
0
resident
x
print Roman 15CPI font
*
desired pitch is made by software using selected font
xx ,.. print LQ proportional font selected by ESC k
1-13
x
x
x
0
xx
REV.-A
1.2.2.4 Printing
Print direction:
Bidirectional logic seeking
See Table 1-5.
Print speed, printable columns, and character pitch:
Table 1-5. Print Speed, Printable Columns, and Character Pitch
Printable Columns
(CPL)
Printing Mode
Character
Pitch (CPI)
Print Speed (CPS)
Draft
LQ
10
10
5
5
17.1
8.5
500
248
248
124
424
212
165
165
83
83
283
141
163
163
81
81
272
136
12
12
6
6
20
10
600
297
297
297
495
248
198
198
99
99
330
165
120
120
60
60
204
204
102
102
15
15
7.5
7.5
743
371
371
186
247
247
124
124
68
160
34
80
137
320
68
160
116
272
58
136
233
544
116
272
8.6
20
4.3
10
17.1
40
8.6
20
-
102
240
51
120
205
480
102
240
174
408
87
204
349
816
174
408
12.8
30
6.4
15
25.7
60
12.8
30
-
SQ-850
SQ-2550
80
80
40
40
137
68
136
136
68
40
233
116
96
96
48
48
160
80
10 pitch
Normal
Emphasized
Enlarged
Emphasized+enlarged
Condensed
Condensed + enlarged
12 pitch
Normal
Emphasized
Enlarged
Emphasized + enlarged
Condensed
Condensed + enlarged
15 pitch
Normal
Emphasized
Enlarged
Emphasized + enlarged
Proportional
Normal
Max.
Min.
Enlarged
Max.
Condensed
Max.
Min.
Max.
Condensed +
enlarged
Max.
Min.
-
-
141
330
71
165
283
660
142
330
Proportional, super/subscript
Normal
Max.
Min.
Enlarged
Max.
Min.
Condensed
Max.
Min.
Condensed +
enlarged
Max.
Min.
-
-
NOTE: Max
indicates the value when only maximum width characters are printed.
Min
indicates the value when only minimum width characters are printed.
1-14
212
495
106
248
424
990
212
495
REV.-A
Character matrix:
See Table 1-6 and Figures 1-8 to 1-10. The upper two dots are the ascender
area, and the lower four dots are the descender area. The lowest dot is
used for printing an underline.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
(Normal Character)
I
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Ascender Area
L
R
I
E
F
T
G
Ascender Area(l5pitchl
H
T
S
P
A
C
L
R
E
I
F
T
G
H
T
S
P
A
C
E
S
p
A
C
E
S
P
A
C
E
(00
E
(02)
Figure 1-9. Subscript Character Matrix
Descender Area
I
I..
Face Width (01)
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
.1
Character Width (CW)
Figure 1-8. Nomal Character Matrix
L
E
R
I
F
G
T
H
T
S
p
A
C
E
S
p
A
C
E
Figure 1-10. Superscript Character Matrix
1-15
REV.-A
Table 1-6. Printing Mode, Horizontal Dot Density, and Character Size
Printing Mode
Horizontal Dot
Density
Character Width
(aO
+
a1
+
a2)
Character Height
(W X H mm)
Draft, 10 pitch
120
12
1.9 X 3.2
Draft, 12 pitch
120
10
1.9 X 3.2
Draft, 15 pitch
120
8
1.9 X 3.2
Draft, 10 pitch, Condensed
240
14
1.0 X 3.2
Draft, 12 pitch, Condensed
240
12
1.0 X 3.2
La, 10 pitch
360
36
2.2 X 3.2
La, 12 pitch
360
30
1.9 X 3.2
La, 15 pitch
360
24
1.9 X 2.3
La, 10 pitch, condensed
360
21
1.2 X 3.2
La, 12 pitch, condensed
360
18
1.0 X 3.2
Max.42
2.6 X 3.2
La, proportional
360
Min. 18
1.0 X 3.2
Max. 21
1.3 X 3.2
Min. 9
0.5 X 3.2
Max.28
1.8 X 2.3
Min. 12
0.7 X 2.3
Max. 14
0.9 X 2.3
Min. 6
0.4 X 2.3
La, proportional, densed
La, proportional,super/subscript
La, proportional, super/subscript,
condensed
360
360
360
NOTE 1: Character size in the above table is forthe largest character, and the value changes depending
on the paper or ribbon being used.
NOTE 2: The 3.2 mm high character and the 2.3 mm high character are constructed using 23 dots
(vertical) and 16 dots (vertical), respectively.
NOTE 3: Dots that adjoin horizontally are not printed.
1-16
REV.-A
Bit image printing: See Table 1-7.
Table 1-7. Bit Image Printing
m
Name
Dot Density
(DPI)
Adjacent Dot
Maximun
Printing
Number of
Possible?
Printable Dots
Print Speed
UPS)
0
Normal-density
60
Yes
816 (480)
49.50
1
Double-density
120
Yes
1632 (960)
24.75
120
No
1632 (960)
49.50
240
No
3264 (1920)
24.75
2
Double-speed,
double-density
8-pin
3
Quadruple-density
4
CRT graphics
80
Yes
1088 (640)
24.75
5
CRT graphics II
90
Yes
1224 (720)
33.00
32
Normal-density
60
Yes
816 (480)
49.50
33
Double-density
120
Yes
1632 (960)
24.75
24-pin 38
CRT graphics 11
90
Yes
1224 (720)
33.00
39
Triple-density
180
Yes
2448 (1440)
16.50
40
Sextuple-density
360
No
4896 (2880)
16.50
NOTE1: The parenthesized values apply to the SQ-850.
NOTE2: 'm" is the m in the command format < ESC * m n 1 n2 >.
NOTE3: 'Yes" and "No" in the column "Adjacent Dot Printing Possible?" are equivalent to "including
half dots" and "excluding half dots" in the normal printing mode.
NOTE4: 'Maximum Number of Printable Dots" is the maximum value of n 1
command format <ESC * m nl n2>.
1-17
+
256 X n2 in the
REV.-A
1.3 INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS
The printer is equipped with standard 8-bit parallel and RS-232C compatible interfaces. Moreover, it
is possible to interface to various computers using the optional interface board. This section describes
the specifications of the standard interfaces. (For details of the optional interface board, see Chapter
3 or the "Option Interface Manual."
1.3.1 Parallel Interface Specifications
Data transmission mode:
8-bit parallel
Communication mode:
Uses a STROBE pulse from outside the printer.
Handshake:
Uses the ACKNLG and BUSY signals.
Signal levels:
Input data and all interface control signals are TTL compatible.
Adaptable connector:
36-pin Amphenol 57-30360 or equivalent
NOTE: It is recommended that the interface cable be as short as possible.
BUSY
ACKNLG
DATA
STROBE
5 tls
5 tlS
typ.
typ.
Figure 1-11. Interface Timing Chart
I. STROBE
19. GND (Pa:r ",:thl.)
2. DATAl
20. GND (P.:r ",:th2')
3.DATA2
21. GND (Pa:r ",ah 3,)
4.DATA3
22. GND (Pa:r ",:th 4.)
5.DATA4
23. GND (Pa:r "':th5.)
5. DATA5
24. GND (Pa:r ",:th5')
7.DATA5
-----ur=~ ~:JU-----25.GND (Pa:r ",:th7')
B. DATA7
- - - - - f - H - - - i l I J [ ] ] J - - t H - - - - - 2 5 . GND (Pa:r ",:thB.)
9. OAT AB
-----ttr=~~-1M'------27.GND (Pa:r
",:th9.)
- - - - - 2 B . GND (P.:r ",:thIO.)
10. ACKNLG
I!. BUSY
29. GND (Pa:r ",:th 11.)
12. PE
30. GND (Pa:r ",:th 12.)
13. +5V
31. INIT
14. AUTO FEED X
32. ERROR
IS. NC
33. GND
15. GND
34. NC
17. CHASSIS GND
35. +5V
lB. NC
35. SLCTIN
Figure 1-12. 57-30360 36-pin Connector
1-18
REV.-A
Table 1-8. 8-Bit Parallel IIF Connector Pin Assignments
Pin No.
Signal
Return
I/O
1
STROBE
19
I
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
DATA 1
DATA2
DATA3
DATA4
DATA5
DATA6
DATA7
DATA8
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
10
ACKNLG
28
0
This pulse indicates data are received and the printer is
ready to accept next data.
Pulse width is approx. 10 p,s. (See NOTE5)
11
BUSY
29
0
"HIGH" indicates printer can not accept data.
(See NOTE5)
12
PE
30
0
"HIGH" indicates paper-out.
This signal is effective only when ERROR signal is "LOW".
13
SLCT
-
0
Always "HIGH". (Pulled up to +5V through 3.3 K ohms
resistor.)
14
AUTOFEED-XT
-
I
If this signal is "LOW" when the printer is initialized, a line
feed is automatically performed by input of "CR" code. (See
NOTE6)
Description
Strobe pulse to read the input data. Pulse width must be
more than 0.5 p,s. Input data is latched after falling edge of
this signal.
Parallel input data to the printer.
"HIGH" level means data "1".
"LOW" level means data "0".
Not used.
15
16
GND
17
Chassis GND
Ground for twisted-pair.
-
Printer chassis ground.
-
Not used.
18
19 to 30
GND
31
INIT
32
ERROR
33
GND
Ground for twisted-pair.
I
Pulse (width: 50 p,s min., active "LOW") input for printer
initialization.
0
"LOW" indicates that some error has occurred in the printer.
(Refer to section 1.4.3.4)
-
-
Ground for twisted-pair.
34
-
-
Not used.
35
-
0
Always "HIGH". (Pulled up to +5V through 3.3 K ohms
resistor.)
-
I
If the signal is "LOW" when printer is initialized, the
DC 1/DC3 control is disabled. (See NOTE6 and Table 1-9)
36
SLECT-IN
16
NOTE 1: The signals with a bar over the name are active-Iow.
NOTE 2: "Return" denotes a twisted pair return line, connected to signal ground. When interfacing
the printer to the host machine, use twisted pairs for each signal and be sure to connect the
return sides. Shield the twisted pairs, and connect the shield to the GND of the host machine
in order to reduce noise.
1-19
REV.-A
NOTE 3: All interface conditions are based on TTL levels. Both the rise and fall times of all signals must
be 0.2 ILsec. or less.
NOTE 4: Refer to the Interface Timing Chart (Figure 1-11) for details on each signal.
NOTE 5: Data transfer protocol must not ignore the ACKNLG or BUSY signal. (Data can be transferred
after either recognizing the ACKNLG signal or when the BUSY signal is LOW.)
NOTE 6: The AUTO FEED XT and SLCT IN signals will be valid when "AUTO LF" and "DC 1/DC3" are
set "ON" and "VALID", respectively, in the SelecType mode.
NOTE 7: Printing tests, including those of the interface circuits, can be executed without using external
equipment by setting the DATA 1 to DATA8 lines of the interface connector to certain codes
(1 for GND open, and 0 for short) and connecting the ACKNLG signal to the STROBE signal.
Table 1-9. Printer Select/Deselect Control with the DC1/DC3 Code
Printer
State
SLCTIN
Signal
Input
Receive
Code
ERROR
Signal
BUSY
Signal
OFF LINE
High
DC1
Low
(Error)
High
ACKNLG
Not output
Data Processing
Data entry disabled
DC3
Low
DC1
DC3
ON LINE
High
Low
DC1
High
Low (NOTE1) Output after
each data
entry
DC3
High
DC1
High
Low (NOTE1) Output after
each data
entry
DC3
High
Low (NOTE1) Output after
each data
entry
Low
(NOTE 1)
Output after
each data
entry
Data entry (normal
processing).
Data entry enabled,
However, input data is
ignored (waits for
DC 1, NOTE 2).
Data entry enabled
(normal processing)
NOTE 1: BUSY = LOW" is the state before data is input. During data processing, the BUSY signal goes
HIGH and LOW alternately.
NOTE 2: After the DC3 code is input, input data is ignored until the DC 1 code is input.
NOTE 3: In the above table, it is assumed that no ERRORs other than those due to OFF LINE occur.
NOTE 4: The DC1/DC3 control is valid only when "DC1/DC3" is set to"VALlD" (default setting in the
SelecType mode) at printer initialization and the SLCT IN signal from the host computer is
HIGH. At this time, the printer starts operation in the DC 1 state.
NOTE 5: The DC1/DC3 control will be invalid even with "DC1/DC3" set to "VALID" (default setting
in the SelecType mode) at printer initialization, if the SLCT IN signal from the host computer
is LOW.
1-20
REV.-A
1.3.2 RS-232C Serial Interface Specifications
Table 1-10. Serial Interface Handshaking
DTR Signal
Description
X-ON/OFF protocol
X-OFF (DC3/13H)
MARK
When the number of bytes remaining in the input
buffer reaches 256 or less, the signal level goes to
MARK, or an X-OFF code is sent to the host computer. This indicates that the printer is not ready to
receive data.
X-ON (DC 1/11 H)
SPACE
When the number of bytes remaining in the input
buffer reaches 512 or more, the signal level goes
to SPACE, or an X-ON code is sent to the host
computer. This indicates that the printer is ready
to receive data.
DTR (REV) Signal
MARK I -1ZV)
----------------~~~~~~~
1I
11
SPASE (
+ 1ZV)
l)
512 byte Z56byte
X-ON
byte
X-OFF
Input Buffer Vacant Area
X-ON/X-OFF Protocol
Figure 1-13. Handshaking for RS-232C Interface
Word Length:
Start bit
1
Data bits
8
Parity
Odd, Even, or none
Stop bits..... 1 bit or more
Bit Rate:
300,600,1200,2400,4800, 9600, or 19200 BPS
Logic Level:
EIA level, MARK..... logical 1 (-3 - 27 V)
SPACE....Iogical
° (+3 -
1-21
+27 V)
REV.-A
-T -
( +V)
DTR
(-V)
(+V) ---------------------
RXD
i----I..--~I-
(-V)
Data Bit
Parity
Bit
Start
Bit
DTR Handshake
RX~+V)
?I~I~I~I~I~I~I~~~~i--J1t ---~f-----
(- V)
Stop Bit
Data Bit
Start
Bit
-T -
Parity
Bit
(+V)
TXD
--[--[U.
--[--[~~
-- -- U·
-- --
~~
l-
(-V)
Start Data Bit
Bit
(X-OFF)
Start Data Bit
(X-ON)
Bit
X-ON/X-OFF Protocol
Figure 1-14. Serial Data Transmission Timing
NOTES: 1. The value of 'T' varies according to the input data.
2. The word structure of serial data is 1 start bit
or none)
+
8 data bits
1 or more stop bits.
Error Detection: Parity error
Connector:
+
*.. is printed.
Overrun error
lgnored
Framing error
lgnored
D-SUB 25-pin connector (See Figure 1-5.)
Connector Pin Assignments: Refer to Table 1-11.
t.CH ASSIS GND
2.1X D
~
3.RX D
4.NC
5.NC
G.NC
7. NC
I a.NC
9.NC
20.DTR
21.NC
22.NC
23.NC
24.NC
25.NC
6.NC
7.SIG NAL GND
a.NC
9.NC
'O.NC
It. RE v
'2.NC
13.NC
I 4.NC
I 5.NC
,,
,
®
Figure 1-15. Serial Interface Connector
1-22
+
bits
+
parity (Odd, Even,
REV.-A
Table 1-11. RS-232C Serial Interface Connector Pin Assignments
Pin No.
Signal
Dir.
Description
2
TXD
0
Transmit data.
20
DTR
0
Indicates when printer is ready to receive data. "MARK"
level indicates printer is not ready to receive data.
11
REV(=2nd RTS)
0
Same as DTR.
3
RXD
I
Receive data.
7
SIGNAL GND
-
Signal (Logic) ground level.
1
CHASSIS GND
-
Printer chassis ground.
NOTE: "Direction" of signal flow is as viewed from the printer.
1-23
REV.-A
1.4 FUNCTIONS
This section describes functions of the printer other than printing.
1.4.1 Operating Controls
This section describes the functions that the user controls, and the functions that display messages
for the user.
1.4.1.1 Power Switch
The POWER switch on the left side of the printer is used to turn the printer on
and off. When the printer is turned on or off, it is reset (see Section 1.4.2).
NOTE: Do not turn the printer power on when the ink cartridge is not mounted.
1.4.1.2 Control Panel
This section describes switches and indicators on the control panel. The
control panel consists of nine switches, six indicators, and a 20-column LCD
(Liquid Crystal Display). Figureure 1-16 shows the control panel. (The letter
identifying each description below match those in the figure.)
k
I
m
I
I
/I
I
EOWE~ e:b READY cb 6~~ER cb INK E~ND~~~~~~-r--::M:::IC71=-BlFfFE=ED-rrJ
!
I
L..-
--'
=MENU
r--.
F~
If
PITCH
G
~
SELECTION
PAPER
ep
SELECT
(TEAR OFF
CLEANIN~ESET
=SelecType
Vn
.6
D
=
III,IQ
11
a
I
b
I
I
cnd
0
e
f
Figure 1·16. Control Panel
1-24
9
h
r
REV.-A
Switches
a. FONT
This switch is used to select the standard or external (option) font. The current font is always displayed
on the LCD. Each time this switch is pressed, the font selection changes. This switch is valid in both
the ON LINE and OFF LINE modes. Font selection changes in the sequence shown in Table 1-4.
b. PITCH
This switch is used to select the print pitch. The current print pitch is always displayed on the LCD.
Each time this switch is pressed, the pitch selection changes. This switch is valid in both the ON
LINE and OFF LINE modes. Print pitch selection changes in the sequence shown below.
c. PAPER SELECT
This switch is used to select the paper type. Each time this switch is pressed, the display on the LCD
and the paper feed mechanism selection change in the sequence shown below.
I Tracor I ~ I Friction I ~ I CSF
bin 1
I ~ [CSF~ ~ I Tractor I ~ I Friction I ~ • • • • • • • • • •
The CSF setting "CSF Bin 1/2" is displayed only when the CSF is mounted. When the CSF is mounted,
the word "Friction" will be omitted from the display. This switch is valid only in the OFF LINE mode.
d. TEAR OFF
This switch is valid only when fan-fold paper is used. Pressing this switch advances the paper to
the tear off (paper cut off) position. Pressing it again feeds the paper in reverse to the TOF position.
This switch is valid both in the ON LINE and OFF LINE modes.
e. ON LINE
This switch sets the printer either ON LINE or OFF LINE. Normally, the printer is ON LINE when the
printer is turned on, and waits for data from the host computer. When the printer is set OFF LINE,
it immediately stops printing, and enters the BUSY state.
f. FORM FEED
Pressing this switch advances the paper to the first line (TOF position) of the next page. This switch
is valid only in the OFF LINE mode.
g. LINE FEED
Lightly pressing this switch once advances the paper one line. When the switch is pressed
continuously (for 0.5 sec. or more), the paper advances continuously.The switch is valid only in the
OFF LINE mode.
h. LOAD/EJECT
This switch is used to load or eject paper automatically. When the paper is covering the paper-out
sensor, pressing this switch ejects the paper. When the paper is out, pressing this switch loads the
paper. This switch is valid only in the OFF LINE mode.
1-25
REV.-A
i. MICRO FEED
These switches are used to adjust the paper position. When the switch or the switch are pressed,
the paper advances forward or backward a little bit (micro feed). These switches can be used to adjust
the paper position during TOF position adjustment or tear-off position adjustment.
(See Sections 1.4.1.9 and 1.4.1.10.)
Some of the above switches can be used in combination. The operation is identified by the printer when
the switches are released.
e
+
f. SelecType mode
When the ON LINE and FORM FEED switches are pressed simultaneously, the printer enters the
SelecType mode (Panel setting mode). This operation is valid both in the ON LINE and OFF LINE
modes. (See Section 1.4.1.3.)
e
+
g. CLEANING
When the ON LINE and LINE FEED switches are pressed simultaneously, head cleaning is executed.
This operation is valid only in the OFF LINE mode.
(See Section 1.4.1.6.)
e
+
h. RESET
When the ON LINE and LOAD/EJECT switches are pressed simultaneously, the printer is reset. This
operation is valid both in the ON LINE and OFF LINE modes. (See Section 1.4.2.)
Indicators
j. POWER (Green LED)
Lights when the power switch is on (AC power is supplied) and the power supply circuit is operating
normally.
k. READY (Green LED)
Lights when the printer is ready to receive data (ON LINE: READY).
I.
PAPER OUT (Red LED)
Lights when the printer detects the paper out state.
m. INK END (Red LED)
Lights when the printer detects the ink-out state or when the ink cartridge is not mounted.
n. TEAR OFF (Orange LED)
Lights while the TEAR OFF switch is pressed and the tear off operation is being executed.
o. ON LINE (Green LED)
Lights when the printer is ON LINE. Goes off when the printer is OFF LINE.
1-26
REV.-A
Leo
The printer has an LCD (20 columns x 1 row) on the control panel. The LCD
displays the current font in the 1st to 8th columns, the current character pitch
at the center, and the current paper feed mechanism in the 13th to 20th columns.
•
• Font
Pitch
• Paper feed mechanism
Draft
10 (1 Ocpi)
Friction
Roman
12 (1 2cpi)
Tractor
S Serif (Sans Serif)
15 (15cpi)
CSF bin 1
Courier
17 (17.cpi)
CSF bin2
Prestige
20 (20cpi)
Prestige
PS (Proportional)
Script
OCR-A
OCR-B
Oractor
Oractor-S
Other messages displayed on the LCD and their meanings are as follows:
PAPER OUT
:Indicates the printer is out of paper.
INK END
:Indicates the printer is out of ink, or no ink cartridge is mounted.
SELF TEST
:Indicates that a self test is being executed.
HEX DUMP
:Indicates that the printer is in the hexadecimal dump mode.
TOF ADJUST
:Displayed during TOF position adjustment (See Section 1.4.1.9.)
TEAR OFF ADJUST
:Displayed during the tear off position adjustment
(See Section 1.4.1.10.)
COVER OPEN
:Displayed if the printer cover is open.
ERROR DD
:Displayed if an error occurred. The error number is displayed to indicate
the error type. (For details, see Section 1.4.3.4 and Chapter 5.)
o=
3
No C.G. ROM is mounted, or the C.G. ROM is defective.
= Defective READ/WRITE operation of the EEPROM
10 = Carriage motor control error
20 = CPU error
CLEANING
:Displayed during head cleaning (See Section 1.4.1.6.)
INK CHARGE (time)
:Displayed during ink supply operation. The time it takes to complete
supplying the ink is also displayed. (See Section 1.4.1.7.)
PLEASE TEAR OFF
:Instruction displayed during tear off operation. (See Section 1.4.1.10.)
CAN NOT BACK OUT
:This is displayed if the paper cannot be ejected after feeding the paper
22" (maximum paper length).
MEMORY CLEAR
:Indicates that the entire contents of the memory were cleared. (See
Sections 1.4.1.3. and 1.4.2.1.)
1-27
REV.-A
1.4.1.3 SelecType
This section describes the SelecType (Panel setting) function.
In the SelecType mode, default value settings can be selected using the four switches on the control
panel and messages displayed on the LCD.
•
Entering the SelecType mode.
Press both the
•
I ON
LINE
I and I FORM
FEED I switches.
If these switches are pressed again, the printer exits the SelecType mo,de (exits the panel setting
mode).
Values will become valid as they are set in the SelecType mode. However, the following settings will
become valid the next time the printer power is turned on.
ON/OFF of Auto LF
Valid/Invalid of DC 1/DC3
Once the values are set, they are stored in the memory, which is backed up. Since the settings will remain
even after the printer power is turned off, the values displayed on the LCD will be set as default values
the next time the printer power is turned on. Therefore, the printer has no DIP switches. Back up is
performed with a battery, and requires no maintenance.
The following page shows the operation flow in the SelecType mode.
If you want to reset the default settings to the factory set values, clear the memory as described below:
•
Clearing the memory
I
I
Turn the printer power on while pressing both the ON LINE and
I LOAD/EJECT I switches.
When the memory is cleared correctly, the following message will be displayed on
the LCD:
I MEMORY CLEAR
Messages displayed on the LCD change in the sequence shown in the Table below, and the buzzer rings.
1-28
REV.-A
Table 1-12. Operation Flow in the SelecType Mode
Selection Item
PITCH
FONT
11
Value to be set
11
11
PAPER SELECT
11
11
I
11
11
I
I
I
11
TEAR OFF
Explanatory Note
Font
Draft, Roman, Sans Serif, Courier,
Prestige, Script, OCR-A, OCR-B,
Orator, Orator-s
Font selection (standard internal or optional external)
PITCH
10CPI, 12CPI, 15CPI, 17CPI
20CPI, Propo.
Character pitch (number of characters/inch) selection
LINE SPACING
1/6 inch, 1/8 inch
Set the line feed amount
PAGE TRACTOR
line ( = 24 to 132 lines)
Set the number of lines per page for fan-fold paper.
(one line = 1/6")
PAGE CSF BN1
line ( = 24 to 132 lines)
Set the number of lines per page for the paper in the singlebin CSF. (NOTE 1)
PAGE CSF BN2
line ( = 24 to 132 lines)
Set the number of lines per page for the paper in the doublebin CSF. (NOTE 2)
1" SKIP
On, OffSet 1" skip-over perforation
function for fan-fold paper.
AUTO TEAR OFF
On, Off
Set the auto tear-off function.
(See Section 1.4.1.10.)
LEFT MARGIN
( = number of columns at 10 CPI)
Set the left margin in columns.
(NOTE 2)
RIGHT MARGIN
( = number of columns at 10 CPI)
Set the right margin in columns.
(NOTE 3)
CG TABLE
Italic, Graphic, Download
Select the character code table (ASCII code: 80H through FFH).
COUNTRY
USA, France, Germany, UK, Demmark 1, Sweden, Italy, Spain 1,
Japan, Norway, Denmark 2, Spain
2, L.America, Korea, Legal
Select the International character set.
PRINT DIR.
Bi-D, Uni-D
Select printing direction for text characters. (NOTE 4)
INTERFACE
Parallel, Serial
Select the interface. (Functions of the deselected interface become invalid.)
BAUD RATE
300,600,1200,2400,4800,
9600, 19200 (BPS)
Set the bit rate for the serial interface. (NOTE 5)
PARITY
None, Even, Odd, Ignore
Set parity for the serial interface. (NOTE 5)
AUTO LINE FEED
On, Off
Set AUTO LINE FEED XT. (See Section 1.3.1.)
DC1/DC3
Disable, Enable
Set DC 1/DC3 code control. (See Section 1.3.1.)
1-29
REV.-A
NOTE 1: Displayed only when the CSF is mounted.
NOTE 2: Range of the left margin is as follows:
SO-850 : 0 to 45 columns
SO-2550: 0 to 80 columns
The left margin must not exceed the right margin.
NOTE 3: Range of the right margin is automatically calculated from the left margin as shown below:
SO-850 : Left margin
SO-2550: Left margin
+
+
1 to 80 columns
1 to 136 columns
NOTE 4: Displayed only when the serial interface is selected. (Not displayed when the parallel interface
is selected.)
NOTE 5: Displayed only when the Serial interface is selected.
NOTE 6: Since the following combinations are impossible, they will be automatically ignored.
Draft
+
Proportional
OCR-B
+
+
15 CPI
Orator
+
15 CPI
OCR-A
Orator-S
15 CPI
+
15 CPI
NOTE 7: The values set in the SelecType mode will be printed when the self test is executed.
1-30
REV.-A
1.4.1.4 Self Test Function
The printer has self test functions to check the following items:
•
PROM version number
•
•
Panel settings
Control circuit functions
•
Printer mechanism functions and print quality
The settings changed in the SelecType mode are printed in the self test mode. When a self test is
executed using paper from the CSF, the page length is calculated by feeding the paper using 1/6" line
feeds, and 'This is the first line." and "This is D D line." are printed on the first and last lines of the
first page, respectively. In this way, you can confirm the number of printable lines.
When an error occurs, the location of the problem (the host computer or the printer) can be determined
by executing the self test. The self test operation flow is shown below:
Starting the self test in the Draft mode
Turn the printer power on while pressing the
I LINE
FEED
I switch.
Starting the self test in the LQ mode
Turn the printer power on while pressing the
I FORM
FEED
I switch.
Stopping or resuming the self test
Press the I ON LINE I switch. (The ON LINE LED does not light.)
Exiting the self test mode
Stop printing by pressing the
I ON
LINE I switch, then turn the printer power off.
WARNING
• To exit the self test mode, be sure to stop printing first as described above. If the stop
operation is omitted, the printhead cannot be capped correctly. This might cause problems
(e.g. the printhead could clog or the carriage may operate abnormally).
1-31
REV.-A
1.4.1.5 Hexadecimal Dump Function
The hexadecimal dump (HEX. dump) function causes the printer to print the received data in
hexadecimal. The printer prints 16 values in hexadecimal, followed by the corresponding ASCII
characters on one line. If there is no corresponding printable character for a value (e.g. a control code),
a period (.) is printed. If less than 16 values remain at the end of the dump, the last line can be printed
by pressing the ON LINE switch.
When the printer is in the hexadecimal dump mode, it cannot enter the SelecType mode. (Some of the
settings changed in the SelecType mode are reflected in the printing format.)
If trouble occurs, the hexadecimal dump function can be used to check if the data from the host
computer is correct.
Entering the hexadecimal dump mode
Turn the printer power on while pressing both the
I FORM
FEED
I and I LINE
FEED I switches.
Stopping and exiting the hexadecimal dump mode
I
I
Stop printing by pressing the ON LINE switch, then turn the printer power off.
NOTE: To exit the hexadecimal dump mode, be sure to stop printing first as described above. If the
stop operation is omitted, the printhead cannot be capped correctly. This might cause trouble
(e.g. the printhead could clog or the carriage might operate abnormally).
1-32
REV.-A
1.4.1.6 Printhead Cleaning and Capping
The printer has cleaning and capping functions to protect the printhead from damage (for details of
each operation, see Chapter 2). There are two types of cleaning, arbitrary and automatic. Normally, the
printhead is capped to prevent from damage. Arbitrary cleaning is required when printing becomes
abnormal (e.g. a specific dot is missing, or the printing color is not uniform).
WARNING
• Turn the printer power off only after confirming that the printhead is capped. If the
printhead has been uncapped for a long time, printing might be abnormal (e.g. a specific
dot is missing) because the printhead gets dried out and clogs.
• Never turn the printer power off during cleaning. (The reasons are the same as those
described above.)
• Do not execute cleaning unnecessarily. The life of the ink cartridge will be shortened.
Arbitrary cleaning
Press both the I-O-N-L-I-N-E-'I and
I LINE
FEED
I switches when
the printer is OFF LINE.
Automatic cleaning
The printer automatically executes cleaning in the following cases:
•
When the printer power is turned on after 145.6 hours or more have passed since the last cleaning
operation.
~
~
Power ON:Cleaning is not executed
CI~aningp:~
,
C
[
=_
F=====
==========
Power ON:Cleaning is executed
I
I
I
I
145.6 hours
Figure 1-17. Head Cleaning Timing Chart
•
When the printer power is turned on and the printhead is found to be uncapped.
•
When the printer is reset with the printhead uncapped.
Similarly, capping will be executed in the following cases:
•
If printing is not executed continuously while the printer power is on. (When a few seconds have
passed after printing had been stopped.)
For reference, the amount of ink consumed when cleaning or capping is executed
or when printer initialization is executed at power on are as follows:
Automatic cleaning at time-out
:Approx. 0.5 cc
Arbitrary cleaning
:Approx. 2.0 cc
Normal capping
:Approx. 0.009 cc
Capping when the carriage is at any position other than the home position
(assuming that the printhead has been uncapped for a long time)
:Approx. 0.5 cc
Initial sequence at power on
:Approx. 0.03 cc
1-33
REV.-A
1.4.1.7 Ink Charge Function
The following operations are performed before the printer is delivered from the factory to prevent the
printhead from being damaged (so that it can be stored indefinitely):
•
The ink path is cleaned using a special cleaning liquid.
•
The cleaning liquid is completely discharged.
•
The printhead is capped.
•
The ink cartridge is removed.
Ink cartridge removal
Ink path cleaning
(removes ink used for printing inspection)
Figure 1-18. Ink Path Conditions at Delivery from the Factory
The ink supply operation is used to prepare the printer after storage.
Step 1: Remove all protective parts that were installed for transit. (For the protective parts, see Chapter
4.)
Step 2: Mount the ink cartridge.
Step 3: Turn the printer power on while pressing both the I ON LINE I and
I LINE
FEED I switches.
During the ink supply operation, the LCD displays "INK CHARGE XXX." XXX indicates the time required
to complete the operation, and it will be completed when the value reaches 000.
For reference, the amount of ink consumed during the ink supply operation is approximately 15cc.
1-34
REV.-A
1.4.1.8 Paper Load/Eject Function
WARNING
• Do not turn the manual paper feed knob, unless a paper jam occurs. The reasons are as
follows:
Usually, reverse paper feeding is prohibited by the software to prevent the paper from being
smudged. If the feed knob is operated manually, this protection is overriden.
Positions set in the SelecType mode, such as TOF or tear off positions, will be shifted .
• Never feed the paper in the reverse direction when printing labels. Otherwis a label might
adhere to the printer.
Paper handling in this printer is completely automated. By pressing the corresponding switch on the
control panel, the printer executes as follows:
•
Loading/ejecting a cut sheet
1. Set a cut sheet at the sheet guide.
2. Press the
I LOAD/EJECT I switch.
When the printer is in the paper out state: Loads
1
•
the paper
(advances the paper to the TOP position, then
stops).
When the paper is in the printer: Ejects the
paper.
Loading/ejecting fan-fold paper
1. Set the paper at the sprockets of the tractor.
2. Press the
I LOAD/EJECT I switch.
1
When the printer is in the paper out state:
Loads the paper (advances to the TOF position,
then stops).
When the paper is in the printer: Executes back
out.
(Back out: Feeds the paper in the reverse direction, then ejects it.)
•
Switching between tractor and friction feed (cut sheet/CSF) mechanisms
Switching from the tractor to the friction mechanism
1. Press the PAPER SELECT switch.
2. Back out the fan-fold paper.
3. Cancel the push tractor mechanism, then select the friction mechanism.
4. Load the paper from the sheet guide or the CSF.
Switching from the friction to the tractor mechanism
1. Press the PAPER SELECT switch.
2. Eject the cut sheet.
3. Cancel the friction mechanism, then select the push tractor mechanism.
4. Load the fan-fold paper set at the push tractor.
1-35
REV.-A
NOTE 1: When executing push-pull feed with the pull tractor mounted, the paper load/eject function
cannot be used because the paper comes out the pull side each time a back out is executed.
(For details, see Chapter 3.)
NOTE 2: When the paper is loaded, the default TOF position is 8.5 mm from the top edge of the paper.
(This is factory set.)
1.4.1.9 TOF Adjustment FOnction
The TOF position can be adjusted (set to any position) just after the paper is loaded (NOTE 1) by using
the MICRO FEED switch on the control panel. Once the TOF value is set, it is stored in the memory, and
remains in effect even after the printer power is turned off.
When the MICRO FEED switch is pressed;
I TOF ADJUST
The message shown above is displayed on the LCD. Since a TOF value can be set
for four types of paper as shown below, it is not necessary to check the value
after changing the paper type. (The right side indicates the TOP range.)
•
Cut sheet (NOTE 2)
: 8.5 to 27.5 mm
•
Fan-fold paper
: 8.5 to 34 mm
•
Paper for the single-bin CSF
: 8.5 to 34 mm
•
Paper for the double-bin CSF
: 8.5 to 34 mm
During micro adjustment, the buzzer rings at 8.5 mm and 22 mm from the top edge
of the paper to indicate these reference positions.
NOTE 1: If printing or paper feeding is executed after loading the paper, the printer cannot enter the
TOF adjustment mode.
NOTE 2: When loading the paper from the sheet guide without the CSF mounted.
REV.-A
1.4.1.10 Tear Off Function
The tear off function matches the position to be cut (paper bail position) with the perforation for
tearing-off the fan-fold paper. This function has two modes, manual and automatic.
•
The paper can be fed to the paper cut position (tear off position) as follows:
Manual mode
Press the I-=T=E:-::-A-=R-O=-:F=F=-I switc h.
Automatic mode
Select"AUTO TEAR OFF ON" in the SelecType mode. This function will be valid only when the following
conditions are met. (The auto tear off function will be ignored if any of the following conditions is not
met.)
No data is being received from the host computer after printing is completed.
The waiting position at that time is the TOF position of the paper.
•
When the tear off function is started in either the manual or auto mode, the printer advances the
perforation to the paper bail position, and displays the following message on the LCD.
I PLEASE TEAR OFF
•
After the paper is torn off, it is returned to the original position regardless of the mode (manual or
auto), in any of the following cases:
When the I TEAR OFF I switch is pressed.
When the printer is set I ON LINE I by pressing the ON LINE switch.
When print data is received from the host computer.
In the tear off mode, the tear off position can be adjusted using the MICRO FEED
switch. The following message will be displayed on the LCD panel when the MICRO
FEED switch is pressed in the tear off mode.
I TEAR OFF ADJUST
The value set is stored in the memory, and remains even after the printer power
is turned off. The paper is fed to the new tear off position when a tear off operation is executed after
the setting.
1-37
REV.-A
1.4.1.11 Reverse Paper Feed Protection
Since the ink is still wet just after printing, the paper will be smudged if it is rubbed by something.
In this printer, nothing rubs the paper when it is fed in the forward direction. However, as shown in
Figure 1-22, the paper touches the paper guide plate when it is fed in the reverse direction.
Therefore, reverse paper feeding is prohibited by the software (soft protect operation) to prevent the
paper from being smudged. The soft protect operates as follows:
•
Cut Sheets
If reverse paper feeding is executed by pressing the MICRO FEED switch after printing, the paper
will only be fed until the line printed last reaches the paper guide plate position. (The platen will
not rotate in the reverse direction any farther.)
•
Fan-fold paper
If reverse paper feeding is executed by pressing the MICRO FEED switch after printing, the paper
will only be fed until the line printed last reaches the paper guide plate position. (The platen will
not rotate in the reverse direction any farther.)
If an eject (back out) operation is attempted just after printing, it will be ignored, and the following
message will be displayed on the LCD.
I PLEASE TEAR
OFF
The paper cannot be ejected unless the paper is cut off by pressing the TEAR OFF switch.
•
CSF
When printing is executed with the CSF mounted, reverse paper feeding cannot be executed at all.
o
o
Line printed last
o
I
EPSON INK JET PRINTER
I
L
Paper guide plate
EPSON INK JET PRINTER
_
o
EPSON INK JET PRINTER
-------------
Figure 1-19. Paper Conditions Just After Printing
Since the above described reverse paper feed protection is controlled by the software, it will not work
if the paper feed knob is operated manually.
1-38
REV.-A
1.4.2 Reset Function
This section describes the printer initialization (reset) operations and their timings, and the default
values.
1.4.2.1 Initialization Timing and Operation
The following shows the timings when printer initialization is executed systematically:
Initialization
Hardware reset
• Internal power reset circuit (when the printer power is turned on
or off)
• When the INIT signal is received from the host computer: (NOTE)
• When reset operation is executed manually:
Press both the ON LINE and LOAD/EJECT switches,
simultaneously.
Software reset
• When the ESC @ code is received from the host computer:
Hardware reset operation
•
Printer mechanism is reset (including head cleaning).
•
Input data buffer is cleared.
•
Print buffer is cleared.
•
Default values are set.
Software reset operation
This differs from the hardware reset operation in the following points:
•
The printer mechanism is not reset.
•
The input data buffer is not cleared.
•
The following values set in the SelecType mode do not change from those set at the previous
hardware reset.
ON/OFF of Auto LF
Select/deselect of DC lIDC3
NOTE: In this case only, head cleaning is not executed.
1-39
REV.-A
1.4.2.2 Default Values
The values set as defaults are as follows:
Page position:
The current paper position becomes the top-of-page position.
Vertical tab positions:
Nothing is set.
Horizontal tab positions:
Every eight characters (relative setting)
VFU channel:
Channel 0
Download characters:
Deselect. All down load characters are cleared.
Justification:
Left justification only is selected.
Character spacing:
No additional spacing is selected.
Bit image mode assignment:
ESC K = ESC * 0
ESC L
=
ESC * 1
ESC Y = ESC * 2
ESC Z = ESC * 3
Other settings
•
The values selected in the SelecType mode are set. When the software reset is executed, the
following settings will be reset:
ON/OFF of auto LF
Select/deselect of DC 1/DC3
ON/OFF of superscript mode
•
Items listed neither in the above lists nor in the SelecType mode are basically set OFF.
1.4.3 Various Detection Functions
This section describes each detection function of the printer.
1.4.3.1 Ink-End Detection Function
This printer has an ink-end detection function. An ink end is detected by the ink-end sensor in the printer
mechanism. The ink-end is detected when any of the following occurs:
Ink-end - - - - - - - - a. Ink cartridge runs out of ink.
- - - - b. No ink cartridge is mounted or the ink cartridge is removed during printing
When the printer detects the ink-end, it rings the buzzer, lights the INK END
LED on the control panel, and displays the following message on the LCD.
liNK END
1-40
REV.-A
Then, the printer operates as follows:
When a. occurs:
200 lines can be printed after the message is displayed. Then, the printer
automatically goes OFF LINE, and enters an error state.
When b. occurs:
The printer automatically goes OFF LINE immediately after displaying the
message, and enters an error state.
To make the printer recover from the ink end state, mount a new ink cartridge and set the printer ON
LINE. (Printing executed when the ink-end was detected will be resumed. No data will be lost.)
1.4.3.2 Paper-Out Detection and Forms Override Functions
The printer has a paper-out detection function. A paper-out is detected by the paper-out sensor (at the
lower left of the platen) in the printer mechanism.
Paper-out
---~----
When a cut sheet or fan-fold paper is used:
•
No paper is loaded.
• The end of the paper is detected.
When the CSF is mounted:
• The printer does not exit the paper-out state after the
paper is loaded.
Even after the end of the paper is detected, the printer does not immediately enter the paper out state
so that printing can be continued up to 13.5 mm from the actual paper end by the forms override
mechanism. Therefore, the printer enters the paper out state after feeding paper until the printhead
reaches the position 13.5 mm from the bottom edge of the paper.
When the printer enters the paper-out state, it rings the buzzer, lights the PAPER OUT LED on the control
panel, and displays the following message on the LCD.
I PAPER OUT
The paper-out state is identified as an error state. Therefore, the printer sets the following interface
signals as shown below, then automatically goes OFF LINE.
•
Parallel interface
•
Serial interface
BUSY signal
: HIGH
REV signal
: MARK
PE signal
: HIGH
X code
: Outputs XOFF.
ERROR signal
: LOW
ACKNLG signal
: Does not return it.
To make the printer recover from the paper-out state, load new paper and set the printer ON LINE.
(Printing executed when the paper out was detected will be resumed. No data will be lost.)
1-41
REV.-A
1.4.3.3 Cover Open Detection Function
Because the printhead moves from left to right and right to left repeatedly at high speed during printing,
it is very dangerous to execute printing with the printer cover open. The printer has a cover-open
detection function to prevent the user from putting his/her hand inside or from dropping something
in the printer mechanism by mistake.
Whenever the printer cover is opened, the printer goes OFF LINE, rings the buzzer, and displays the
following message on the LCD panel.
I COVER
OPEN
To make the printer recover from the cover-open state, shut the printer coverb and set the printer ON
LINE. (printing executed when the cover was opened will be resumed. No data will be lost.)
1.4.3.4 Error Detection Mechanism
The printer enters an error state when any of the following occurs:
•
Printer is set OFF LINE:
•
Paper-out is detected: (See Section 1.4.3.2.)
•
Ink-end is detected: (See Section 1.4.3.1.)
•
Cover-open state is detected:
For the following errors, the defective component can be determined from the
message displayed on the LCD:
: Error 0
•
•
C.G. error
EEROM READ/WRITE error
: Error 3
•
Carriage control error
: Error 10
•
CPU error
: Error 20
NOTE: For the causes of the above errors, see Chapter 5.
If an error occurs, the printer sets the interface signals as shown below, and inhibits data transmission.
•
•
Parallel interface
BUSY signal
: HIGH
ERROR signal
: LOW
1-42
Serial interface
REV signal
: MARK
X code
: Outputs XOFF.
REV.-A
1.4.1.5 Buzzer
The buzzer rings as follows:
When the BEL code of the ESC command is input:
! x specified times
When an ink-end is detected:
! ! ! (five times)
When paper-out is detected:
! (three times)
When the cover-open state is detected:
! ! ! (five times)
When an error is detected:
! (five times)
When the printer enters the SelecType mode:
During the TOF position adjustment
(at 8.5 mm and 22 mm positions):
1-43
REV.-A
1.5 MAIN COMPONENTS
The printer consists of the following major components:
•
Printer mechanism unit:
Model-4410 (SO-850)
Model-4460 (SO-2550);
•
Power supply circuit board:
SEIPS (120 V operation)
SANPSE (220/240 V operation);
•
Control circuit board (main board):
SEIMA board unit;
•
Control panel unit:
SEIPNL board unit;
•
Housing;
1.5.1 Printer Mechanism
The model numbers of the printer mechanisms are 4410 for the 80-column model and 4460 for the
136-column model. The main difference between the two is the number of printable columns. Otherwise
they are basically the same.
The printer mechanism is composed of a printing mechanism (carriage and printhead), paper feed
mechanism, ink supply mechanism, and pump.
The printer mechanism has the following features when compared with the conventional basic printer
mechanism used in the SO-series printers:
•
A paper top edge holding mechanism that enables use of the entire paper effectively, and an auto
release mechanism to automate paper handling, are newly added to the paper feed mechanism.
•
Replacement of the ink cartridge is made easier by locating the ink cartridge holder at the front of
the printer mechanism.
< Model-441 0 >
<Model-4460>
Figure 1-20. Printer Mechanism Model-441 0/4460
1-44
REV.-A
1.5.2 SEIPS/SANPSE Board Unit
The SEIPS and SANPSE board units are the power supply units designed for 120 V and 220/240 V
operation, respectively.
The SEIPS/SANPSE board unit is a power supply which supplies DC voltages to the
mechanisms and control/drive circuits, and is composed of an AC cable, switching board, and regulator
circuit.
By employing a switching regulator (DC to DC converter), circuits in the SEIPS/SANPSE board were
made very compact but which work very efficiently. The 494 is employed as a controller in the regulator
circuit.
494
Figure 1-21. SEIPS Board Unit
Figure 1-22. SANPSE Board Unit
1-45
REV.-A
1.5.3 SEIMA Board
The SEIMA board is the main board in the printer, and contains a logic control circuit and an analog
circuit. The parallel interface connector for the host computer, the connector for the externa! font/PROM
cartridge, and the connector for other units are also included.
The HD64180 CPU (1 OC) is used, and the following memories and gate arrays are assigned in the
262K-byte external address space.
•
•
Memories
512K-byte CPU program ROM
: 128
4M-byte C.G. (Character Generator)
: 108
256K-byte PSRAM
: 118
256K-byte SRAM
: 13C
Gate arrays
Parallel Interface (PIF)
: 12C
Memory Management Unit (MMU)
:88
Printhead Controller (PHC)
:68
DC Motor Control Unit (DCU)
:48
Motor Control Unit (MCU)
:2A
The logic circuits are composed of the above ICs.
The analog circuits consist of the circuits for each mechanism, a buzzer circuit, and a battery circuit.
A lithium battery in the battery circuit backs up the head cleaning timer, in addition to the SRAM (13C)
which stores the values set in the SelecType mode, while the printer power is off. The lithium battery
requires no maintenance.
Figure 1-23. SEIMA Board
1-46
REV.-A
1.5.4 SEIPNL Board
The SEIPNL board is composed of a board and a case. The following are mounted on the board:
•
20 column LCD (Liquid Crystal Display)
•
•
LCD controller
Non-volatile memory: 256K-byte EEPROM
•
Switches and LEDs
•
Cover-open sensor
•
Other general purpose TTL ICs
All of the above are contained on the single SEIPNL board.
The SEIPNL board is controlled by a serial connecting to the SEIMA board.
Figure 1-24. SEIPNL Board
1-47
REV.-A
1.5.5 Housing
The basic configuration of the housing is the same as that of a conventional printer. The components
mounted on the lower case are covered by the upper case. Differences between this and a conventional
case are as follows:
•
A door for replacing the ink cartridge has been added at the front of the lower case.
•
An option board cover for replacing the optional interface has been added to the upper case.
•
The printer cover is divided into two pieces, and one of them is a half-fixed type.
•
The direction of the slot for the optional cartridge was changed from vertical to horizontal.
The paper support (separator) was normally used for both cut sheets and fan-fold paper, but it should
be removed when the CSF is mounted. When the optional pull tractor is mounted, replace it with the
special separator.
Option board cover
Printer cover
Ink cartridge door
Figure 1-25. Housing
1-48
REV.-A
CHAPTER 2
OPERATING PRINCIPLES
2.1
OVER VIEW
2-1
2.2
Summary of the Theory of Operation
2-2
2.2.1
Component Connections
2-2
2.2.2
Summary of the Printer Mechanism
2-4
2.2.3
Summary of the Power Supply Circuit
2-6
2.2.4
Summary of the Control Circuit
2-7
2.3
2.4
OPERATION OF THE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2-11
2.3.1
Power Supply Circuit Block Diagram
2-11
2.3.2
Filter Circuit
2-12
2.3.3
Rectifier and Smoothing Circuit
2-13
2.3.4
Starting Circuit (Main Switching Circuit)
2·13
2.3.5
+ 24
2·16
2.3.6
+5
2.3.7
Voltage Limitig Circuit
2-22
2.3.8
± 12 VDC Supply Circuit
2-23
VDC Voltage Control Circuit
VDC Regulator Circuit
2-18
CONTROL CIRCUIT AND PRINTER
MECHANISM OPERATION
2-24
2.4.1
Operation of the Paper Feed Mechanism
2-24
2.4.1.1
Paper feed mechanism
2·24
2.4.1.2
Paper Feed Motor Control
2-26
2.4.1.3
Paper Feed Motor Drive Circuit
2-28
2.4.1.4
Top Edge Holder Mechanism Operation
2-33
2.4.1.5
TE Holder Motor Contol
2-34
2.4.1.6
Top Edge Holder Motor Drive Circuit
2-36
2.4.1.7
Paper-end Sensor and Top·edge Sensor
2·37
2.4.1.8
Paper Change Mechanism
(Friction Tractor)
2.4.1.9
Control Circuit
for the Paper Change Mechanism
2.4.2
2-39
2-40
2.4.1.10 CSF Sensor
2-41
Operation of the Print Mechanism
2-42
2.4.2.1
Carriage Mechanism
2·42
2.4.2.2
Carriage Motor Control
2-44
2.4.2.3
Revolution control
2-45
2.4.2.4
Drive Circuit Control
2-49
2-i
REV.-A
2.4.3
2.4.2.5
Carriage Position Control
2-51
2.4.2.6
Print Timing Signal Generation
2-52
2.4.2.7
Print Head
2-53
2.4.2.8
Printer Head Controls
2-56
2.4.2.9
Printer Head Drive Circuit
2-57
Ink Mechanism
2-62
2.4.3.1
Pump Motor Operation
2-63
2.4.3.2
Pump Motor Control and Drive Circuit
2-64
2.4.3.3
Pump Mechanism
2-64
2.4.3.4
Pump Construction
2-65
2.4.3.5
Capping Mechanism
2-65
2.4.3.6
Brushing Mechanism
2·66
2.4.3.7
Valve Mechanism
2-66
2.4.3.8
Valve Solenoid Driving Circuit
2-67
2.4.3.9
Cap Damper and Ink Reservoir
2-68
2.4.3.10 Ink Cartridge and Ink End Sensor
2·68
2.4.3.11 Operation Sequence of Pump Unit
2-70
2.4.4
Vx Power Supply Circuit and Reset Signal Circuit
2-71
2.4.5
Timer and Backup Circuitry
2-72
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 2-1.
SO-850/2550 Component Connections
2-2
Figure 2-2.
Summary of the Printer Mechanism
2-5
Figure 2-3.
Overview of Power Supply Circuit Operation
2-6
Figure 2-4.
Control Circuit Block Diagram
2-10
Figure 2-5.
Power Supply Circuit Block Diagram
2-11
Figure 2·6.
Filter Circuit (SEIPS Board,120V Version)
2-12
Figure 2·7.
Filter Circuit (SANPSE Board, 220/240V Version)
2-12
Figure 2·8.
Rectifier and Smoothing Circuit
2-13
Figure 2-9.
Starting Circuit (Main Switching Circuit)
2·14
Figure 2-10. Main Switching Circuit Waveforms
2-15
Figure 2·11. + 24 VDC Voltage Control Circuit
2-16
Figure 2-12. Switching Circuit (When PC1 Operation)
2·17
Figure 2·13. Over-Current Protection (OCP)
2-17
Figure 2·14. +5 VDC Regulator Circuit
2-18
Figure 2·15. Oscillator Waveforms
2-19
2-ii
REV.-A
Figure 2-16. Constant Voltage Control
2-19
Figure 2·17. EA1 Outoput
2-19
Figure 2-18. Over-Current Protection (OCP)
2-20
Figure 2-19. IC494 Internal Circuit
2-21
Figure 2-20. PWM Output
2-22
Figure 2-21. Voltage Limiting Circuit
2-22
Figure 2-22. ± 12 VDC Supply Ciucuit
2-23
Figure 2-23. Friction Feed
2-25
Figure 2-24. Tractor Feed
2-25
Figure 2-25. Paper Feed Motor and Control Circuit
Block Diagram
2-27
Figure 2·26. TM1 Signal and PFA/A Signal
Operation Wave Forms
2-27
Figure 2-27. Paper Feed Motor Control Sequence
2-27
Figure 2-28. SLA7020M Internal Block Diagram
2-28
Figure 2-29. Constant-Current Drive Circuit
2-31
Figure 2-30. Section Operation Wave Forms
2-31
Figure 2·31. Excitation Signal Input Circuit
2·32
Figure 2-32. 2-2 Phase Excitation Timing Chart
2-32
Figure 2-33. TE Holder Mechanism
2-33
Figure 2-34. Top Edge Holding Control Circuit
Block Diagram
2·34
Figure 2-35. TM2 Signal and TEA Signal Operation
Wave Forms
2·35
Figure 2-36. Top Edge Holding Motor Control Sequence
(Independent Mode)
2-35
Figure 2-37. Top Edge Holder Moter Circuit
2·36
Figure 2-38. Operating Waveform
for the Top Edge Holder Moter Driver Circuit
2-36
Figure 2·39. PE Senser and TE Sensor
2·37
Figure 2·40. Senser Interface
2-38
Figure 2·41. Senser Detection
2·38
Figure 2·42. Paper Change Mechanism
2-39
Figure 2·43. Block Diagram
of Paper Change Mechanism Control Circuit
2·40
Figure 2-44. Waveform for Release Solenoid Drive Operation
2·40
Figure 2·45. CSF sensor
2·41
Figure 2-46. Carriage Mechanism
2·43
2-iii
REV.-A
Figure 2·47. Block Diagram of Carriage Motor Control Circuit
2-44
Figure 2-48. PLL control(at normal speed)
2·46
Figure 2-49. PLL control(at accelerated speed)
2·46
Figure 2-50. PLL control(at reduced speed)
2·46
Figure 2-51. PRC(Accelerated speed)
2-47
Figure 2-52. Acceleration by Full Energizing
2-48
Figure 2-53. Carriage Motor Drive Circuit
2-50
Figure 2-54. Carriage Motor Current Wave Forms
2-50
Figure 2-55. Encoder Output Wave Form
2-51
Figure 2-56. Control Positions
2-51
Figure 2·57. PTS Signal Wave Form
2-52
Figure 2-58. Head Construction
2-54
Figure 2-59. Nozzle Construction
2·54
Figure 2-60. Printing Principle(1)
2-55
Figure 2-61. Printing Principle(2)
2-55
Figure 2-62. Printing Principle(3)
2-55
Figure 2-63. Print Head Control Circuit Block Diagram
2-56
Figure 2-64. Charge and Discharge Circuit
2·57
Figure 2·65. Charge and Discharge Pulse Timing
2-58
Figure 2·66. Discharging Wave Form
2-58
Figure 2-67. Charging Wave Form
2-58
Figure 2-68. Vh Supply Main Circuit
2-59
Figure 2-69. 494 Switching Wave Form
2·59
Figure 2·70. Constant Voltage Control Circuit
2-60
Figure 2·71. Relationship Between Ink Temperature
and Drive Voltage
2·60
Figure 2-72. Current Limit Circuit
2·61
Figure 2-73. Over-voltage Limit Circuit
2-61
Figure 2-74. Outlined Ink Mechanism System
2-62
Figure 2·75. P Motor Power Transmission
2-63
Figure 2·76. Pump Motor Control
and Drive Circuit Block Diagram
2·64
Figure 2-77. Pump movement
2·64
Figure 2-78. Pump Construction
2·65
Figure 2-79. Cap Movement
2-65
Figure 2-80. Cleaner Movement
2-66
Figure 2-81. Valve Movement
2-67
Figure 2-82. Valve Solenoid Driving Wave form
2-67
2-iv
REV.-A
Figure 2-83. Cap Damper and Ink Reservoir
2-68
Figure 2-84. Composition of InK Cartridge
2-69
Figure 2-85. Composition of Ink Cartridge Holder
2-69
Figure 2-86. Vx Power Supply Wave form
2-71
Figure 2-87. Block Diagram of Power-On Reset Pulse Supply
2-71
Figure 2-88. Timer and Backup Circuit Block Diagram
2·72
Figure 2-89. Backup Circuit Operation While Power OFF
2-73
Figure 2-90. Clock Circuit While Power OFF
2-73
LIST OF TABLES
Table 2-1. Connector Summary
2-3
Table 2-2. Power Supply Applications
2-6
Table 2-3. Standard Voltages
2-30
Table 2-4. Carriage speeds
2-45
Table 2-5. Current Signals
2-49
Table 2-6. Drive Voltage
2-53
Table 2·7. Rotation of P Motor and Movement of Others
2-63
Table 2-8. Ink-end Signal
2-69
2-v
REV.-A
REV.-A
2.1 OVER VI EW
This chapter explains the theory of operation of the main printer.
Section 2.2 gives a summary of the theory of operation of the main printer as preparation for explaining
the main printer in detail. Section 2.2 onward explains the relationship between the circuitry and
mechanisms for the theory of operation for the various components. A variety of ICs are used in the
electrical circuits. Please read this chapter in addition to the Appendix for details.
2.2 Summary of the Theory of Operation
The theory of operation for the component connections, mechanisms, and electrical circuits are
explained here. Although the basic contents of the explanations given here are subjective, 2.3 explains
the meanings of abbreviations and the various mechanical connections. Accordingly, if you don't read
the main section first, section 2.3 will be difficult to understand.
2-1
REV.-A
2.2.1 Component Connections
Figure 2-1 shows the component connections for the main unit, and Table 2-1 provides a summary of
the connectors.
Model-4110/4160 Printer Mechanism
CRH
PE
lE
ICE
TH
TE
CSF
RL
RLS
CM
EN
PF
TE
PM
VBS HEAD
SEIMA Board
SEIPNL
Board
Font
Module
r-,
Ir--~
@F , 0 __, ~~~~----,
I
Optional
IIF
Board
I
_____
I
I
I
I
I
I
____ I
,
I
I
I
,
Extend
I
:
CG
:
I
Board
'
I
I
,
ID Module
Font
Module
'
'
-------
'
1
Cover
Open
Sensor
CN2
SEIPS
(120VAC)
SANPSE
(2201240VAC)
Board
Host Computer
*.... Future
Spec.
AC Power
Figure 2-1. 8Q-850/2550 Component Connections
2-2
REV.-A
Table 2-1. Connector Summary
Unit
SEIPS
SEIPSE
SEIMA
SEIPNL
Connector
Number
Description
Number
of Pins
Color
CN1
AC power source input
3
White
CN2
DC voltage (to SEIMA board)
10
White
CN1
8-bit standard parallel interface connector
36
CN2
Option interface connection
26
Black
CN3
RS-232C standard serial interface connector
26
Black
CN4
Option ID module connection (Slot A)
32
Black
CN5
Option font module connection (Slot B)
32
Black
CN6
Control panel (SEIPNL) control signal I/O
10
White
CN7
CG extension board expansion (See Note)
44
-
CN8
DC voltage input (+24VDC)
4
White
CN9
DC voltage input (+5VDC, + 12/-12VDC)
6
White
CN10
Carriage home position
6
Yerllow
CN 11
Ink-end sensor signal input
4
Red
CN12
Ink thermistor connection
2
Black
CN13
TE, CSF sensor signal input
5
White
CN14
Release solenoide drive signal output, Release sensor signal input
4
White
CN15
Carriage motor drive signal output, encoder
signal input
6
White
CN16
Paper feed motor drive signal output
6
Black
CN17
Edge holding motor drive signal output
6
Red
CN18
Pump motor drive signal output
2
White
CN19
Valve solenoid drive signal output
2
Red
CN20
Print head drive signal output
26
White
CN1
Control panel control signal I/O
10
White
CN2
Cover open sensor signal input
3
White
NOTE: Not provided
2-3
-
Reference
Table
REV.-A
2.2.2 Summary of the Operation of the Printer Mechanism
Figure 2-2 provides a summary of the mechanisms of printer models 4110/4160.
These printer mechanisms consist of the print mechanism (carriage mechanism), the paper feeding
mechanism, and the ink mechanism.
Print mechanism
This print mechanism consists of the carriage mechanism and the printhead. The
printhead moves vertically according to the carriage movement. The carriage is
driven by the carriage motor.
The encoder unit generates carriage position and speed control signals, and provides feedback to the
control circuit.
The carriage home position sensor generates carriage reference position signals.
Paper feed mechanism
This main printer paper feed mechanism, as opposed to the previous paper feed mechanism, includes
the top edge (TE) holder and the paper exchange mechanism. Paper feed is carried out by the paper
feed motor, and the paper end (PE) sensor detects whether there is any paper for paper feed routing.
The TE holder mechanism holds the paper to prevent it from flying up, widens the print area, and drives
the TE holder motor. The TE sensor generates signals to detect whether the paper is being held properly
or not.
The paper exchange mechanism is used to drive the paper feed motor, and converts
the paper feed method to either friction or tractor. This conversion is carried
out by the release solenoid. The release sensor generates a signal to detect the state of conversion.
The CSF sensor generates a CSF signal to detect whether the optional CSF is installed or not.
Ink mechanism
This ink mechanism contains the ink cartridge (holder), pump unit, and printhead. The ink cartridge
supplies ink to the head. Head cleaning is carried out by the pump unit; with ink being discharged to
the nozzle, and then replenishing the nozzle with fresh ink. Wasted ink is filled into the wasted ink pack
cartridge.
The pump unit contains a capping mechanism that prevents air from entering the ink mechanism by
capping the head, a cleaner that cleans the surface of the head nozzle, and a pump mechanism, with
their operations being conducted by the valve solenoid and pump motor.
The holder ink end sensor detects the no ink and no cartridge signals. The thermistor detects the ink
heat (TH signal) and provides feedback to the head drive circuit. Accordingly, a uniform print level is
maintained without being affected by the thermal conditions.
2-4
REV.-A
PF
PE
TE
TE
RS+/- RL
CSF
CM+/- ENAlB CRH
HEAD
Paper Select
TE Holder
TH
S
S
VBS+/- PM+/-
P
H,j4-_--.
S
Paper Feed
(Platen)
lE
ICE
Ink Cartridge
(Holder)
Carriage
M
Pump Unit
(Ca p,CI ea ne r ,Drawri ng)
,,~-----------._-----~/
Inking Mechanism
,,~------_/
Carriage Mechanism
----------------~/
,,~----------------------~/
Printing Mechanism
Paper Feed Mechanism
Figure 2-2. Summary of the Printer Mechanism
PF:
Paper feed motor drive signal
ENA/B:
Carriage motor encoder signal
PE:
Paper end sensor signal
CRH:
Carriage home position sensor
TE:
Top edge holder motor drive signal
HEAD:
Print head drive signal
lE:
Ink end sensor signal
signal
TE (SENSOR):Top edge sensor signal
RS +/-:
Release solenoid drive signal
ICE:
Ink cartridge sensor signal
RL:
Release sensor signal
TH:
Ink thermal sensor signal
CSF:
CSF Sensor signal
VBS +/-:
Valve solenoid drive signal
Carriage motor drive signal
PM +/-:
Pump motor drive signal
CM
+/~:
2-5
REV.-A
2.2.3 Summary of the Power Supply Circuit
AC'0 -
Power
Switch
t--
Fuse -
Fi It er
I--
Rectifire
(AC --. DC)
I--
_______ 1 _______
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Forward Converte Type
Swithing Regurator
+5V
DC
+24V
DC
I
I
I
I
I
±12V
DC
I
I
----~~-
L
~
~----.
+12VDC
-12VDC
+24VDC ---·Vh
+5VDC
---·Vx
Figure 2-3. Overview of Power Supply circuit Operation
Table 2-2. Power Supply Applications
Application
Voltage
+5 V DC
Circuit drive voltage
• Logic circuit
• Sensors
+24 V DC
Printer mechanism drive
• Carriage motor drive voltage
• Pump motor drive voltage
• TE motor drive voltage
• Paper feed motor drive voltage
• Release solenoid drive voltage
• Valve solenoid drive voltage
+1-12 V CD
Optional I/F voltage
Vh
Printhead drive voltage
Vx
Protection voltage for abnormal power supply operation is detected
• Reset circuit
• Printhead data signal pull-up voltage
• TE motor phase data signal pull-up voltage
NOTE1: The voltage Vh is generated on the SEIMA board using the
+ 24V
NOTE2: The voltage Vx is generated on the SEIMA board using the
+ 5V
2-6
DC power supply
DC power supply.
REV.-A
2.2.4 Summary of the Control Circuit
Figure 2-4 shows the block diagram for the control circuit. The control circuit
is comprised of the SEIMA board and the SEIPNL board. The SEIMA board drives the mechanisms for
interfacing between the host computer and data and print data
expansion. LSI's are used in most of the logic circuits for CPU load reduction
(which increase data throughput). These data arrays contain the address codes for mode registers and
command execution. After each mode has been set according to the program at initialization, the
operation is controlled by a single easy instruction. The SEIPNL board controls the operation by serial
interfacing with the SEIMA board. The main IC's used in the logic control part of the control circuit are
described below.
CPU:
H064180 (CPU,10C)
The HD64180 is a single chip equipped with a high-speed CPU, a memory management unit (MMU),
a DMA controller, a timer, an asynchronous serial communications interface (ASCI), and a block
synchronous serial I/O command port. The internal program (12B) is executed by the RESET command,
and oscillation is carried out by the oscillator and is driven in 9.216 MHz (18.432/2 MHz). 512 Kbytes
of physical address space can be accessed by the MMU, which controls the memory and gate arrays
described below. Data buses and lower-position address buses are connected between each gate array
and the CPU, and interfacing is carried out according to MMIO (Memory Mapped I/O) address
Read/Write.
Memory:
27512 (PROM, 12B)
The memory is the CPU program ROM which contains the firmware that controls the
mechanisms, handles ESC/P, and controls the interface and all of the control programs for the main
printer.
M40A33CA (4-Mbyte CG: Character Generator, lOB)
A mask ROM which contains multi-font character generation is provided as standard equipment.
HM65256 (256-Kbyte PSRAM, 11 B)
This PSRAM is used as the CPU working area. Internally, it is mapped as the print data expansion area
for the data input buffer, line buffer, image buffer, etc.
043257 (256-Kbyte SRAM, 13C)
This SRAM stores data for SELECTYPE settings, TOF positions, TEAR OFF amount, etc. When power
is off, these data are protected by the lithium batter (BAT 1).
ER59256 (EEPROM, SEIPNL Board)
This EEPROM stores and protects the hardware settings for the bi-directional adjustment value, the TE
holder position adjustment value, PROM ID's for columns 80-136, etc. If the combination of panels and
mechanisms changes, the settings are rewritten by the adjustment cartridge.
2-7
REV.-A
Gate array:
The gate array listed below is one of the control circuit chips. Installed parts on the outside of the gate
array form one control and drive circuit.
E0521AA (MMU: Memory Management Unit, 8B)
The E05A21 AA MMU provides the following functions on a single chip. According to these functions,
the expanded memory area of the main control circuit can be controlled without complicated circuitry.
•
Lower address position latched output
•
Bank latch, output
•
Bit operand
•
MMIO decode, output
•
CG, Program, Ram decode
•
Reset for internal/external program change or replacement
•
ON LINE/OFF LINE process (switch)
E05A24GA (PIF: Parallel Interface Controller, 12C)
This E05A24GA PIF provides the following functions on a single chip. According
to these functions, interfacing between the main control circuit and the host
can be controlled without complicated circuitry.
•
Parallel interface data latch (lead) and output to the printer.
•
Latch timing selection is possible.
•
Set, reset, and lead of control signals (ACK, BUSY, ERROR, etc.)
•
INIT signal latch from the host and output to the printer
•
READY lamp ON/OFF
•
RXD signal exchange (serial interface)
•
I/O sensor and switch signal reading (LOAD/EJECT, RL) and drive signal output (LOAD/EJECT
lamp, Release solenoid)
E05A22EA (PHC: Print Head Controller, GB)
This E05A22EA PHC provides the following functions on a single chip. According to these functions,
all of the print head drive controls can be controlled without complicated circuitry.
•
•
Head data latch
Head (piezo solenoid) charge/discharge control (timing, power range)
•
Direct control of the dot data to the head nozzle line (vertical dot pitch control)
•
Half protect
•
Print timing sample
•
I/O sensor signal reading (IE,ICE,TE,PE,CSF) and pump unit control signal output (pump motor,
valve solenoid)
E05A23GC (DCU: DC Motor Control Unit, 4B)
This E05A23GC DCU is a gate array that carries out all of the main printer carriage motor controls on
a single chip, and it provides the functions listed below. The DCU is connected to the carriage motor
drive circuit, motor encoder,and the carriage home-position sensor, and according to these, performs
carriage motor positioning, speed control, and print timing generation without complicated circuitry.
2-8
REV.-A
•
PLL, PRC motor speed control
•
Full power acceleration and breaking control
•
Drive current interrupt circuit
•
Motor stop detection and signal output
•
Generation and output of print timing signals (PTS) to the print head control circuit
•
Carriage position counter
•
Home position detection and print start position (line position) setting functions
E05A09BA (MCU: Motor Control Unit, 2A)
This E05A09BA MCU is a gate array that controls with a single chip the stepping motor used in the
main printer, and it provides the functions listed below.
This MCU is connected to the paper feed motor and the TE holder drive circuit, and carries out motor
control as a single circuit, thereby reducing the CPU load.
•
Automatic control of phase data (normal/reverse revolutions counter) and output for stepping
•
Time control for phase switch over stepping Two channels
motor control
SED1200 (LCD Driver, SEIPNL Board)
The SED 1200, which contains the CG for the LCD, is a 20-column LCD controller.
In addition to the CG, the SED 1200 also contains a CPU and internal memory, and carries out operation
by external commands.
The analog circuits are as follows:
Reset circuit
The reset circuit supplies a reset signal to the logic circuit. The Vx voltage that generates the power-on
reset signal is supplied as the pull up voltage for analog circuit protection.
Head voltage generating circuit
This is a DC-DC converter circuit which converts
+ 24VDC
into the voltage (93-160V) necessary for
driving the print head.
Timer circuit
This is a timer circuit that counts the operation intervals for automatic head cleaning.
Backup
This backup controls the Vbak supply, and is the backup voltage when power to the SRAM (13C) is
off.
2-9
0
~
r:->
"
...
3
III
co
...
0
Qi'
..-
5"
(')
DJ
;;:
I:
(')
n
ro+
...0
::::s
0
n
:i:-
N
!D
I:
...
cO'
SEIPNL
=e.-
J:L
y:
I MMU
Back Up
Circuit
I
TIMER
Circuit
t
ASCI
CPU
IIOCI
IRC
CS 1101 ASC I
CK.RX.TX
1 I
I
I
4
y
n
•
Reset Con1. IBANK Cont.
Rr
TE Motor
Drive
PF Motor
Drive
Buzzer
'--
'IE
• ICE
·TE
'CSF
. PE
Sensor Circuit
I
r
1
Pump
Mo.tor
Drive
•
Print head
Drive
Valve I1
So.lenoid
Drive
4
E05AZZlSBl
I I
I
I y
MMTDII
Rr
n
Vh
I L': "",O:~"~:;;,:~': '0"
~
IResetl
ADDRESS BUS IAO-AISI
R D/WR Strobe
DATA BUS mO-D7l
E05A091ZAJ
MMIr031
RL Sensor I1
RL Solenoid
~ V, S'PP"
RST MMIOIODI
~ ,
E05A2"SB)
INTJ.INTD.NMI····
___ RST
I
Iseriall
I/F
'LOAOIEJECT READY
I
III
IEEPRDM [SEDIZOO
~
I Porallel
I
I/F
+Z4r
DC
f
Thermisterl
IINKJ
I
Rr
y
'4
Encoder
Circuit
CR Motor
Drive
E05AZ314Bl
ICHP
Sensor I
I
I
MMIroZll
~ PROMIIZBI
PTS
---'
T
I SRAMl13Cl
I PSRAMIIIBI
CGZl13Bl
CGIlIOBI
Vh Supply
Ci rcui t
I-
External 11
C G board
~
~
XTAL
ID
Il,Font
Module
,Model
I
I
I
I
~
:<
m
::D
REV.-A
2.3 OPERATION OF THE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
The power circuit used in the printer is either a 120V SEIPS board (for the U.S., Taiwan, and the Middle
East) or a 2201240V SANPSE board (for Europe, Oceania, and Southeast Asia). The basic operation
of both boards is the same, however, and they are treated as one in this manual.
2.3.1 Power Supply Circuit Block Diagram
Figure 2-5 shows the power supply circuit block diagram.
The SEIPS board uses a forward-converter type switching regulator circuit, and outputs +5, +24, and
+ 12
V DC.
The incoming AC power passes first through a noise filter, then through a full-wave rectifying circuit.
The power then passes into the main switching circuit, which outputs +24V and ± 12V DC.
Stabilization is provided by an over-voltage limiting circuit located on the 24V line, which feeds back
to the main switching circuit. The 24V line is also used to generate the 5V output.
F1
---
~
v---<..J
~
~
AC
IN
~
.....,
FllTER
CIRCUIT
~
L....-
-
MAIN
SWITCHING
CIRCUIT
FUll-WAVE
RECTIFIER
CIRCUIT
~[
[
r--
r--SMOOTHING
CIRCUIT
~
~
HALF-WAVE
RECTIFIER
-
SMOOTHING
CIRCUIT
,....
....., -12VDC
~
and
HALF-WAVE
RECTIFIER
'+12VDC
~
+5V
REGULATOR
CIRCUIT
and
SMOOTHING
CIRCUIT
+5VDC
,....
....,
Gl
limit 6V
~
~
OVER VOLTAGE PROTECTION
+24VDC
GP
limit 29V
limit 23V
OVER VOLTAGE PROTECTION
Figure 2-5. Power Supply Circuit Block Diagram
2-11
REV.-A
2.3.2 Filter Circuit
The input filter is a conventional LC filter circuit, and functions both to dampen incoming noise and
to prevent externally-generated noise from running though the AC line. All the circuit's coils and
condensers are designed to withstand fluctuations in the incoming AC power.
F1
RI
2A
4.7
5W
L
Cl
R2
390K
0.22
N
RO
Figure 2-6. Filter Circuit (SEIPS Board, 120 V Version)
FIR 1
1.25A
R2
390K
R15
390K
No-----o
RO
Figure 2-7. Filter Circuit (SANPSE Board, 220/240 V Version)
2-12
REV.-A
2.3.3 Rectifier and Smoothing Circuit
The AC IN voltage from the filter circuit is full-wave rectified by diode bridge DB 1, and converted to
approximately 2 X AC IN voltage by smoothing capacitor C7. The
+ 24 VDC, + 5 VDC, and
± 12 VDC
voltages are converted from this DC voltage.
DB1
+
+
*
C7
DC OUT
3301£
( 1501£)
AC IN
(
): 220/240 V Version
Figure 2-8. Rectifier and Smoothing Circuit
2.3.4 Starting Circuit (Main Switching Circuit)
Figure 2-9 shows the starting circuit. The operation sequence is as follows.
(1) When the main power source is connected, the AC input passes through the input filter, and is then
rectified and smoothed. The resulting DC voltage VIN is input into the circuit.
(2) PVIN is applied to starting resistance R7 and passes through point @. Base current IB flows through
transistor Q 1, causing the transistor to conduct.
(3) At the same time, VIN is applied to coiI0-@of pulse transformer T 1, causing a voltage of (7 /60T)(VIN)
at @-@, so that the positive feedback current of switching circuit IB flows in the direction of @.
This causes a sharp rise, and Q 1 quickly switches on.
(4) Current IL through coil 0-@ increases linearly over time.
During this time, a voltage of (1 0/60T) VIN is induced through coils
0-0 and 0-0),
and a voltage
of (19/60T) VIN through coil @-@. For all these coils, then, current attempts to flow in the direction
of@; however, this direction opposes the direction of diodes D22, D23, and D20, so that no current
flows through the secondary side of the circuit.
(5) Current IL in the primary winding increases, but because the potential at point @ of coil @-@ is
fixed, Q 1 base current IB cannot surpass a specified level. Because of this, the value of current le
(= IL) flowing from coil 0-@ to the Q 1 collector cannot surpass a maximum of (hfe)(IB).
Therefore, the 0-@ current value stops changing, and the coil voltage drops. At the same time,
a reverse voltage is applied to coil @-@, IB drops, and current flows through D3 opposite to direction
@. At this time, the potential at point @ is higher than that at point @, and C 10 absorbs the current
flowing in the @-@ direction. Q 1 is quickly shut off by the resulting sharp drop.
2-13
REV.-A
(6) The above causes the energy previously induced in the secondary side (in step (4), above) to be
released from coils 0-@, @-QJ), and
@-®
in the direction opposite to @, and current flows in the
easy-flow direction of the diodes.
The secondary side therefore outputs a voltage
(7) The release of energy declines linearly over time. When energy release is completed, all T 1 coil
voltages momentarily reach zero. R3, however, again induces switching current @ in the direction
of @, and Q 1 conducts. Because the potential at point ® then surpasses that at point @, the energy
in e 10 is released, so that @ is maintained.
(8) The sequence returns to the stage described in (3) above.
This repetition enables the circuit to maintain oscillation. R7 is involved, however, only at the time
of starting.
The above sequence is generally known as a self-excitation type ringing choke converter (R.e.e.)
configuration.
Note that, at the instant when Q 1 goes off (in step (5), above), the potential at point
® jumps violently
upwards, but because of the action of D2, the energy is fed into R5 and consumed.
Below are shown the waveforms for each part of the circuit.
As Figure 2-10 makes clear, the output voltage is controlled by the time period that Q 1 is off. In other
words, the circuit is controlled by controlling the period during which Q 1 is off.
Figure 2-9. Starting Circuit (Main Switching Circuit)
REV.-A
COII@-@O
Co 11
® -@O
Switching
Curl'ent I B
I I I I I
I
I Iv'"
--1-----m_l_m-----1------ml nm_l_m-----f-mm_-f--
----~
~
~""---
Collector
Current le
Secondally
Coli Current
Output
Current
120 V Version
): 2201240 V Version
Figure 2-10. Main Switching Circuit Waveforms
2-15
REV.-A
2.3.5 +24 VDC Voltage Control Circuit
Figure 2-11 shows the
+ 24
VDC Voltage Control Circuit.
In order to maintain the correct voltage on the
+ 24V
line, the main switching transistor will go off if
the voltage exceeds 24V. If excess voltage occurs, reverse current will flow through Zener diode ZD20,
PC 1 will be activated, and the condition of the switching circuit will be as shown in Figure 2-12.
R4
0.63
2W
(1J)
D5
le
--'---I~+24V
RIO
DC
2K
ZD20
22V
GND
PCl
R13
5(4) r------ __ -_, 4 (2)
1.8K
I
R12
I
I
I
: 3 ( 1)
3.6K 6(5):
L~
__ ·
.J
120 V Version
).... : 220/240 V Version
Figure 2-11. +24 VDC Voltage Control Circuit
2-16
REV.-A
When PC 1 is activated, the voltage at shunt regulator gap G reaches at least 2.5V, K-A become a
conductor, 03 goes on, 02 goes on, and shunt transistor 01 goes off.
Even if PC 1 is not activated, K-A will conduct if current I in the transformer's primary winding surpasses
a certain value, creating a potential difference of at least 2.5V across resistance R4. Resistance R4,
in other words, serves as an excess current detector.
03
RIO
2k
ICI
LS431
R4
0.68
(1.3 2W) 2W
R 13
1.8k
120 V Version
( ): 220/240 V Version
Figure 2-12.
Switching Circuit (When PC 1 Operation)
R10
2k
7
60 VIN
(S/84Vlo)
IC 1
LS431
R4
0.68
(1.3 2W) 2W
120 V Version
( ): 220/240 V Version
Figure 2-13. Over-Current Protection (OCP)
2-17
REV.-A
2.3.6
+5
VDC Regulator Circuit
Figure 2-14 shows the
The
+ 5V DC
+5
VDC Regulator Circuit.
is generated from the
+ 24V
DC by means of a chopper-type switching regulator circuit
utilizing a TL494. Through the 13-pin of the output control terminal, the TL494 can cause the IC to
operate in either push-pull or parallel mode. Here, the 13-pin is LOW, and parallel action is in effect.
In other words, the operation of the le's two output transistors will be exactly alike.
The IC incorporates an internal oscillating circuit. The oscillating frequency is determined by the external
inputs to pins 5 and 6. In this circuit, the frequency, set by R29 and C25, is about 27kHz.
lP401
020
A1469
INPUT
1 ~
R33
10k
R27
200K
':~
,j~ZD23
HZ5C-2
R26
20
R28
3.9K
~O~
50Y
16
14
X
R37
2K
T 1 R21
12
11
Vcc
V
13
10
r
1
~
~ ~D21
~ERC81
-004
9
C21
1000ltF :J. r,+
10V ~
(IC20)
_EA2
2
R39
R38
0.22
lwx2
270
2WX 2
Al020
EAl
1
R20
1.8K
15
I
l20
R3~r; 021
C26
-02SD
--
11
3
R36
4
5
6
C25 ~29
0.0 .3K
It F ..
I?OOK
7
620
6-01
-RTF
R34
620
8
L--
~t
R35
10K
2200pF
-v
~
Figure 2-14. +5 VDC Regulator Circuit
2-18
OUTPUT
REV.-A
EA 1 and EA2 in the le are error amplifiers. EA2 is used to detect the output voltage. Figure 2-16
illustrates the setting of the output voltage.
The rated voltage of Zener diode ZD23 is 5V. Accordingly, 5V is input at the negative terminal of EA2.
The error amplifier works to bring the voltages at the positive and negative terminals into conformance.
Voltage is output, when necessary, to bring the voltage at the positive terminal to 5V.
Figure 2-17 shows the EA2 output conditions. If the voltage of pin 16 becomes higher than that of pin
15 (i.e., if over-voltage occurs), EA2 begins output. PWM is activated on the basis of the output level,
and the circuit's output voltage is lowered. (Further details are provided subsequently).
o
20lls/DIV
Figure 2-15. Oscillator Waveforms
V
Output
Voltage
16Pin
15Pin
Over Voltage
EA2
Output
(NORMAL Voltage)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Figure 2-16. Constant Voltage Control
2-19
Figure 2-17. EA1 Output
REV.-A
EA 1 is used to detect excessive output current. Figure 2-18 illustrates the mechanism.
The output voltage is input to the negative terminal, and, in order for equal voltage to appear at the
positive terminal,
(OUTPUT VOLTAGE)
R35
X R34/(R39//R38)
= 1
R35 becomes the load current flow (see Figure 2-18). In other words, higher current than this will trigger
over-current protection, the output voltage will be reduced, and the current will thereby be restricted.
Output
Voltage
R38
R34
620
R37
2K
R35
10K
Figure 2-18. Over-Current Protection (OCP)
2-20
Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Circuit
Figure 2-19 shows the internal circuit of the TL4941C.
The output control (pin 13) is fixed at "L", and the IC's internal push-pull circuit is therefore never used.
The wired OR of the EA 1 and EA2 outputs is input to the negative terminal of the PWM, a sawtooth
waveform from the oscillator is input to the positive terminal, and the PWM modulated waveform is
output as shown in Fig. 2-20.
Output Control
.--------------------{13)--......-----,
Always -L-
Reference
Regulator
Low Voltage
Stop
J------...,
GND
RT
OSC
CT
Dead Time
COMPARATOR
Dead Time
Control
Non Inv.
Input
Inv.
Input
PWM COMPARATOR
Non Inv.
Input
Inv.
Input
Feedback
Figure 2-19. IC 494 Internal Circuit
2-21
REV.-A
v
Et) terminal
8
0,
terminal
I
I
1
V
--j
+-'
PWM Comparator
Output
OL.--
-'--~
_I___ __l__
_l__ _
Figure 2-20. PWM Output
This circuit does not perform dead time control.
2.3.7 Voltage Limiting Circuit
Figure 2-21 shows the Voltage Limiting Circuit.
In this circuit, switching transistor Q 1 will go off if the voltages on the
or if the voltage on the
voltage on the
+ 24V
+ 5V
line reaches about
+ 6V.
+ 24V line reaches about + 30V,
Zener diode Z022 is used to detect abnormal
line; Zener diode Z021 is used on the
+ 5V
line.
05
+24VOC
line
1-,-
'"--4__......._
7 1--------;-,2
_ ....~+5VOC
line
021
6V
1.
8
1
PC 1
Figure 2-21. Voltage Limiting Circuit
2-22
(120V Ver)
REV.-A
2.3.8 + 12 VDC Supply Circuit
The voltage from the transformer is rectified by 022 or 023, and
+ 12V OC is produced. Theory suggests
that load variations can cause large variations in the output voltage. In particular, output voltage may
be quite high under no-load conditions. To prevent this problem, dummy resistors R24 and R25 are
inserted into the circuit.
R31
®
2 1/4W F
02
r - - - - - - - I ; > t - - - - . - - - -......----J\M,----.
+ C22
+ 12VOC
R24
470
2.2K 112W
®
28
2200P
+ C23
R25
470
2.2K 112W
023
'----+----4>---IlCI--.....------4~-..1IJI.JI\,--__ - 12VOC
R32
2 1/4W
®
GNO
®
Figure 2-22. ± 12 VDC Supply Circuit
2-23
: Fuse resistor
(120V VerI
REV.-A
2.4 CONTROL CIRCUIT AND PRINTER MECHANISM OPERATION
This section explains in detail the operation theory of the various parts of thecontrol circuit and printer
mechanism.
2.4.1 Operation of the Paper Feed Mechanism
The operation of the paper feed mechanism, the drive circuit and control circuit are explained here.
The paper feed mechanism contains the following
parts.
•
Paper feed mechanism that drives the platen and tractor.
•
TE holder mechanism
•
PE sensor and TE sensor
•
Paper change mechanism (friction tractor)
•
CSF sensor
2.4.1.1 Paper feed mechanism
The paper feed mechanism is driven by the paper feed motor. The paper feed motor is a 4-phase
stepping motor capable of bi-directional rotation, rotation in arbitrary amounts, and stopping. Motor
power is transferred by the paper feed change mechanism to the platen (friction) and to the pull tractor
unit (tractor). Specifications for the paper feed motor are shown below.
Type:
4-phase, 96-pole PM type pulse motor.
Drive voltage:
24VDC ± 10% (applied voltage to driver)
Coil resistance:
2.7 ±O. 4ohm/phase (at 25oC)
Drive method:
2-2 phase excitation. Constant-current control.
Consumption current:
Drive time:
Acceleration control time
1.0A/phase ± 10%
(Maximum chopping current, minimum average value).
Speed reduction, constant-speed control time
0.74A/phase ± 10%
Hold time:
0.04A/phase ±O.O 1A/phase (DC ammeter average current value)
Drive frecuency:
1440 pps (4.00 IPS)
950 pps (2.64 IPS)
800 pps (2.22 IPS)
500 pps (1.39 IPS)
340 pps (0.94 IPS)
Minimum feed pitch:
1/360" (approx. 0.07mm)/1 step
2-24
REV.-A
Paper
Paper Feed
Transmission Gear
Platen
Paper Feed Roller
Platen Gear
Paper Feed Motor
Figure 2-23. Friction Feed
Paper
Tractor
Tractor Gear
Tractor Transmission Gear
Platen
Paper Feed Motor
Paper Feed Roller
Platen Gear
Figure 2·24. Tractor Feed
2-25
REV.-A
2.4.1.2 Paper Feed Motor Control
The block diagram for the paper feed motor control circuit is shown in Figure 2-25. In the main circuit,
the paper feed motor phase switching is not directly carried out by the CPU, but is instead carried out
by the DCU (2A) according to the pulse sent from the MMU (8B). The DCU is enabled by the MMIO 03
signal sent LOW from the MMU. After the DCU first sets addresses AO-A3, it sets the excitation method
(2-2 phase or 1-2 phase) and the rotation direction (CW or CCW) according to the SCK/RCK port settings
and, if the pulse (PTFM signal) is input from the MMU to the TM 1 terminal, automatic phase switching
of the stepping motor is carried out.
The operation wave forms for the TM 1 and DFA/A signals are shown in Figure 2-26. Furthermore,
HIGH/LOW is set to ports P 1-P3 according to similar address settings and the SCK/RCK port settings.
Accordingly, control of the constant-current circuit is carried out.
The paper feed motor controls bi-directional rotation and paper feed stop at selected positions. From
start to finish of one rotation sequence, there are five modes:
1. Pre-drive rush
2. Acceleration control
3. Deceleration control
4. Constant speed control
5. Post-drive rush
The phase switching time settings (PFTM pulse switching time) are different for each mode. Refer to
Figure 2-27. As Figure 2-27 shows, the firmware determines time setting data (PFTM pulse switching
time) for five speeds and selects the correct speed for the drive state (micro feed, continuous feed,
one-line feed, and CSF). Constant-current control is carried out to achieve phase switching, to vary the
motor torque, and to regulate the level.
REV.-A
TlSCK
RCK
CPU
(laC)
I--
MMU
(8B)
PI
AO-A3
J~
ADDRESS DEC ODER
MODE SELECTOR
PtA
-- e------------"PtTM"
CE
MMJOI031
pta
AUTO
PHASE
SWITHING
TMI
PORT
SLA7620M
P1-P'"3
~
DCU
12Al
Constant Current
Supply Circuit
Figure 2-25. Paper Feed Motor and Control Circuit Block Diagram
n-
Il.l" 1.1. JI
., III"
11: ~l JJ JJ II 11111
r -, rI~ L U W L J W ~ i
I...., r
6V
r. ~ r
6 ne ~me
6V
Lower step: PFA/A signal
Upper step: TM1 signal
Figure 2·26. TM 1 Signal and PFAIA Signal Operation Wave Forms
Drive
Current
Phase
Swithing
Speed
I
0.04AI
0 74A
•
r--_.l.IlI.QIII.CA~
I
I------------------l-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
:.
..:.
..:,. 3.Conatant-Sp.ed
.:.
.:.
.:
I.Pre-Drive Z.Acceleration Control
4.Deceleratlon 5.Post-Drlve
Rush Control
Control
Rush
Figure 2·27. Paper Feed Motor Control Sequence
2-27
REV.-A
2.4.1.3 Paper Feed Motor Drive Circuit
This circuit uses the SLA7020M to drive the paper feed motor at a constant speed. Refere to the
Appendix for the SEIMA Board Circuit Diagram (location 2-3/I-J).
The SLA7020M is a hybrid IC that uses a constant-current driven stepping motor. The value of the
current is determined by the value of the external voltage input. The IC is divided into two phases, AB
(AA) and CD (BB), that use the same circuit.
Reference
Current
Motor Main
Current
Vb
Vcc
RC to Set
Chopper OFF Time
f""
r-------------
rz
n
RC to Protect
Abnormal Chopper
Operation
RZ8
C7/C8
Auxiliary
Current
~
J;:
T,=- _ _
f'' :r
I
R30
C9/C 10 ,..
REF
I
I
J~s
-
Excitation
Current
-
--
Motor
IN
-
OUT
----------
OUT
-
-
-
--
Excitation Current
Signal Transfer
- Current Control and
Current Peak _ Chopper OFF _ Circuit
Counter Electromotive
Detection
Time Control
Force Cancel Circuit
f--Circuit
Circuit
D
L ________________ GNO _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
-
-
-
--
Rs
;.1.
oo~ ~
Rs
Db T-
T
R esi st or for
Current Detection
Figure 2-28. SLA 7020M Internal Block Diagram
2-28
REV.-A
•
Constant-Current Drive Circuit
The constant-current drive circuit (A phase only) is shown in Figure 2-29, and the various operation
wave forms are shown in Figure 2-30. Figure 2-28 shows current peak detection, chopper off time
controller, current control, and counter electromotive force cancellation circuits for the constantcurrent drive circuit. Vref in Figure 2-29 shows the standard voltage which determines the amount
of peak current that flows to resistors R27 and R28. Resistors R21, R22, and condensers C6, C7
determine the chopper OFF time. The operation process for the constant-current controller of the
main circuit is shown below.
Peak Current Detection (to, t1):
(1) MOS FET Q 1 when excitation input I (A 1,B 1) is ON. Current ION then flows to the wave line channel
to excite the A coil.
(2) The voltage of resistors R27 and R28 rises in proportion to the I ON gain.
(3) f the voltage that runs to resistors R27 and R28 exceeds Vref, CaMP 1 reverses, and the Td voltage
drops to OV.
(4) If Vtd drops and falls below the CaMP 2 threshold voltage, CaMP 2 reverses.
(5) According to the reversal of CaMP 2, Q 1 gate voltage goes LOW, and CaMP 2 turns Q 1 OFF.
Chopper OFF Time (t 1, t2) Control:
(6) f Q 1 goes OFF, a counter electromotive force is generated to the motor coil. For this purpose, the
coil current channel switches from I ON to I OFF.
(7) When I OFF flows, the direction of the current that flows to resistors R27 and R28 changes. The
CaMP 1 feedback voltage VRS (V-) drops from Vref, and CaMP 1 again reverses.
(8) The CaMP 1 output stage is housed in the open collector circuit. In (7), because CaMP 1 output
goes HIGH, the Td voltage Vtd slowly operates according to the time constants of resistor R10 and
condenser C46.
(9) Until the Td voltage reaches the standard voltage (2V) of CaMP 2, the FET gate voltage maintains
the OFF state.
The operation time from 0-2V for the Vtd is suitable for the OFF time TOFF.
Chopper ON Time (t2, t3) Control:
(1 O)When the Td voltage Vtd reaches the standard voltage (2V) of CaMP 2, CaMP 2 reverses, and Q 1
goes ON.
(11) When Q 1 goes ON, the current flow switches from I OFF to ION.
(12) For the power voltage Vcc, I ON waits a long time 'according to the constant time of motor coil
A, and then slowly begins to operate.
(13) The electric potential of resistors R27 and R28 rise in proportion to the I ON gain. Until Vrs reaches
Vref, Q 1 supplies I ON current from the power source to the motor while maintaining the ON state.
The time for VRS to reach Vref is suitable for ON time TON.
Hereafter, steps (6)-(13) repeat, chopper operation is carried out, and the motor current is controlled.
Furthermore, the sum of the chopper ON and OFF times is suitable for the motor drive frequency.
2-29
REV.-A
•
DCU Constant-Current Control
Table 2-3 shows the standard voltage Vref. According to the combination state of DCU (2A) ports
P 1 and P2, the potential ratio combination of resistors R23, R11, R12, and R29 switches, and the
applied standard voltage switches to RF terminals A and B of SLA7020M. The stepping motor is
powered by the current propor-tionalized to Vref voltage. Transistors Q7 and Q8 go ON by port P3
of the XDCU (2A) going LOW. Accordingly, if the Td terminal is ground level, the motor can be stepped
arbitrarily.
Table 2-3. Standard Voltages
Standard Voltage
P1
P
H
H
0.054
H
L
0.914
L
H
0.055
H
H
1.268
(V:Calculated Value)
2-30
REV.-A
Vcc
+24V
+5V
R21/R22
47K
+2V
®REFA
I CD
RSA
t
C6/C7
ION
470P
R5
02
T
Gp
R27/R28
IOIW
Gp
J
Gp
Figure 2-29. Constant-Current Drive Circuit
e
8
8
(0
0)
o
(0)
8
e
~
V r ef - -
-1- -
- - - -
I
I
Vee
Vee
I
I
I P ---!-----J
o
I
O----....-o!
o
1
I
I
I
TO
TI
T2
T3
Figure 2-30. Section Operation Wave Forms
2-31
COMPI
Vref
REV.-A
•
Excitation Signal Send Circuit Section
In a normal stepping motor controller IC, 4-phase data is directly input into the IC, but with the
SLA7020M, special phase data must be input. In the main unit, motor drive control is 2-2 phase only.
Figure 2-31 shows the excitation signal send circuit. The SLA7020M has only one A phase side
excitation signal input. The output is divided into the A phase output and the A phase output that
passes through the converter. For this reason, when the excitation signal input IN goes HIGH, the
A phase output side goes ON, and when input IN is LOW, the A phase output goes ON. The B phase
works in the same way. Figure 2-32 shows the 2-2 phase excitation timing chart.
INA
PhaseA·
Output
PhaseA
Output
I-------.----i
_ _...J
Ch 0 pp in 9
Control
Figure 2-31. Excitation Signal Input Circuit
INA
Input
I
Tda
Iput
PhaseA
PhaseA
2
3
4
2
3
Figure 2-32. 2-2 Phase Excitation Timing Chart
2-32
4
REV.-A
2.4.1.4 Top Edge Holder Mechanism Operation
The top edge holder (TE holder) is driven by the power of the top edge holder motor (TE motor). The
TE motor is a 4-phase stepping motor capable of bi-directional rotation, rotation in arbitrary amounts,
and stopping. Motor power is transferred to the TE holder arm by the TE reduction gear. Accordingly,
the TE holder plate moves forward and backward.
TE holder motor specifications are listed below.
Type
4-phase, 8-pole PM type pulse motor
Drive voltage
24VDC ± 10%
Coil resistance
42±2.1 ohms/phase (25°C)
Drive method
2-2 phase excitation, constant-voltage control
Consumption current
Maximum time: 0.66 A/phase (26.4V, 39.9 ohms)
Drive time: ave. 0.32 A/phase
Hold time: 100mA/phase
Drive frequency
360 pps (4 IPS)
Feed pitch
4/360" (approx. 0.279)/1 step
Frame M
Top edge holder plate
TE holder arm
r------------
,,
:
(Printheadj
,I
,
~~---
:,
:
f
L-
I
I,
\
I,
,
,
.,/,'
/
TE Reduction Gear
Figure 2-33. TE Holder Mechanism
2-33
_
_
REV.-A
2.4.1.5 TE Holder Motor Control
Figure 2-34 shows the block diagram of the TE holder motor control circuit. In the main circuit, motor
phase switching is not directly carried out by the CPU, but is instead carried out by the DCU (2A)
according to the pulses sent from the MMU (8B). The DCU is enabled by the MMI03 signal LOW sent
from the MMU. After the DCU first sets addresses AO-A3, it sets the excitation method (2-2 phase or
1-2 phase) and the revolution direction (CW or CCW) according to the SCK/RCK port settings and, if
the pulse (TETM signal) is input to the TM2 terminal by the MMU, automatic switching of the stepping
motor is carried out. The operation wave forms for the TM2 and TEA signals are shown in Figure 2-35.
Furthermore, HIGH/LOW is set to port PO according to similar address settings and SCK/RCK port
settings. Accordingly, switchover of the common voltage is carried out (TEENB signal). The firmware
drives the TE holder motor with the two different speeds shown below.
(1) Synchronous mode
This drive is for when the platen (paper feed motor) turning speed and the TE holder plate speed
are approximately equal, such as when the print characters are near the top edge of the paper, micro
feed, and line feed. While the paper feed motor is driven in the 4-phase mode, the TE holder is driven
in the 1-phase mode.
(2) Independent mode
When re-supplying paper, this drive is for when the TE holder plate only operates independently,
such as when it moves to the paper guide auxiliary plate position or when it returns to its home
position. This operation is for normal and independent revolution operations, and from the
revolution operation until it stops, the following operations are realized:
1. Acceleration control
2. Constant-speed control
3. Main control
In each mode, the phase switching time settings (TETM pulse switchover time) differ. (See Figure 2-36)
AD
AD-A3
~~
WR
L
SCK
-RCK
CPU
(IQC)
f--
MMU
(8B)
-PI
MMIOt03J
TETM
--
~
-
ADDRESS DEC ODER
MODE SELECTOR
TM2
IT
DCU
(2AJ
- -
-
- -- - - --
AUTO
PHASE
SWITHING
.
y
-
TEA,TEA,
TEB,TEB
PO ~ TEENB
Figure 2-34. Top Edge Holding Control Circuit Block Diagram
2-34
)
REV.-A
I....
I'"
J
11
.I.
JI J 1 .l J I
~
rlo-o-
6V
6V
L~
~
'--
J
1
.I.
I
Irh r h
L
L
~U
P
o. 28 I Oml
Lower step: TEA signal
Upper step: TM2 signal
Figure 2-35. TM2 Signal and TEA Signal Operation Wave Forms
Phase
Swithing
Speed
Acceleration
Cont rol
Constant-Speed
Control Area
Deceleration
Control
Figure 2-36. Top Edge Holding Motor Control Sequence (Independent Mode)
2-35
REV.-A
2.4.1.6 Top Edge Holder Motor Drive Circuit
Figure 2-37 shows the drive circuit of the top edge holder motor. (Refer also to Locaton 2-3/J-K of the
SEIMA Board Circuit Diagram in the Appendix).
The motor is operated by common voltage switching based on the TEENB signal, and by phase switching
of transistors 011-014. In A2 - 02 of the phase switching signal board, only those phase coils which
become high receive the common voltage. The waveforms at point A and B of Figure 2-37 are shown
in Figure 2-38.
+24V +5V
Common
Voltage
Swithing
Motor
Coil
TEENB
14---(]
PO
OCUl2AJ
t--~V\f'v-----j
A2
I
02
GH
Figure 2-37. Top Edge Holder Motor Drive Circuit
I
I
'I ~
~ ~ ~. ~ ~
--I .....
I
-- -
r1 V1 Ih il- r1 In
-, rl
--,
50~
-'" ..
,
\ h ~~ r
1-
1
1
1
10 me ~ Omt
5V
Upper: 011 - 014 collectors (A waveform)
Lower: 011 - 014 Bases (B Waveform)
Figure 2-38. Operating Waveforms for the Top Edge Holder Motor Driver Circuit
2-36
REV.-A
2.4.1.7 Paper-end Sensor and Top-edge Sensor
This section describes the basic operating principles of the PE (paper-end) and TE (top-edge) sensors.
The PE sensor is located beneath the platen and paper guide, and senses the presence or absence of
paper. Sensing is performed using a photo-interrupter.
If paper is supplied and the lever is depressed, the lever that normally covers the photo-sensor will be
released, and a LOW signal will be output.
The TE sensor detects the presence or absence, at the paper bail, of the top edge of the paper. Operation
is as follows. The TE roller is linked to the photo-interrupter through the lever. If the paper-end is present,
there will be pressure on the roller, which will cause the lever that normally covers the photo-sensor
to be released, which in turn will cause a LOW signal to be output.
Paper feed, paper eject, paper changeover, and the TEAR OFF function are controlled in accordance
with the signals generated by the PE and TE sensors.
For both PE and TE sensors:
Detection Method:
Ph oto-i nte rru pte r
Collector withstand voltage: 30VDC
Shunt regulator:
O.3mA or less (at 10VDC)
TE holder
TE sensor lever
Platen
Lower paper guide
Paper feed roller
PE sensor lever
Figure 2·39. PE Sensor and TE Sensor
2-37
REV.-A
1--------------..,
I
,
I
2000
,
I
+5V
I
I
I
,
,,
I
10KO
I
I
,,
,
,,
I
I
I
I
,,
I
GND
,
,L
I
I,
Figure. 2-40 Sensor Interface
TE detect ion area
4mm
Frame L
Frame M
~ ABCDE
....,
Paper
WXYZ
~
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Frame R
4mm
PE detect ion area
68mm
97mm
165mm
Figure 2-41. Senor Detection Area
2-38
31.8mm
REV.-A
2.4.1.8 Paper Change Mechanism (Friction Tractor)
Paper changeover is effected by means of the release planetary gear, which leads the paper feed motor's
power based on the action of the release solenoid. The release solenoid generates switching of the
trigger lever.
When the trigger lever is "closed:' the release planetary gear is locked, so that the planetary gear does
not interact with the paper feed gear. Therefore, the paper feed motor can only perform normal paper
feed.
When the trigger lever is "open," the planetary gear is connected to the paper-feed motor, and the
motor's operation is as follows:
When feeding is in normal direction:
switch over is from friction mode to tractor.
When feeding is in reverse direction:
switch over is from tractor mode to friction mode.
The type of mode in use is detected by means of the release sensor, which is a microswitch attached
to the release lever. When friction mode is in effect, the release lever is open; and when tractor mode
is in effect, the release lever is closed.
Release Lever Specifications
Detection method:
Microswitch
Voltage:
5VDC±5% (Resistance load)
Current:
1.0 - 5 mA
Release Trigger Solenoid Specifications
Type:
DC solenoid
Drive voltage:
24VDC± 10%.
Coil resistance:
33.5 ±7%
Drive current:
Average - 716mA
Maximum - 84 7mA
Release (Trigger)
solenoid
Figure 2-42. Paper Change Mechanism
2-39
REV.-A
2.4.1.9 Control Circuit for the Paper Change Mechanism
Figure 2-43 is a block diagram of the control circuit for the paper change mechanism. (Refer also to
Location 2-H of the Seima Board Circuit Diagram in the APPENDIX).
The release solenoid is driven in accordance with the RSEN signal sent from the general-purpose port
P10 of the PIF gate array (12C).
When RSEN is HIGH,
+ 24VDC is applied to the release solenoid; the release sensor signal is also input
to PIF port P11. An RSEN signal LOW is used to indicate that tractor feed has been selected.
Figure 2-44 shows the operating waveforms for the release solenoid drive.
+24
+
......-
Release
Solenoid
RS+
---
RS-
-
-
Release
Solenoid
Driver
Circuit
RSEN
PIF1I2CJ
+
GH
Rei ease
Sen sor
PlO
EOSA24GA
RU1rocfor)
PII
Figure 2-43 Block Diagram of Paper Change Mechanism Control Circuit
~
, ....
......
I. ....
eo~
0 181 oIII
BY
Upper: RSEN signal
Lower: Collector for transistor Q20
Figure 2-44. Waveforms for Release Solenoid Drive Operation
2-40
REV.-A
2.4.1.10 CSF Sensor
The CSF sensor, which is a leaf switch, is located at the bottom side of the frame (M). The detects the
presence or absence of the CSF unit. If the CSF unit is not in place, the leaf switch is open; otherwise,
the leaf switch is closed.
CSF Sensor Specifications
Sensing method:
Leaf switch
Voltage:
5VDC±5% (Resistance load)
Current:
0.6-1.0 mA
(C.S.F)
,
'-
Fra me M -----le--
Figure 2-45. CSF sensor
2-41
REV.-A
2.4.2 Operation of the Print Mechanism
The print mechanism is constituted of the following:
• Carriage mechanism (carriage, carriage motor, and carriage home position sensor)
• Printhead
2.4.2.1 Carriage Mechanism
A timing belt is fixed to the base of the carriage, and is driven by the carriage motor by means of a
pulley. The operation of the timing belt causes the carriage (together with the printhead) to move left
and right along the axle.
Carriage guide shaft A, the cross-sectional shape of which is elliptical, forms the mechanism that allows
the platen gap to be adjusted with the lever.
Encoders A and B are located within the axle of the carriage motor's rotor, and guide the generation
of the signals that control the carriage movement. Both encoders A and B output 120 signal pulses
for each revolution of the carriage motor.
The encoder A phase (advance signal) and the encoder (delayed signal) have a 90 deg. phase difference,
and the revolution direction of the carriage motor can be determined by a phase comparison. The
encoder A phase detects carriage motor revolutions and control the speed; in addition, the A phase
signals standard head drive (printing) timing.
The carriage home position sensor generates the carriage home position signal, based on which the
print starting location is calculated. The sensor is comprised of a photosensor and the carriage detection
board; when the board blocks the photosensor light, a HIGH signal is output. The interface ofthe carriage
home position sensor and the control circuit is detailed in Section 2-40. (Identical to TE/PE sensors)
Figure 2-6 shows the carriage mechanism.
Carriage Motor Specifications
Type:
Encoder-attached DC motor (Bipolar, 7 slots)
Drive voltages:
24VDC± 10% (motor section)
5 VDC±5% (encoder section)
Maximum current: 3.0A (based on current limiting circuit)
Motor Section Specifications
Rated voltage:
24VDC
Rated current:
typ.800mA
Rated torque:
200gf-cm
Rated revolution speed:
typ. 6400 rpm
No-load revolution speed:
typ. 7400 rpm
No load current:
typ. 150mA
Starting current:
typ. 5A
DC resistance:
3.2 ±7% (at 20°C)
Insulation resistance:
min. 10M (at 500V)
2-42
REV.-A
Encoder Section Specifications
Type:
Magnetic-style encoder
Output phases:
A, B
Source voltage:
5VDC ±5%
Current:
max.70mA
Response frequency:
min. 20.0kHz
Signal detection section:
Magnetic resistance element
Resolution:
120 p/r (equivalent to 180 pulses/inch)
Output levels:
"H" - min. 4.5VDC
"L" - max. OAVDC
Output waveform:
Short waves
Duty ratio:
50%±20%
Phase difference:
90±30%
Carriage Home Position Sensor Specifications
Detection method:
photo-interruptor
Withstandable voltage:
to 30VDC
Sink current:
0.3mA (at 10VDC)
Head adjust lever
Figure 2-46. Carriage Mechanism
2-43
REV.-A
2.4.2.2 Carriage Motor Control
A block diagram of the carriage motor control circuit is shown in Figure 2-47.
(Refer also to Location 14-16/F-1 of the Seima Board Circuit Diagram in the Appendix).
Carriage motor control is not performed directly by the CPU. Rather, the DCU(4B) controls the motor
based on the signals it receives from the CPU (MMIO control).
The DCU is enabled by a LOW MMI002 signal from the MMU.
The CPU sends motor control commands and revolution speed data to the DCU; this allows the motor
speed to be controlled as desired. The DCU, meanwhile, detects position data and stop signals from
the encoder and the carriage home position sensor, and provides this information to the CPU.
The encoder signal is also used as a basis for generating the print timing signal, which is output to the
printhead control circuit. The functions of the carriage motor control circuit can be broadly divided into
the following:
• Speed (revolution speed) control
• Drive current control
• Carriage position control (revolution counter, home position recognition, stop signal output)
•
Print timing signal (PTS) generation
DCU (4B)
,-----------------------------1
I
Command Data
..
00"'07
Spee d
Contro ler
Motor
Pre-driver
MMIO Address
..
Motor
Drive
Circuit
AOrvA2
CR Motor
Reset Signal .. IRST
I
I
_ _ ~M..:...M~I..:.0..:.0..:.2__ I .. I CE
ENC
I
_..
I=-N_T_'=---
i STO PSi g n a I
L
_
PTS
Printhead Control
Circuit
CHP Sensor
(C RH)
Figure 2-47. Block Diagram of Carriage Motor Control Circuit
2-44
REV.-A
2.4.2.3 Revolution Control
There are five basic motor revolution speeds (carriage speeds), each of which will operate in print speed,
accelerated speed, or reduced speed mode. The speed setting is provided in the form of speed data;
pulses from the standard data clock are counted; and the relevant frequency is provided to the control
circuit. Revolution speed control is performed in accordance with the comparison, by the encoder, of
this frequency with the pulse count that the encoder detects. In accordance with the speed selected,
the speed control method is either phase-locked loop (PLL) or period control (PRC).
Table 2-4. Carriage speeds
Mode No.
Set speed (kHz)
Set frequency (115)
Control type
Print density (OPI)
3
2.97
337
PLL
360
2
4.45
225
1
5.94
168
0
8.91
112
240
PRC
180
120
The set speeds shown above are the basic speed modes; i.e., the speeds which normally apply during
printing. "Accelerated speed" or "reduced speed" modes are applied to these standard speeds on a
line-by-line basis. This application is effected by supplying the necessary additional data to the DCU.
The clock used for this operation is provided by external oscillator CRI, with connects to DCU (4B)
terminals XIN and XOUT.
If there are problems with this oscillator or its connection to the DCU, therefore, the carriage will
completely fail to operate. The oscillation frequency is 614.4kHz.
2-45
REV.-A
< PLL
Control>
The method by which PLL control is carried out by the control circuit may be explained as follows.
Movements away from the set speed are detected based on a phase comparison of the positive-going
edge of the A phase signal (leading signal) against the set speed signal (the requested frequency).
Energizing signals which correspond to these errors are determined and are sent to the motor. These
signals control the ON or OFF state of motor energizing, and thereby maintain the set motor speed.
L-
Setting Speed
,J
1"'--------:c--------''1
Internal
Speed
Signal
Encoder A
Phase
Motor
Drive
Signal
OFF
ON
Figure 2-48. PLL control (at normal speed)
Internal
Speed
Signal
Encoder A
Phase
Motor
Drive
Signal
OFF
ON
Figure 2-49. PLL control (at accelerated speed)
Setting Speed
..J
I"":---------=------.:.---'l
L.
Internal
Speed
Signal
f
f
~_f
Encoder A
Phase
Motor Drive
Signal
L.---_f
OFF
ON
U
u
~--+
___t
u
u
Figure 2-50. PLL control (at reduced speed)
2-46
___f
REV.-A
<PRC>
The method by which PRC is carried out by the control circuit may be explained as follows. An internal
trigger pulse used to control motor linkage is created in sync with the positive-going edge of the encoder
A phase signal.
This trigger pulse is used to generate a one-shot signal that is in line with the set speed. The following
positive-going edge of the encoder A phase signal is then used to compare the time lapse from the
one-shot pulse against the positive going edge.
If the positive-going edge of the encoder A phase signal is later than the one-shot time lapse, then the
motor will be energized for the single cycle time of the next encoder A phase signal. If, on the other
hand, the positive-going edge is earlier than the one-shot time lapse, energizing will not occur. Thus,
the circuit maintains the desired set speed by causing motor energizing to be switched ON and OFF
in sync with the encoder A phase signal.
Figure 2-51 illustrates the PRC energizing signal.
Encoder A
Phase
Differential
Signal
:<
Setting Speed
Internal
Speed
Signal
Motor
Drive
Signal
I
'>I
,
I
ON
ON
ON
OFF
Figure 2-51. PRC (Accelerated speed)
Accelerated, normal, and reduced speed control are made available based on the writing of the set
speed into the internal register of the gate array.
2-47
REV.-A
< Fully
Energized Acceleration or Speed Reduction>
A "full-energizing" circuit in the DCU enables the forced energizing of the DC motor for a given interval.
PRC control does not occur in the absence of an encoder signal; therefore, this energizing circuit is
used to allow acceleration of the motor, from the stopped condition, under PRC control. The circuit,
when ON, causes forced energizing. The activation of the circuit is enabled by a command written into
the gate array.
For speed reduction modes under both PLL and PRC control, activation of the full energizing circuit
enhances the features of the motor's negative-going edges, causing forced energizing that is in
opposition to the motor. This allows for rapid braking.
ON
Motor ON/OFF Signal OFF - - - - '
Dynamic Drive
Encoder A Phase
ON
Dynamic Drive Signal OFF----
PRC Control Signal
Figure 2-52. Acceleration by Full Energizing
2-48
REV.-A
2.4.2.4 Drive Circuit Control
The drive circuit is shown in Figure 2-53. The drive circuit consists of transistors with corrector follower
bridge connection. The motor current signal to the current motor is provided as it is pre-driven at each
port of the DCU, NPN 1,2 and PNP 1,2. Here the term "pre-drive" or "pre-driven" means overcurrent
control. A more detailed description will be provided later.
Table 2-5 shows a variety of current signal combinations given at each port.
Table 2-5. Current Signals
Motor Operation
Rotation
PNP1
PNP2
NPN1
NPN2
CW
LOW
HIGH
HIGH
LOW
CCW
HIGH
LOW
LOW
HIGH
Current flow from
CM+
LOW
LOW
HIGH
HIGH
CM + and CM - have the same
electrical potential.
CW
HIGH
LOW
LOW
HIGH
Reverse braking against clockwise rotation.
CCW
LOW
HIGH
HIGH
LOW
Reverse braking against counterclockwise rotation.
Acceleration/
constant velocity
Hold
-
Contents
Cu rrent flow from CM+ to
CM~
CM~
to
Reverse braking
2-49
REV.-A
The voltage drop at R49 is given at the minus terminal of the compartor in the OCU for comparison
with the reference voltage provided to the plus terminal.
Compartor output will work for current chopping at the motor pre-driven circuit in the OCU. The current
level detected at R49 and then cut off is set at approximately 2.5A by Resistor R77. Wave forms are
shown in Figure 2-54.
+ 24
PNP10---I
PNP2
NPN2o---t
NPN1
Vx
R77
Motor
Pre-driver
0.56 V
R49 0.22 3W
Figure 2-53 Carriage Motor Drive Circuit
-- ~
~J
Cl
~. 1' -\ J
I
I\,..
,... ...
~
20 I
r-
!--"I
1:1
•
1-
..
--.I
If
~
~.
..,
lJ
~,
4
~
~
f
0·2 ms 0·2 ms
0\1
Upper: CM + (06 cathode)
Lower: CM - (07 cathode)
Figure 2-54 Carriage Motor Current Wave Forms
2-50
REV.-A
2.4.2.5 Carriage Position Control
The encoder output functions in the DCU to detect velocity and provide positional data by detecting
900 of the phase difference (carriage rotational direction) and rotation counts. Position counting is
based on home position signal recognition. A stop signal is generated upon detection of positional count
suspension. Figure 2-55 shows a wave pattern the motor is driven at constant speed. Note that the pulse
signal is constant with the 900 phase lag.
The reverse phase difference is observed if the motor is driven in the opposite direction. During
acceleration or deceleration of the motor, the pulse cycle is not constant. Figure 2-56 shows the
relational control positions.
I.....
~
IOil.....
,
...
t
5V
\
I(
\
,.-
l
~ V
I
O· ms 0·1 ms
Upper wave: ENA signal
Lower wave: ENB signal
Figure 2-55. Encoder Output Wave Form
528 (401)
345.44 (203.2)
1--:-.:-::_1J...2 . 8
..
46.5
10(Reflesh Area)
Print Area
I 19.33
I
2 7.17
463.7(336.7)
68
f--- ---"'-"-- 85. 63
37.13
1
n
12i
16
0
,
2
0
'"'"
I
( f\
'0"
"
m
::J
a.
I
-31
0°
;b"'"
~~
o~1
::l~.
gl
~
~0
(
)-----80
F
::::::!t-
Colum
MIC
~
o
3
'"
Figure 2-56. Control Positions
2-51
REV.-A
2.4.2.6 Print Timing Signal Generation
The encoder signal also serves the PTS (print timing signal) generation in the DCU. PTS is a print timing
signal that works the printer head. The DCU determines the proper pulse cycles for a variety of printing
densities which have specific values for each printing mode. The calculated pulse cycle goes to the
PHC (Print Head Controller:68) gate array. Figure 2-56 shows the operational wave form. The PTS, the
wave form shown on the lower side, changes its cycles for the required printing mode (velocity and
print density). PTS alteration is conducted by a command execution to the DCU.
- Ir
I~r ~
II!:l"
la
IT
11
IV ~
5V
I\
po-'
r \- If
-r--
~ .~ ~ ~ I~
IV
-
'\
II ,
~
p.21 Ins
Upper wave: Encoder pulse (ENA)
Lower wave: PTS signal
Figure 2-57. PTS Signal Wave Form
2-52
REV.-A
2.4.2.7 Print Head
This printer employs the on-demand method for the print head. With the on-demand method, ink is
injected on demand. This means ink is usually charged inside the print head, ready for injection, in
coordination with print timing. After an injection of ink, ink is recharged for the next injection.
Another method, called the continuous method, keeps a steady supply of ink on the print head and
attempts to eliminate the problem of ink drying on the head.
A print had that uses the continuous method of ink supply requires a more complicated mechanism.
The on-demand type mechanism increases the injection force at the nozzle for printing. The continuous
type printer, on the other hand, shuts off unnecessary nozzles. The continuous type printer has a higher
running cost because a steady flow is ink is required. Some printers try solve this problem by re-cycling
unused ink.
Printer Head Specifications
Print method:
On-demand ink jet
Nozzles:
24 nozzles
Nozzle
config uration:
Arranged alternately
Drive conditions:
Ink temperature driving voltage follow control (See Table 2-6)
Table 2-6. Drive Voltage
Temperature ('q
5
25
40
Voltage (V)
150-160
1 15-1 2 1
93-100
Applied pulse width:
70±5 f-Lsec. (discharging pulse width
Discharging pulse width:
62±5 f-Lsec.
Interval:
8 f-Lsec.
Charging pulse width:
+
interval)
47.5±7.5 f-Lsec.
Response frequency:
2.97 kHz
Ink dot weight:
approx. 0.5 f-Lg/dot (room temperature)
Platen gap:
1.2 mm ± 0.1 mm (distance between head nozzle and platen).
Remarks:
The platen gap can be manually adjusted up to 1.8mm for printing
on thicker paper (such as envelopes). However, printing quality is not
guaranteed when the platen gap exceeds 1.3mm.
2-53
REV.-A
Head construction is shown in Figure 2-57. Each part is described below.
< Head
damper>
Slides the ink tube with carriage movement. The head damper absorbs pressure changes which take
place in the tube. This prevents excessive flow of ink to the reservoir.
< Reservoir>
Ink flowing to the inside of the print head accumulates in the reservoir.
< Nozzle>
Accumulated ink in the reservoir is injected through the nozzles. Nozzle construction is shown in Figure
2-58.
Piezoelectric Element
\
Reservoir
Head Damper
....."
....
"
//
I
'~\
\
f
\ \
\ ,
\
(
\
1
,
,
\
I
"
'...
, .... _
'-")
'-.I
I
\1
'I
I
"
,
/ /I
""
I
:............
I
J
I
I
, _-=:-:. ... '"
)
J
I
, . / , _ .... '.....
I
'I
I
'I
.....//1
'-~ "--->
....
_--'
Figure 2-58. Head Construction
Ink Path
Nozzle
Pressure
Chamber
Piezoelectric Element
Diaphragm
Printed Circuit
Board
Figure 2-59. Nozzle Construction
2-54
REV.-A
< Printing>
The basic principles of how printing works for a single nozzle is described
next.
(1) Ordinary situation. The piezoelectric element is electrically charged and distorted.
/ Piezoelectric Element
E_~__'/_:
_
Figure 2-60. Printing Principle (1)
(2) Charging. Prior to injection, the piezoelectric element makes a gradual electric discharge to expand
the pressure chamber and allow ink to flow into the pressure chamber.
/
Pressure Chamber
E"'~"'--
I
Figure 2-61. Printing Principle (2)
(3) Discharging. Ink injection is carried out by distortion of the piezoelectric element as it is rapidly
charged.
Figure 2-62. Printing Principle (3)
In short, printing occurs only when the piezoelectric element is distorted or expanded. Suction and
injection of ink during initial ink charging and cleaning requires operation of the pump to such ink from
the head.
2-55
REV.-A
2.4.2.8 Printer Head Controls
A block diagram of the print head control circuit is shown in Figure 2-62. (For the exact location, refer
to the Appendixes for the SEIMA board circuit diagram and 8-13/I-J.)
This circuit is designed for indirect control of data and the entire drive circuit by the print head controller
E05A22EA (PHC:6B) and does not rely on direct control by the CPU. The PHC is enabled by the MMIOO 1
signal from the MMU.
The CPU reads and writes instruction data for MMIO addresses (AO-A3). The PHC functions after
decoding that instruction data.
< Character
data>
Character data is developed as "image data" that is needed to drive the print head and actually form
the pattern of the character. The PIF, in response to DREQ signals, demands direct memory access (DMA)
transmission of image data and reads it from the character generator (CG). Read image data is developed
by the internal selector/register to coincide with the printing direction and nozzle arrangement
(even/odd). Therefore, the CPU has to begin the printing process and the actual printing task is executed
automatically by the direct memory access controller and the DCU.
< Charge
and discharge control>
Developed character data is latched at output ports H 1 to H24. The PHC generates printing pulses
(charge and discharge pulses) separately for odd and even nozzle lines, based upon the PTS signals
generated at the DCU. External crystal CR2 provides a reference pulse for timing and width of charge
and discharge pulse.
Discharge signals are sent to port Hn (n is 1 to 24). A charge pulse is given to port CHA and CHB of
the PHC and works for charge selection of the head drive voltage Vh, for odd or even line nozzles.
PTS
AO-A3
(from DC U )
I
RDY
I
CR2
~
I
I
t
+24
IDecoder
PHC (6B)
DO"""'"D7
I nternal Selector
/Register
CHA CHB
Vh supply
Vh
E%
Odd
Circuit
Vh
Vh
LZ1008AD
(5C/6C/7C)
SWithing
Ink Temperat ure
Thermi ster
Print head
Figure 2-63. Print Head Control Circuit Block Diagram
2-56
REV.-A
2.4.2.9 Printer Head Drive Circuit
The printer head drive circuit is divided into two main parts, the charging/discharging circuit and the
printer head voltage supply circuit.
< Charging/Discharging
Circuit>
The charging/discharging circuit is show in Figure 2-63. Its main functions are as follows .
• Discharge pulse:
The DCU generates pulses with a length of approximately 62us duration based on the PTS signal.
Signals internally generated in the DCU are provided from head data output terminal Hn. On printing,
the head output goes HIGH. This makes LZ 1008AD of the FET come on, and the electric charge of
the piezoelectric element discharges through the source terminal of the FET. The piezoelectric
element is usually charged with voltage Vh. The discharge time depends on the drive pulse which
the DCU generates .
• Charge pulse:
High pulses are provided from CHA and CHB of the DCU. The leading edge of the pulse makes
transistors QC 1 and QC2 turn on, then the piezoelectric element is charged by the Vh voltage which
comes through the resistor RCH and diode DCH. Charging and discharging wave forms are shown
in Figures 2-64 through 2-66.
,-- -
-- -"-- -..- -- -.,------ .------ - - - - - - - l
I
I
I
Vx
I
Vh
I
-~
I
I
'-_/
I
!
r------,
I
\
I
I
QC2
I
I
I I
R CH
CHA I B 1 - - - - + - - - - - - . - - - - - ;
I I
rr-Charge
DCH
I I
I I
I I
+J
PHC
I
Vh
( 6 B)
•
R
Hn
DpZD
G
I------~---,
s
LZ1008AD
( 5C,6C.7C)
Discharge
T
GH
GH
Figure 2-64. Charge and Discharga Circuit
2-57
REV.-A
Ib
I~
1
J
1"-
1
5V
1V
I It
n
r
rl
h
0·1 ~s 0·1 rns
Upper: Discharge pulse (PHC, Port Hn)
Lower: Charge pulse (PHC, CHA/B)
Figure 2·65. Charge and Discharge Pulse Timing
I
~
~
~
"'-"
~
~
5V
50V
L.-
,
~
.....
-
0·1 Ins 0·11 Ins
Upper: Discharge pulse (PHC, CHA/B)
Lower: Piezoelectric voltage (CN20)
Figure 2·66. Discharging Wave Form
I~
n n In
rl
M
~ ....
""'"
\
lV
I"""l
I
-- -
I"
0·1 rns 0·1 rns
50V
Upper: Charge pulse (PHC, CHA/B)
Lower: Piezoelectric voltage (CN20)
Figure 2·67. Charging Wave Form
2-58
REV.-A
•
Printer head voltage supply circuit
This circuit transforms the 24VDC source power supply up to a range of 93-160VDC to supply the
printer head voltage. Control of the head drive requires the ink temperature as its parameter. The
ink temperature detected by the thermal resistor in the ink cartridge is fed back to the constant voltage
controller.
•
Main circuit:
The main circuit is shown in Figure 2-67. For more details, refer to the SEIMA board circuit diagram,
location 9-10/1. The circuit employs the DC-DC converter method. The
+ 24VDC
supplied to the
primary stage of the voltage transformer T1 is controlled by the switching motion of the chopper
switching controller 494 (3C). Two error amplifiers, EA 1 and EA2, form the constant voltage control
and current limit circuits, respectively, of the main switching board.
+ 2 4~---'---------nTl
r----
C42
•
I
:.JlS
Dl0
r-r=--....-+-----I~Vh
I
1....r-.-+w\r-....J
L
TL494
GH
(3C)
GH
Figure 2-68. Vh Supply Main Circuit
~
~
vy
v v
V
"
1bv
"v
V
"'"I
IV V
5J.lc
Figure 2-69. 494 Switching Wave Form
2-59
REV.-A
Constant voltage control:
The constant voltage circuit is shown in Figure 2-69. EA 1 of 494 functions for constant voltage control.
The reference voltage (Vref) is supplied to the reverse terminal of EA 1. The constant voltage circuit of
the shunt regulator L5431 is a constant power supply for setting Vref voltage. The output voltage is
maintained at
+ 3VDC by R51
and R50 settings. Ink viscosity will vary with temperature, so ink injection
will be difficult at high viscosity levels.
Therefore, the head drive voltage changes according to the ink temperature detected by the temperature
resistor to ensure that the ink is injected at a constant rate.
The value of Vref changes proportionally with the fluctuation resistance of the temperature sensor. The
Vref fluctuation range is set by the adjustment of the variable resistor VR 1. Figure 2-70 shows the
relationship between ink temperature and drive voltage.
1------,
I +24
t
I
I
I
I
I
Vh
VR1
500
I
R37
2.43K
R80
365K
R 41
549
R36
4.64K
I
I
I
I
I
L5 I
R51 431 :
I
I
:
EAI
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
!
I
I
(3 V)
r+------,
(2D)1
R50
I
I
Ink
Tempera t ure
Sensor
(Thermister)
t
I
I
I
GH
GH
L __GH __ ~
Constant Power Su ppl Y
Figure 2-70. Constant Voltage Control Circuit
( V)
1~~gt
o
::;: 121
~ 116
I'D
100
93
5
25
Temperature
..
Figure 2-71. Relationship Between Ink Temperature and Drive Voltage
2-60
REV.-A
Current limit control:
The current limit control circuit is shown in Figure 2-71. EA2 of 494 limits current. The reverse terminal
of EA2 supplies voltage that is divided +36VDC by the zenadiode ZD5 for the voltage drop level of
R52. The non-reverse terminal of EA2 is connected to the source current detection resistor R73 of FET
(3D). This limits the current to approximately O.14A.
T1
ZD3
R55
R52
GH
GH
Figure 2-72. Current Limit Circuit
Over-voltage limit circuit:
The over-voltage limit circuit is a cut off circuit to protect the piezoelectric element of the head from
damage due to excessive Vh. The voltage setting at +27.6 (27+0.6)VDC by zenadiode ZD3 and VBE
of 024 maintains a voltage drop level of R218 + R21 7 at about 168VDC. Accordingly, if the Vh output
level exceeds 168VDC, the 024 turns off, and the error amplifier feedback terminal FB (3-pin) of 494
(3C) declines to the ground level to cut off Vh.
Vh ~ 168VDC
R 218
. - - - - - FB <3C:3pin)
R 217
Q 24
GH
GH
GH
Figure 2-73. Over-voltage Limit Circuit
2-61
REV.-A
2.4.3 Ink Mechanism
The ink mechanism is shown in Figure 2-73. The ink mechanism consists of the following parts.
• Ink cartridge
Cartridge holder
Ink end sensor
Cartridge sensor
•
Pump unit
- Pump mechanism (pump motor)
- Cap mechanism (head cap, cap damper, valve solenoid)
- Cleaner mechanism (brush mechanism)
Valve Solenoid
+-Ink Flow
Wasted Ink Absorber
Filter
Ink Cartridge
Figure 2-74. Outlined Ink Mechanism System
2-62
Ink Pack
REV.-A
2.4.3.1 Pump Motor
Pumping, capping, and brushing is fully driven by a pump motor (P motor). As rotation of the P motor
is transmitted to the P drive gear, then the pump pin plate, the cap clutch can and cleaner drive gear
all operate accordingly. Every operation of pumping, capping, and brushing is respectively provided.
Pump Motor Specifications
Type:
DC motor
Specifications
Rated voltage:
24VDC ± 10%
Starting torque:
More than 180 g-cm (at 200, 21.6V)
Rated torque:
30 g-cm
Rated speed:
3800 rpm
Coil resistance:
60 ohms
I Pumping I
Pump pin plate
Brush gear
~~
[ Capping
I
~ ~ ~~::=:::!.....~
Pump motor
Cap clutch cam
Figure 2-75. P Motor Power Transmission
Table 2-7. Rotation of P Motor and Movement of Others
CCW
P motor drive direction
CW
Pump operation
Draws ink from head, disposes to ink cartridge.
Cap operation
Close
Open
Brush operation
Rotation
Stop
2-63
REV.-A
2.4.3.2 Pump Motor Control and Drive Circuit
A block diagram of the pump motor control and drive circuits is shown in Figure 2-75. (Refer also to
Location 7/I-J of the SEIMA Board Circuit Diagram in the Appendix).
The pump motor is DC, and the drive circuit is formed by collector follow bridge TH3C 10 (1 B). During
driving, the CPU provides clockwise (CW) or counterclockwise (CCW) signals to PHC ports P 1 and PO.
For forward rotation, the CCW signal is high, and current ICCW flows to the motor by means of bipolar
connection TH3C 1O.
(The opposite is true for reverse rotation.) No acceleration or deceleration control is provided for the
motor control.
+ 24
PHC
(6 B)
CCW
P1
cw
PO
TH3C10 (1 B)
GH
Figure 2-76. Pump Motor Control and Drive Circuit Block Diagram
2.4.3.3 Pump Mechanism
The pump sucks ink from the head toward the wasted ink pack side of the ink cartridge, by which means
it keeps the head full of ink, and the nozzle free of bubbles and dust. Pump reciprocation is the same
regardless of motor drive direction; therefore, the ink flow direction also remains the same (from the
cap side to the ink cartridge side).
Driving of the pump rotates the pump drive gear (see Figure 2-74). Because it is on the same axle as
the drive gear, the pin plate also rotates; the pin on the plate therefore moves in a circle. The pin follow
converts the circular motion to a reciprocating motion. The piston axis, mounted on the pin follower,
generates the pumping.
~
. Piston /
AXis,'
Pump Drive Gear
~
/
',Ill
---.-fi
Pin Follower
Figure 2-77. Pump movement
2-64
([11
REV.-A
2.4.3.4 Pump Construction
Two check valves are installed in the pump. As the piston moves up and down, the bellows pressure
changes, causing one or the other of the valves to open, so that ink is either sucked in or blown out.
Specifically, when the piston is moving downwards, the bellows pressure is negative, which causes
the inlet check valve to open (and the outlet check valve to close); ink is thereby drawn into the pump.
When the piston moves upwards, these conditions are reversed, and ink is discharged from the pump.
From the Head Cap
==::::::
-//==== To the Ink Cartridge
Inlet
Outlet
Check Valve ----
___-Check Valve
Bellows-----Piston Axis
Figure 2-78. Pump Construction
2.4.3.5 Capping Mechanism
The capping mechanism protects the head from drying and from bubbles. Negative pressure is
generated inside the cap as the pump is driven while the valve is closed. Ink can therefore flow, through
the cap, from the head to the pump. The clutch cam, which is driven by the pump motor by means of
the pump drive gear, is in direct contact with the cap support; therefore, cam movement generates a
reciprocating movement of the cap.
The travel of the cam is limited by the clutch spring; should the pump motor continue to rotate in a
single direction, the transmission of rotation will cease when the limit imposed by the spring is reached.
Therefore, cap opening and closing is determined only on the basis of the rotational direction.
•
:>
Head Cap
Clutch Cam
Cap Support
\
Clutch Spring \
/
" Fulcrum
,I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,'
__ ... '
J
/I~
,_/
~~~/
Pump Drive Gear
Figure 2-79. Cap Movement
2-65
REV.-A
2.4.3.6 Brushing Mechanism
Rotation of the brush removes any dust lodged on the front surface of the head.
The cleaner support, to which the cleaner is attached, is linked to the cap support, and therefore
reciprocates together with it. (See Figure 2-78.)
The cleaner is rotated by the cleaner drive gear, which is driven by the planetary gear, which is driven
by the motor. The cleaner rotates only when the pump motor is moving forward.
Brush gear
Clearner
Figure 2-80. Cleaner Movement
2.4.3.7 Valve Mechanism
The valve set is tied to the head cap by tubes; activation by the solenoid opens the valve-side tube tops
(in the absence of activation, the valves are closed).
When the valve is closed, air is shut in between the valve and the cap; therefore, if the pump is operated
while the cap is firmly attached to the front surface of the head, ink will flow into the pump. When the
valve is open, on the other hand, ink cannot flow under any circumstances, and regardless with whether
or not the pump is operating.
When ink is being sucked in, the inside of the cap is being subjected to negative pressure; a relatively
large force is therefore required to pull the cap away from the head. To release this condition, the valve
is opened, allowing air to enter. Valve opening also releases air from the cap, enabling firm attachment
between cap and head, and preventing the drawing back of ink at the nozzle top due to temperature
change.
Air flow is enabled when a gap is created by the movement of the iron core driven by the solenoid.
Valve Solenoid Specification
Type:
DC Solenoid
Voltage:
24VDC± 10%
Coil Resistance:
80 ohms ± 5% (at 20°C)
Draw Force:
at least 130g (at 20°C, 21.6V, with 1mm stroke)
2-66
REV.-A
Turn the
solenoid on.
Solenoid,
Iron Core /"
To the cap
It
Air
<Valve is shut.>
<Valve is open.>
Figure 2-81. Valve movement
2.4.3.8 Valve Solenoid Driving Circuit
The valve solenoid driving circuit is shown in Figure 2-81. (Refer also to Location 6/I-J of the SEIMA
Board Circuit Diagram in the Appendix). When the solenoid draws (for valve opening), a rush current
first occurs, which then switches to a maintaining current. Transistor 03 normally switches wile 04
is turned on during discharge of the charge accumulated at C5. This discharge provides the rush current.
bl
pi
I
I
17I
I
11
O· gs
20 V 2 OV
Upper: 04 collector terminal
Lower: 03 collector terminal
Figure 2-82. Valve Solenoid Driving Waveform
2-67
REV.-A
2.4.3.9 Cap Damper and Ink Reservoir
A cap damper is installed between the head cap and the valve. The cap damper expands, or shrinks,
to absorb the pressure fluctuations which occur when the cap is opened or closed.
If capping is maintained, air within the cap expands as the temperature rises, and cause ink to retract
in the nozzle; this can cause dot failure. The damper prevents this problem by absorbing the expanding
air.
The ink reservoir is installed between the head cap and the pump. An absorbent material in the reservoir
is continually moistened by wasted ink. The moisture is transferred, through the head, to the cap; this
prevents the nozzle from drying.
Air
~
Cap Damper
Printhead
Head Cap
Ink Reservoir
Ink Cartridge
~MoistAir
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3 > ' ' > Wasted Ink
Figure 2-83. Cap Damper and Ink Reservoir
2.4.3.10 Ink Cartridge and Ink End Sensor
The composition of the ink cartridge is shown in Figure 2-83. The cartridge is formed of two layers:
the upper layer is an absorbent that takes in wasted ink, and the lower layer is the ink pack. The ink
pack also contains the cleaner cartridge, which holds the cleaning liquid used for maintenance. The
draining cartridge contains only the wasted ink absorbent.
The ink pack is continuously compressed by the ink-end detection plate spring. As ink is consumed
and the pack shrinks, the ink-end detection lever rotates counterclockwise, causing to ink-end detection
plate (to the right, as indicated in the Figure). This movement drives the ink level indicator.
At the moment when the ink completely runs out, the part of the ink-end detection lever marked as
A in the Figure completely unlocks, and the detection plate jumps out.
The composition of the ink cartridge holder is shown in Figure 2-84. When the cartridge is installed,
the ink supply needle penetrates the ink pack, and the ink disposal needle penetrates the wasted ink
absorbent. Because a small amount of ink always remains at the tip of the ink supply needle, a special
cover is provided to prevent ink from dripping into the case; when the cartridge is removed, the cover,
pulled by a string, covers the needle.
There are two microswitches within the cartridge holder: an ink-end sensor (the upper switch), and an
ink-cartridge sensor. The ink-end sensor detects the status of the ink-end detecting plate; the
ink-cartridge sensor detects the presence or absence of the cartridge. Detection signals (lE, ICE) are
sent to PHC I/O ports P6 and P7.
If a full ink pack is utilized to completion, it will be empty, and the ink-end indication will be output,
after about 200 lines of printing. If no ink cartridge is detected, the ink-end indication will be output
immediately.
2-68
REV.-A
Table 2-8. Ink-end Signal
Situation
IE Sensor Switch
ICE sensor switch
lE Signal
ICE Signal
Ink cartridge present!
ink present
closed
closed
LOW
LOW
Ink cartridge present/
no ink remaining
open
closed
HIGH
LOW
Ink cartridge not
installed
open
open
HIGH
HIGH
Wasted ink absorbent
Ink end detection spring
.....
Level
in d icato r --+-~=---....I
1
A
. Ink end detection plate
Figure 2-84. Composition of Ink Cartridge
Ink draining needle
lE IEC sensor
"I,... Ink supply needle
~~-'~
I
".
Figure 2-85. Composition of Ink Cartridge Holder
2-69
REV.-A
2.4.3.11 Operation Sequence of Pump Unit
The pump unit has various roles. Basic operations are as follows:
• Capping:
A firm attachment of the cap to the head prevents air from contacting the head, which protects the
ink in the head nozzles.
(1) Transfers the head to the position of the cap.
(2) Advances the cap set, forming firm contact.
• Brushing:
Brushing removes any dust and ink adhering to the front surface of the head.
(1) Transfers the head to the brush position.
(2) Rotates the cleaner to perform brushing.
• Ink charging:
Charging of fresh ink serves to eliminate bubbles in the nozzle.
(1) Transfers the head to the position of the brush.
(2) Through the valve mechanism, maintains atmospheric pressure inside of the cap.
(3) Firmly attaches the head to the cap.
(4) By means of the valve mechanism, shuts in air between cap and valve.
(5) The pump sucks ink from the head, and charges fresh ink into the head.
(6) By means of the valve mechanism, the vacuum within the cap is released.
(7) Detaches the cap from the head
Note the following explanations that pertain to operations.
a. Power on under normal conditions:
Capping - Ink charging - (1 sec.) - Release capping - All nozzles inject 100 times - wait
b. Power on under normal conditions for automatic cleaning:
Ink charging (1,2 sec.) - Wait
c. Power on, head uncapped:
Home position seek - Brushing (3 sec.) - Ink charging (1-2 sec.) - Wait
d. Manual cleaning:
Brushing (10 sec.) - Ink charging (6 sec.) - Wait (off line)
e. 3 seconds pass after previous printing, next printing data not received:
Capping - Wait (When next data arrives, printing starts after capping unlocked)
f. Initial ink charging:
Ink charging (15 sec.)-Brushing (10 sec.)-Capping (45 sec.)-Ink charging (5 sec.)-Wait
g. Refresh during printing (1 time/3 min.):
Head is transferred to refresh area - All nozzles inject 10 times - Return
2-70
REV.-A
2.4.4 Vx Power Supply Circuit and Reset Signal Circuit
The Vx power supply circuit generates a power on reset signal. See SEIMA board circuit diagram of
the Appendixes, location A-B/11-12.
When operation begins, transistor 01 and 02 come on when the voltage of the +24VDC line reaches
18.8VDC (ZD 1 voltage 18.2 + Q.6V) to induce + 5VDC to the Vx line. At this time, Vx is ground level.
Vx and +5VDC wave forms are shown in Figure 2-85.
The Vx signal is connected to THLD and DISC terminals of the MMU (8B). The reset generator is equipped
with an MMU that generates power-on reset signals for various chips. This is described in the block
diagram of Figure 2-86.
The initialization signal from the host is latched at the 12-pin PIF (12C) from where it goes to the INT2
terminal of the CPU (1 QC) where the interrupt software is reset. (For more details about the circuit, see
the SEIMA board circuit diagram, location 4/E).
,
~
,
""
Dol
~ V
5V
0·55
Upper: Vx line
Lower: + 5VDC
Figure 2-86. Vx Power Supply Wave Form
Vx Vx
I
11...-_-1 THLD
L.....----i
DI SC
ROUT
1---- (
RS T)--...--- Ext. CG Board
.....--Option I/F
"'--PIF(12C)
MMU
(8 8 )
.--MCU(2A)
...--CPU(10C)
. . . - - PHC (68)
...--DCU(48)
Figure 2-87. Block Diagram of Power-On Reset Pulse Supply
2-71
REV.-A
2.4.5 Timer and Backup Circuitry
The timer and backup circuit are shown in Figure 2-87. (For more details about the circuit, refer to the
SEIMA board circuit diagram of the Appendix, location 8-10/G-H).
The timer circuit provides the timing needed for pump unit operation to the CPU, regardless of the power
status (ON/OFF). The timer circuit consists of a clock and a counter. Both CTSO and RTSO signals form
a serial interface with the CPU.
The CTSO signal is a timer check signal. The counter 292 (130) of the timer circuit makes the signal
go LOW when the preset time value (approximately 145.6 hours) is up. The RTSO signal is a timer reset
signal. When the RTSO signal is LOW, the CLR terminal of counter 292 in the timer circuit goes to ground
level to reset the timer.
The backup circuit backs up SRAM (43257: 13C) and the timer circuit while the power supply is off.
SRAM stores the panel settings and is maintained even when power is off. The circuit also monitors
+5VOC.
When power is supplied, + 5VOC is provided to the Vbak line. If the voltage of the + 5VOC line drops
down to + 4.6VOC (Z02 voltage 4.0V + 022 VBEO.6V). + 3.6VOC ofthe lithium battery BAT 1 is supplied
to the Vbak line. The operation status of the backup circuit when power is off is shown in Figure 2-88.
The timer circuit works with +5VOC while the power supply is turned on and works with Vbak voltage
if the power supply is off. Figure 2-89 shows a wave form of the clock circuit while the power supply
is off. The figure clearly shows that working voltage is switched from + 5VOC to + 3.6VOC.
Voo of 43257(SRAM :13C)
~
-111~
Ti mer C ircui t
V bak
-------r-----I
Circuit
(Vbak)
Clock
I
I Counter
CTSO
RTSO
(6257: 13 E) :( 292 : 1 30)
~D~
CR4 (32.768KHz)
Figure 2-88. Timer and Backup Circuit Block Diagram
2-72
CPU
(10 C)
REV.-A
,
""'\
~
,
"""\
2V
Upper:
+ 5VDC
2V
0·25
line
Lower: Vbak line
Figure 2-89. Backup Circuit Operation While Power Off
."
Ill'
11
V
I
O· ~
2V
5
292 (13D) CLK1 input clock
Figure 2-90. Clock Circuit While Power Off
2-73
REV.-A
CHAPTER 3
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENTS
3.1
GENERAL
3-1
3.2
OPTIONAL INTERFACE
3-1
3.2.1
3.3
8143 Interface Board
3-2
CUT SHEET FEEDER
3-4
3.3.1
CSF Specifications
3-5
3.3.2
CSF Software Control
3-8
3.3.3
Mechanism Operation
3-9
3.3.4
Disassembly and Assembly
3-10
3.3.4.1
Side Cover Removal
3-11
3.3.4.2
Hopper Unit Removal
3-11
3.3.4.3
Paper Loading Roller Assembly Removal
3-12
3.3.4.4
Idle Lever Assembly Removal
3-13
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 3-1.
SQ-2550 with Double-bin Cut Sheet Feeder
3-4
Figure 3-2.
SQ-850 with Single-bin Cut Sheet Feeder
3-4
Figure 3-3.
Double-bin CSF with Printer Dimension Diagram
3-7
Figure 3-4.
Single-bin CSF with Printer Dimension Diagram
3-7
Figure 3-5.
Cut Sheet Feeder Operation
3-9
Figure 3-6.
Cut Sheet Feeder Disassembly
3-10
Figure 3-7.
Side Cover Removal
3-11
Figure 3-8.
Hopper Unit Removal
3-11
Figure 3-9.
Hopper Unit Installation
3-12
Figure 3-10. Paper Loading Roller Assembly Removal
3-12
Figure 3-11. Paper Loading Roller Assembly
3-12
Figure 3-12. Idle Lever Assembly Removal (1)
3-13
Figure 3-13. Idle Lever Assembly Removal (2)
3-13
Figure 3-14. Idle Lever Assembly Installation
3-14
3-i
REV.-A
LIST OF TABLES
Table 3-1. Major Optional Interfaces
3-1
Table 3-2. 8143 Jumper Settings
3-2
Table 3-3. DIP Switch Settings
3-3
Table 3-4. Bit Rate Selection
3-3
Table 3-5. 8143 Handshaking Control
3-3
Table 3-6. Dimensions and Weight
3-7
3-ii
REV.-A
3.1 GENERAL
This chapter describes the options available for the SO-850/2550.
3.2 OPTIONAL INTERFACES
The SO uses the EPSON optional interface series. The major optional interfaces are listed in Table 3-1.
Table 3-1. Major Optional Interfaces
~
Standard
Parallel
Interfaces
RS-232C
Current Loop
IEEE-488
(GP-IB)
a... Available
NOTES:
Cat.No.
Description
~
Buffer Size
#8172
32K
32 K-byte buffer parallel interface
#8172M
128K
128 K-byte buffer parallel interface
Function
~
Buffer Size
Flag Control
X-ON/OFF
Control
Max. Bit Rates
(BPS)
#8143'
None
2K
#8148
2K/8K
#8149
32K
#8149M
128K
a
x
a
a
a
19200
#8145
a
a
a
a
a
~
Buffer Size
Function
Listen Only
Operation
Address
Operation
#8161
None
L
#8165
2K/8K
AH,L,DC
x/a
a
a
a
x ... Not
available
*..
9600
19200
19200
19200
Refer to section 3.2.1.
1. Refer to the ··Optional Interfaces Technical Manual" for details.
2. When optional interface is used, set the printer interface to the parallel interface.
3-1
REV.-A
3.2.1 8143 Interface Board
When the RS-232C and 20 mA neutral current loop are in use, the printer will also support the 8143
new serial interface.
Specifications
Synchronization
Asynchronous
Bit rate
75 to 19,200 BPS
Word length
1 bit
Start bit
Data bit
7 or 8 bit*
Parity bit
Odd, Even or Non-parity*
Stop bit
1 bit or more
Signal level (EIA level)
MARK
RS-232C
= logical "1" (-3 to -27 V)
SPACE = logical "0" (+3 to + 27 V)
MARK = logical" 1" (current ON)
Current loop
SPACE
By REV (DTR) signal or X-ON/X-OFF code
Handshaking
*
= logical "0" (current OFF)
(Signal polarity can be inverted by jumper setting.)
Can be selected by DIP switch setting on the 8143 board.
NOTE: The parallel interface cable, if connected, should be disconnected before using the 8143 board
because parallel interface input is used to read jumper settings and DIP switch status.
Jumper Settings
Table 3-2 shows the 8143 interface jumper settings.
Table 3-2. 8143 Jumper Settings
Function
+ 12V through
J1
ON: "TTY TXD" is pulled up to
J2
ON: "TTY TXD RET" is connected to signal ground.
J3
ON: "TTY RXD" is pulled up to
J4
ON: "TTY RXD RET" is connected to signal ground.
J5
ON: "DTR and DCD" are pulled up to
JRS
Selects polarity to disable
data entry
4.7K ohm resistor.
OFF
RS-232C level
ON
OFF
Selects TTY TXD function
Current loop level
ON
MARK (RS-232C)
SPACE (Current loop)
ON
JF
JX
+ 12V through
OFF
JC
JREV
470 ohm resistor.
ON
Selects input signal level
JNOR
+ 12V through
470 ohm resistor.
OFF
ON
OFF
Outputs DTR flag
OFF
ON
3-2
SPACE (RS-232C)
MARK (Current loop)
Outputs X-ON/X-OFF
signal
REV.-A
DIP Switch Settings
Table 3-3 shows the 8143 DIP switch settings, and Table 3-4 lists the bit rates selected by the DIP switch
settings. When a standard 8-bit parallel interface is used instead of the 8143 I/F board, DIP switch
1-8 should be turned off.
Table 3-3. DIP Switch Settings
DIP SW No.
Function
OFF
ON
1-1 (JB3)
Bit rate selection
See Table 3-4.
1-2 (J817)
Data length selection
7 bits
1-3 (JB 1)
Bit rate selection
See Table 3-4.
1-4 (JB2)
Bit rate selection
See Table 3-4.
1-5 (JO/E)
Parity selection
Even
Odd
1-6 (JPDS)
Parity selection
Enabled
Disabled
1-7 (JB4)
Bit rate selection
See Table 3-4.
1-8 (PIS)
#
Enabled
8143 I/F selection
8 bits
Disabled
Table 3-4. Bit Rate Selection
Bit Rate
(BPS)
SW1-7
(JB4)
SW1-1
(JB3)
SW1-4
(JB2)
SW1-3
(JB 1)
75
ON
ON
ON
ON
110
ON
ON
ON
134.5
ON
ON
150
ON
200
Bit Rate
(BPS)
SW1-7
(JB4)
SW1-1
(JB3)
SW1-4
(JB2)
SW1-3
(JB1 )
1,800
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
2,400
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
4,800
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
9,600
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
19,200
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
300
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
19,200
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
600
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
19,200
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
1,200
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
19,200
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
NOTE: In the current loop operation, normal data transfer cannot be guaranteed at a bit rate greater
than 1200 BPS.
Handshaking Timing
The handshake controls are shown in Table 3-5.
Table 3-5. 8143 Handshaking Control
Transmission
Flag
X-ON/OFF Control
Possible
Resets when the vacant area of the input
buffer is over 512 bytes.
Sends X-ON when the vacant area of the input
buffer reaches 512 bytes.
Impossible
Sets when the vacant area of the input buffer
is 256 bytes or less.
Sends X-OFF when the vacant area of the
input buffer reaches 256 bytes.
Error Handling
Errors are processed as follows:
Parity error:
an asterisk
Overrun error:
ignored.
Framing error:
ignored.
"*" is printed.
3-3
REV.-A
3.3 CUT SHEET FEEDER
The SO can use the double-bin and single-bin cut sheet feeders.
Total 4 types (both 80-column and 136-column models for double and single bin CSFs) are available.
The difference between 80-column and 136-column model is only line length.
The cut sheet feeder has the following features:
•
Can handle cut sheets and envelopes in the same manner as fanfold paper.
•
Can use fanfold paper without dismounting the cut sheet feeder.
•
Has two bins so that two types sheet can be used. (Double-bin type)
•
Allows user to load a sheet by manual insertion.
•
Is easy to change the stacker either to bin 1 or bin2 by the control panel operation. (Double-bin type)
•
Requires no electrical connection to and from the printer.
•
Is easy to mount onto or dismount from the printer.
•
Is high cost performance.
Figure 3-1. SQ-2550 with Double-bin CSF
Figure 3-2. SQ-850 with Single-bin CSF
3-4
REV.-A
3.3.1 CSF Specifications
Hopper Capacity
Cut sheets
Envelopes
185 sheets, maximum
64 g/m 2 paper
150 sheets, maximum
82 g/m 2 paper
Only 1st bin
25 sheets, maximum
xerographic or bond paper
30 sheets, maximum
airmail paper
NOTE: If the weight of paper differs from above values, total thickness of sheets must be less than 0.59"
(15 mm).
Stacker Capacity
Cut sheets:
100 sheets, maximum
Envelopes:
10 sheets, maximum
Loading Position
Cut sheets
± 1 mm (±0.039")
Within the following conditions:
Paper weight 64
Temperature 5
Humidity 15
Envelopes
~
~
~
82 g/m 2
35 °C
80%
± 2 mm (±0.079")
Within the following conditions:
Paper weight 45
Temperature 5
Humidity 15
~
~
~
91 g/m 2
35 °C
70%
Paper Skew
Cut sheets
± 0.3
0
Within the following conditions:
Paper weight 64
Temperature 5
Humidity 15
Envelopes
± 0.5
~
~
~
82 g/m 2 paper
35 °C
80%
0
Within the following conditions:
Paper weight 45
Temperature 5
Humidity 15
~
~
~
91 g/m 2
35 °C
70%
Reliability
MCBF
100,000 cycles
3-5
REV.-A
Environmental Conditions
~
Temperature
operating: +5
storage: -30
~
+ 70°C
Humidity
operating: 15
~
80% (15
storage: 5
~
+35°C
90% (5
~
~
70%)
70%)
NOTE: Humidity conditions must no condensation. And parenthesis value indicated range for feeding
envelopes.
Paper Type and Quality
The cut sheet feeder requires plain bond, typewriter, or xerographic quality paper with a minimum of
wood pulp.
Cut sheet paper and envelopes must be in as a good condition as new: must be flat, not be curled or
curved, and must be without damage at the surface or the edges. Additionally, envelopes must be well
creased.
NOTES:
1. All other paper with medium or high wood content and very light or very heavy paper must
be operationally tested prior to regular use.
Paper with a textured, embossed, glossy, or hammered surface also must be tested
individually prior to regular use.
2. The cut sheet feeder may not feed smoothly with some kinds of paper.
3. Using curled or curved paper causes the paper to jam. Therefore, paper should always be
removed from the platen when the printer is not in use.
Paper Width and Length
Cut sheets
~
Width: 182 mm (7.17")
182 mm (7.17")
~
216 mm (8.5")
~
Length: 210 mm (8.27")
Envelopes
364 mm (14.3")
Width: 166 mm (6.54")
~
~
Length: 92 mm (3.62 ")
305 mm (12.0")
241 mm (9.49")
104 mm (4.09")
Paper Thickness
Cut sheets
0.07 mm (0.0028")
~
0.1 mm (0.0039")
Envelopes
0.25 mm (0.0098")
~
0.5 mm (0.0197"
Paper Weight
Cut sheets
64
82 g/m 2
Envelopes
45
91 g/m 2
Angular Deviation
Cut sheets
Less than ± 0.5 mm (0.02")
Envelopes
Less than ± 1.0 mm (0.04")
Recommended Paper Storage Conditions
Temperature
+ 18
Humidity
40
~
~
+22 °C
60%
3-6
136 column model
80 column model
REV.-A
Dimensions and Weight
See Table 3-6 and Figure 3-3, 3-4.
Table 3-6. Dimensions and Weight
Width
Depth
Height
Weight
136 col. Double
555mm (21.9")
437mm (17.2")
346mm (13.6")
5.6Kg
136 col. Single
555mm (21.9")
337mm (13.3")
346mm (13.6")
3.2Kg
80 col. Double
428mm (16.9")
437mm (17.2")
346mm (13.6")
3.5Kg
80 col. Single
428mm (16.9")
337mm (13.3")
346mm (13.6")
2.6Kg
136 col. Double
664mm (26.4")
608mm (23.9")
470mm (18.5")
20.0Kg
136 col. Single
664mm (26.4")
508mm (20.0")
470mm (18.5")
17.6Kg
80 col. Double
537mm (21.1")
608mm (23.9")
470mm (18.5")
15.5Kg
80 col. Single
537mm (21.9")
508mm (20.0")
470mm (18.5")
14.6Kg
Cut sheet feeder
Cut sheet feeder with printer
o
r-
q-
LO
q-
N
432
432
508
608
Figure 3-3. Double-bin CSF with
Figure 3-4. Single-bin CSF with
Printer Dimension Diagram
Printer Dimension Diagram
3-7
REV.-A
3.3.2 CSF Software Control
This cut sheet feeder is driven by the firmware incorporated into the printer and need not be
electronically connected to it. It also contains two bins so that two different sizes of paper can be
handled.
The panel setup or control command (ESC EM) can be used to select a bin and specify the cut sheet
feeder mode.
Command: ESC EM
Format:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(25); "n"
Where:
n = 0
Cancels the CSF mode
n = 1
Specifies bin 1
n = 2
Specifies bin 2
n = 4
Specifies the CSF mode
n = R
Ejects a sheet
NOTE: This command should be input when paper is loaded.
3-8
REV.-A
3.3.3 Mechanism Operation
This section briefly describes paper loading by the cut sheet feeder.
Power is conveyed to the cut sheet feeder via the platen transmission gear which engages the platen
gear. The paper is caught between the paper holder and paper loading roller.
When loading the paper, the paper feed motor rotates in reverse so that the paper is sent out from the
hopper by the paper loading roller. The paper caught by the paper feed sub-roller and the idler on the
idle lever is sent to the paper guide. When the paper reaches the position where the paper is caught
by the platen, the paper feed motor rotates forward so that the paper is loaded by the platen and paper
feed roller. The combination of the gears makes the paper feed sub-roller always rotate in the same
direction (paper loading direction), egardless of the rotational direction (forward or reverse) of the paper
feed motor.
The hopper unit sends out cut sheets one by one using the paper holder which holds the paper against
the paper loading roller and the separation notches positioned at the left and right edges of the sheet.
Thick paper such as a envelope may not be fed correctly if it is held by the separation notches. Release
the separation notches using the separation notch release lever when using thick paper.
Belt
'"1t---ldle lever
:h:.---Paper feed sub-roller gear
Platen transmission gear
Hopper units
Paper holder
<Hopper>
Platen gear
Paper loading
roller gear
Paper ejecting
roller gear
Platen gear
Figure 3-5. Cut Sheet Feeder Operation
3-9
Separation
Paper loading roller
notch
REV.-A
3.3.4 Disassembly and Assembly
This section briefly describes disassembly and assembly of the cut sheet feeder using the double-bin
type CSF (136-column model)as an example. Figure 3-6 shows a flow chart of the cut sheet feeder
disassembly procedure.
I Cut
I
I
3'.3.4.2
sheet feeder disassembly
3 - 11
3.3.4.1
Side Cover Removal
I
3 - 11
I
Hopper Unit Removal
3.3.4.3
I
I
I
3.3.4.4
3 - 12
Paper Loading Roller Assembly
Removal
Figure 3-6. Cut Sheet Feeder Disassembly
3-10
3 - 13
Idle Lever Assembly Removal
1
I
REV.-A
3.3.4.1 Side Cover Removal
[Step 1]
Remove the three stacker supports, four hopper fittings, three stacke fittings, and two
paper supports from the CSF.
[Step 2]
Remove side covers Land R from side frames Land R. (Side cover L (R) is fixed to side
frame L (R) with the seven tabs.)
Tab
Figure 3-7. Side Cover Removal
3.3.4.2 Hopper Unit Removal
[Step 1]
Remove the side covers.
[Step 2]
Remove the projecting portion of paper support shaft holder L from the hole in side frame
L, then rotate shaft holder L 90° so that the projecting portion faces up. Do the same
thing for shaft holder R.
[Step 3]
Remove the E ring at the left of the paper loading roller shaft, then slide the paper loading
roller shaft to the right to remove the shaft holder from side frame L.
[Step 4]
Remove the shaft holder at the right of the paper loading roller shaft from side frame
R, then remove the whole hopper unit. The double-bin CSF hoper unit can be removed
in the same way as for the single-bin CSF.
Side frame (L)
Shaft holders (R)
Figure 3-8. Hopper Unit Removal
3-11
REV.-A
ASSEMBLY POINT:
• When installing the hopper unit, install it so that the grooves at the lower portions of paper support
L (R) engages the rear frame rail.
Rear frame
Paper support
Rail
Figure 3-9. Hopper Unit Installation
3.3.4.3 Paper Loading Roller Assembly Removal
[Step 1]
Remove the hopper unit.
[Step 2]
Remove paper loading roller covers Land R. (The paper loading roller cover is secured
with two studs.)
[Step 3]
Take out the paper loading roller shaft by pulling it in the R direction, then remove the
paper loading roller L assembly and the paper loading roller R assembly.
Paper loading
roller covers
Figure 3-10. Paper Loading Roller Assembly Removal
ASSEMBLY POINTS:
• When installing the paper loading roller assembly, be careful of the correct left-right orientation.
• When replacing the paper loading roller assembly, replace both the Land R assemblies.
Paper
~
loadin~
coli"
~
0
Figure 3-11. Paper Loading Roller Assembly
3-12
REV.-A
3.3.4.4 Idle Lever Assembly Removal
[Step 1]
Remove the side covers.
[Step 2]
Remove the three E rings from drive transmission gear A, the platen transmission gear,
and drive transmission gear C, then remove the three gears.
[Step 3]
Remove the planetary lever A assembly and planetary lever C assembly from the shaft
of drive transmission gear A.
[Step 4]
Remove the sheet guide lever spring.
~ 0 Drive transmission gear C
f2
~: zY
"
Sheet guide
lever spring
-
~
<,~
Planetary lever C
~~
E-ring
ICr'
~.
,
_ Planetary
lever A
0
"~~:::~:g",mi"iOO9"CA
N''@J_-E.C''9
~C,~
Platen transmission gear
Figure 3-12. Idle Lever Assembly Removal (1)
[Step 5]
Remove the E ring from the paper loading sub roller shaft at the side frame L side, then
remove the paper loading sub roller shaft holder.
[Step 6]
Remove the four CBS set screws (M3 x 6) from paper guide plate A, and remove paper
guide plate A with the paper loading sub roller shaft assembly (with the sheet guide lever
and paper loading sub gear still assembled).
[Step 7]
Remove the left idle lever shaft holder lock pin from the stud on side frame L, then rotate
the shaft holder so that it becomes parallel to the cutout in the side frame.
[Step 8]
Remove the idle lever assembly with the two idle lever shaft holders.
Idle lever assembly
CBS (M3 X 6)
Left idle lever
shaft holder
\W
/1
i/l~.
_.7'"/"'-
/.1.
-Stud
Paper guide
plate A
Side frame L
<
Bottom View
Paper loading
sub roller
E-ring
Figure 3-13. Idle Lever Assembly Removal (2)
3-13
>
REV.-A
ASSEMBLY POINTS:
•
Lubricate (G-14) the shafts at both sides of the six idlers in the idle lever assembly.
•
Lubricate (0-3) the paper loading sub roller shafts holes in of side frames Land R.
• When reassembling the idle lever assembly, check that the plastic film on the front frame is not caught
by the idle lever assembly.
Idle lever assembly
(r-----tJ'--J.l..
Paper loading sub roller
---ll::...lL_ _----,
~)!
I
\1
Plastic film
Figure 3-14. Idle Lever Assembly Installation
3-14
REV.-A
CHAPTER 4
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
4.1
BEFORE DISASSEMBLY
4-1
4.2
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLy
4-8
4.2.1
Printhead Replacement
4-10
4.2.2
Case Removal
4-13
4.2.2.1
Upper Case Removal
4-13
4.2.2.2
Control Panel Removal
4-14
4.2.2.3
Cover Open Sensor Removal
4-14
4.2.3
Tractor Unit Removal
4-15
4.2.4
Electric Circuit Board Removal
4-16
4.2.4.1
SEIMA Board Removal
4-16
4.2.4.2
SEIPS/SANPSE Board Unit Removal
4-17
4.2.4.3
Removing Other Electrical Components
4-18
4.2.5
Printer Mechanism Removal
4.2.6
Printer Mechanism Unit Disassembly
4-18
"
4-20
4.2.6.1
Paper Bail Removal
4-20
4.2.6.2
Carriage Motor Removal
4-21
4.2.6.3
Carriage Unit Removal
4-22
4.2.6.4
Paper Feed Motor Removal
4-25
4.2.6.5
Release Trigger Solenoid Removal
4-26
4.2.6.6
Pump Unit Removal
4-27
4.2.6.7
Pump Unit Disassembly
4-28
4.2.6.8
Ink End Sensor and Thermistor
4.2.6.9
Set Removal
4-33
Home Position Sensor Removal
4-35
4.2.6.10 Top Edge Sensor Board and
CSF Sensor Removal
4-36
4.2.6.11 Platen Unit Removal
4-38
4.2.6.12 Top Edge Holder Set and Top Edge Holder
Transmission Shaft Set Removal
4.3
4-39
4.2.6.13 Paper End Sensor Removal
4-41
4.2.6.14 Paper Feed Roller Shaft Set Removal
4-42
4.2.6.15 TE Motor Removal
4-43
ADJUSTMENT
4-46
4-i
REV.-A
4.3.1
Trigger Solenoid Adjustment
4-46
4.3.2
TE Sensor Roller Adjustment
4-47
4.3.3
Carriage Timing Belt Tension Adjustment
4·49
4.3.4
Platen Gap Adjustment
4·49
4.3.5
Printing Alignment
4-51
4.3.5.1
Printing Alignment Items
4-51
4.3.5.2
Adjustment Procedure
4-51
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 4-1.
Attaching the Protective Parts
4-4
Figure 4-2.
Tightening Tube Set Screw
4-5
Figure 4-3.
Disassembly Flow Chart
4-9
Figure 4-4.
Moving the Printhead
4-10
Figure 4-5.
FPC Removal
4-10
Figure 4-6.
Printhead Removal
4-11
Figure 4-7.
Tube Cover Spring Base Assembly
4-12
Figure 4·8.
Upper Case Removal
4-13
Figure 4·9.
Control Panel Removal
4-14
Figure 4-10. Cover Open Sensor Removal
4-14
Figure 4-11. Tractor Unit Removal
4-15
Figure 4-12. SEIMA Board Removal
4-17
Figure 4-13. SEIPS/SANPSE Board Removal
4-17
Figure 4-14. Cable Wiring
4-18
Figure 4-15. Printer Mechanism Removal
4-19
Figure 4·16. Paper Bail Removal (1)
4-20
Figure 4-17. Paper Bail Removal (2)
4-20
Figure 4-18. Carriage Motor Removal (1)
4·21
Figure 4-19. Carriage Motor Removal (2)
4-21
Figure 4-20. Motor Mounting Plate Removal
4-22
Figure 4-21. Adjust Lever Removal
4-22
Figure 4-22. Shaft Holder Link Removal
4-23
Figure 4-23. Carriage Removal
4-23
Figure 4-24. Timing Belt Removal
4-24
Figure 4-25. Timing Belt Assembly
4·24
Figure 4·26. Paper Feed Motor Removal
4-25
Figure 4-27. Release Trigger Solenoid Set Removal
4-26
4-ii
REV.-A
Figure 4-28. Ink Discharge Tube Removal
4-27
Figure 4-29. Pump Unit Removal
4-27
Figure 4-30. Pump Unit Disassembly Procedure
4-28
Figure 4-31. Pump Motor Set Removal
4-29
Figure 4-32. Pump Set Removal
4-30
Figure 4-33. Pump Set Installation
4-30
Figure 4-34. Valve Set Removal
4-31
Figure 4-35. Head Cap Set Removal
4-31
Figure 4-36. Head Cap Support Removal
4-32
Figure 4-37. Cleaner Set Removal
4-32
Figure 4-38. Ink Supply Needle Removal (80-column machine)
4-33
Figure 4-39. Cartridge Holder Unit and Ink Supply Needle
(136-column machine) Removal
4-33
Figure 4-40. Ink End Sensor and Thermistor Removal
4-34
Figure 4-41. Ink End Sensor and Thermistor Installation
4-34
Figure 4-42. Home Position Sensor Removal
4-35
Figure 4-43. Paper Eject Guide Plate Removal
4-36
Figure 4-44. CSF Sensor Removal
4-36
Figure 4-45. Top Edge Sensor Removal
4-37
Figure 4-46. Paper Eject Guide Plate Spring
4-37
Figure 4-47. Platen Unit Removal
4-38
Figure 4-48. Top Edge Holder Set and Top Edge Holder
Transmission Shaft Set Removal
4-39
Figure 4-49. Top Edge Holder Transmission Shaft
Set Installation
4-40
Figure 4-50. lower Paper Guide Removal
4-41
Figure 4-51. Paper End Sensor Set Removal
4-41
Figure 4-52. Paper Feed Roller Shaft Set Removal
4-42
Figure 4-53. Paper Guide Plate Removal
4-43
Figure 4-54. Support Frame Removal
4-43
Figure 4-55. Frame M Removal
4-44
Figure 4-56. TE Motor Cover Removal
4-44
Figure 4-57. TE Motor Removal
4-45
Figure 4-58. Paper Guide Plate Removal
4-45
Figure 4-59. Preparation of The Trigger Solenoid Adjustment
4-46
Figure 4-60. Tightening Down The Trigger Solenoid
4-47
Figure 4-61. Top Edge Sensor
4-48
Figure 4-62. TE Sensor Roller Adjustment
4-48
4-iii
REV.-A
Figure 4-63. Carriage Timing Belt Tension Adjustment
4-49
Figure 4-64. Platen Gap Adjustment
4-50
Figure 4-65. Main Flow Chart
4-53
Figure 4-66. Top Edge Holder Position Adjustment
4-54
Figure 4-67. Head Slant Adjustment
4-55
Figure 4-68. Bidirectional Printing Adjustment
4-55
LIST OF TABLES
Table 4-1. Ink Handling and Countermeasures
4-2
Table 4-2. Repair Process
4-4
Table 4-3. Tools
4-6
Table 4-4. Necessary Measuring Instruments
4-6
Table 4-5. Abbreviations List of Small Parts
4-7
Table 4-6. Form and Abbreviated Part Name of Screw
4-7
4-iv
REV.-A
4.1 BEFORE DISASSEMBLY
This chapter describes the disassembly procedure for replacing any of the major
components of the printer. Before disassembling the printer, be sure to read the following cautions.
DANGER
• Before disassembling, assembling, and adjusting the printer, be sure to disconnect the AC
power cord.
• Wear protective glasses to protect your eyes from the ink. If any ink comes into contact
with the eyes or a wound, wash it off immediately with plenty of water, then consult a
doctor.
• If the ink comes into contact with skin (i.c. hands), wash it off with soap and plenty of
water. If any irritation develops, consult a doctor.
• The main board of the printer is equipped with a lithium battery. Before disassembling the
main board, read the following cautions so that you can handle the battery safely. Also be
careful of its storage condition.
a. Do not store lithium batteries stacked together or with other metal parts, to prevent the
+
and - sides from making electrical contact, which could cause a short circuit.
(If a battery is shorted, a large current can flow. The battery could ignite or burst due to
the heat generated.)
b. Do not heat the battery. Do not throw it away into a fire.
c. Do not solder any portion other than the connection terminals.
(The battery might burn or burst if the internal solution leaks out or if it shorts internally.
If the solution in the battery leaks and it is left as it is for a long time, the printer
components around the battery could be damaged.)
d. Do not charge the battery.
(If it is charged, gas would be generated, and it could ignite or burst.)
e. Do not disassemble the battery, or deform it using pressure.
(The gas in the battery could irritate your throat, or the battery might
burst or ignite, and the solution might leak.)
f. Do not mount the battlery (+ and - sides reversed).
(If the
+
and --sides are reversed, the battery might ignite or burst due to a short
circuit.)
WARNING
• Before transporting or repairing the printer or printer mechanism, observe the notes indicated in the repair procedure below to keep the repair personnel safe and keep the printer
clean. Also, be sure to start repairs by draining the ink, and only transport the printer under
the correct conditions.
• Please instruct customers on the precautions for transporting the printer whenever you have
a chance to talk to them.
• Use the specified tools to maintain optimal printer performance. Epson will not take
responsibility for printer parts being damaged by tools other than those specified.
• Be sure to perform the specified lubrication and adhesive application. (See Chapter 6.)
• Be sure to perform the specified adjustments.
• Be sure to read the following notes, which give details on the above WARNINGS.
4-1
REV.-A
The following notes apply to the disassembly, assembly and adjustment procedures for the printer.
•
Repair procedure
Because this is an ink-jet printer, some ink always remains in the ink path in the ink mechanism.
This could cause trouble. To prevent problems from occurring, the countermeasures indicated in
Table 4-1 below are required.
Table 4-1. Ink Handling and Countermeasures
Condition
•
When disassembling the
Countermeasure
Problem
Ink leakage during the process
printer to replace the printhead or to perform
•
•
Drain the remaining ink.
Cap the printhead.
maintenance:
•
•
When transporting the
Ink leakage due to vibration or
printer:
impact
When sending the repaired
printer to the customer:
Clogged printhead due to the
printer being sotred for a long
time with ink in the system. (A
specific dot does not print.)
•
•
•
•
Discharge the remaining ink
Cap the printhead parts.
Attach the protective the
customer:
Clean the ink path (then to
the printer being drain the
cleaning liquid).
•
Cap the printhead.
NOTE 1: When only a small the amount of ink remains (after cleaning), the ink does not leak easily
due to the ink tension.
NOTE 2: The words "a long time" used to refer to storage conditions means 30 days or more, which
means the transportation or storage time is not certain.
4-2
REV.-A
The customers are instructed to do the following when transporting the printer:
•
Clean the ink path, if possible.
•
Cap the printhead.
•
Remove the ink cartridge.
•
Attach the protective parts, and pack the printer in the packing correctly.
The service personnel are required to do the following after the repair is completed:
•
Draining the ink
The ink can be drained by mounting the special "ink draining cartridge" in
the ink cartridge holder and executing a cleaning. All the remaining ink
in the ink path can be removed (drained).
•
Cleaning
After the maintenance is completed, clean the ink path before sending the
printer back to the customer. The ink path can be cleaned by mounting the
special "cleaning cartridge" in the cartridge holder and executing a cleaning. After cleaning, drain
the cleaning liquid by executing the ink draining operation.
4-3
REV.-A
•
Capping
•
Attaching the protective parts and packing
Attach the protective parts, and pack the printer in the specified package as shown in Figure 4-1.
Notice
Sheet
1~"7""d---+-------=Transportation
Locking Bracket
Figure 4-1. Attaching the Protective Parts
The above described procedures are arranged as a repair process in Table 4-2 below. Use this table
as a check list when performing repairs.
Table 4-2. Repair Process
Procedure
Process
1
Capping
2
Ink draining
3
Repair
4
Self test
5
Ink draining
6
7
Cartridge to
Contents
Operation
be used
Protect the printhead from
being damaged.
-
Turn the printer power
on/off.
Remove the remaining ink
Draining
Cleaning
from the ink path.
cartridge
(two times);
-
-
-
Check the results of the
repair.
Ink cartridge
Self test
Drain the ink used in the self
Draining
Cleaning
test.
cartridge
(two times)
Ink path
Clean the ink path with the
Cleaning
Cleaning
cleaning
special cleaning liquid.
cartridge
(once)
Draining the
Draining the remaining clean-
Draining
Cleaning
cleaning
ing liquid.
cartridge
(three times)
8
Capping
9
Packing
Protect the printhead from
being damaged.
Attach the protective parts
for transportation.
4-4
-
-
Turn the printer power
on/off.
REV.-A
•
Tools
The recommended tools and measuring instruments required for disassembly, assembly, and
adjustment are listed in Tables 4-3 and 4-4. Use only the specified tools. In particular, use the
specified torque wrench when tightening the tube set screw that secures the tubes to the filter and
the pump unit. If another wrench is used and the screw is tightened too far, the "0" ring might be
cut or cracked, which could cause ink leakage. When tightening the tube set screw, the tube must
be fully inserted.
O-ring
Tube Set Screw
1.
Insert the tube fully.
2.
Set the O-ring.
3.
Tighten the tube set screw.
Figure 4-2. Tightening Tube Set Screw
•
Lubrication
After disassembly, assembly, and adjustment, be sure to perform lubrication, adhesive application,
and cleaning as indicated in Chapter 6, in order to maintain optimal printer performance.
•
Adjustment
After replacing any part and reassembling the printer, perform the adjustments indicated in Section
4.3.
4-5
REV.-A
Table 4-3. Tools
Type (NOTE 1)
Part No.
Round nose pliers
0
B740400100
Nipper
0
B740500100
Tweezers
0
B741000100
Soldering iron
0
B740200100
E ring holder #3
0
B740800500
E ring holder #4
0
B740800600
Philips screwdriver No. 2
0
B743800200
Sloted head screwdriver
0
B743000100
Box driver (7 mm)
0
B741700200
Torque driver (max. 3 kgf cm)
0
B740101900
Torque driver bit (# 1, L = 75)
0
B740101702
Cleaning brush
0
B741600100
0
0
0
B776700301
Tension gauge (3,000 g)
0
B747700200
Torque wrench (6 mm X 1 kg) #E589
E
B765106901
Position alignment tool #E693
E
F765113301
Adjustment cartridge #E687
E
Y591008020
Cleaning cartridge #E691
E
F348881000
Draining cartridge #E690
E
F348871000
Designation
(T=0.5 mm)
Thickness gauges
(T=O.4 mm)
(NOTE 2)
(T=0.6 mm)
B776700101
B776700501
NOTE 1: 0 = Standard commercial tool, E = Epson exclusive tool
NOTE 2: Select either combination, 0.5 mm X 2 or 0.4 mm
+
0.6 mm, so that the total thickness
becomes 1.0 mm.
Table 4-4. Necessary Measuring Instruments
Designation
Specification
Class
Osciloscope
A
Tester
A
Calipers
A
NOTE: A = Mandatory, B = Recommended
4-6
REV.-A
•
Screw designation
All small parts, such as screws and washers, are indicated by abbreviated names.
Table 4-5. Abbreviations List of Small Parts
Part Name
Abbreviation
Cup Screw
Cross-Bind-head screw
Cross-Bind-head with Outside-toothed washer
Cross-Bind-head B-tight
Cross-Bind-head S-tight
Cross-Bind-head S-tight with Outside-toothed washer
Cross-Pan-head with Spring washer
Cross-Pan-head S-tight with Outside-toothed washer
Cross-Pan-head with S-tight with Plain washer
Cross-Pan-head with Outside-toothed washer
Cross-Pan-head with Plain washer
Hexagon Nut with Outside toothed lock washer
Plain Washer
Leaf Spring
Retaining ring type-E
CS
CB
CBO
CBB
CBS
CBS (0)
CPS
CPS (0)
CPS (P)
CP (0)
CP (P)
HNO
PW
LS
RE
Table 4-6. Form and Abbreviated Part Name of Screw
Top
1.~ross-recessed head
Side
1.Bind
-
@:::3
(with
0
@~
2. §-tight
~otch)
I
8
1.Plain washer
1.Normal
p
@
2.Slotted head
Washer
(assembled)
Body
Head
2.Pan
3.
~
1\
~-tight
\\\\
3.~up
p
0
0
4·Iapping
-
4.Iruss
IIr!3
(]o
4-7
2. Outside toothed
lock washer
g
~
3.§pring washer
0
6)
©WP
REV.-A
4.2 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
This section describes the procedures for disassembling the major components of the printer. Unless
otherwise specified, assembly can be performed by simply reversing the order of disassembly. For items
needing special attention, notes on assembly appear as "ASSEMBLY POINTS." For assembly
procedures which require adjustment, the necessary adjustment is indicated as "ADJUSTMENT
REQUIRED."
WARNING
• Read Section 4.1 before disassembly.
• Remove the protective parts for transportation before disassembly.
• Remove paper and the ink cartridge before disassembly.
The disassembly sequence in this section is grouped into five parts: (1) Printhead replacement, (2) Case
removal, (3) Circuit removal, (4) Printer mechanism removal, and (5) Printer mechanism disassembly.
This manual describes in detail the disassembly and assembly procedures for the
following:
1. Major components
2. Procedures which require special attention. For the disassembly and assembly procedures for the
other components, refer to the exploded diagrams in APPENDIX.
4-8
REV.-A
(
14
START
.2.2.1
I
4-13
1
14.2.1
1 Upper case removal
I
1 Printhead removal
14
I
14 . 2 . 2 . 2
.2 .3
4-15
I Tractor
I
I
unit removal
I
4-10
I
4.2.2.3
4-14
1
removal
1Cover open sensor
4-14
Control panel removal
14
.2.4. 1
I
4-16
1 SEIMA board removal
14
.2.4.2
1 SEIPS
14 . 2 . 5
1Printer
4-18
mechanism removal
I
I
4.2.4.3
I
4-18
1Removing other electric components
4-17
board unit removal
I
I
4.2.6.1
I
4-20
Paper bail removal
4.2.6.2
I
4-21
Carriage motor removal
4.2.6.4
I
4.2.6.5
I
14 .2.6.11
4-26
I Platen
Release trigger
solenoid removal
4-25
I
4-27
Pump unit removal
4.2.6.3
I
4.2.6.10
I
4-22
4.2.6.12
I
I
4-39
Top edge holder set and
Top edge holer
transmission shaft
4-33
Ink end sensor
thermistor set removal
4.2.6.9
4-36
Top edge sensor board
and CSF sensor removal
Carriage unit removal
4.2.6.8
I
4.2.6.13
I
4-41
Paper end sensor
4-35
Home position
sensor removal
4.2.6.14
I
4-42
Paper feed roller
shaft removal
4.2.6.15
I
4-43
Top edge motor removal
Figure 4-3. Disassembly Flow Chart
4-9
4-38
unit removal
Paper feed motor removal
4.2.6.6
I
REV.-A
4.2.1 Printhead Replacement
This section describes the printhead removal and assembly procedures.
NOTE: The printhead unit includes a filter. Since the length of the ink supply tube cover varies
depending of the number of printable columns, the cord to the printhead unit and the assembly
procedures are different between the 80-and 136-column models.
Step 1 Drain the ink. (See Table 4-2.)
Step 2 Remove the upper case. (See Section 4.2.2.1.)
Step 3 Move the paper bail up. Move the printhead to a position near the 20th column by moving the
carriage manually while pressing the head cap set.
Paper bail
-
Pirnthead
- - - - FPC Cover
Head Cap set
Figure 4-4. Moving the Printhead
Step 4 Remove the CC screw (3 X 12) at the rear of the printer, which secures the FPC cover, then
remove the FPC cover.
Step 5 Disconnect the FPC from the connector.
Step 6 Remove the two screws securing the printhead to the carriage.
Right side: CP(P) (M3 X 6)
Left side: CP(P) (M3 X 12)
CP(P) (M3 x 12)
12)
Figure 4-5. FPC Removal
4-10
REV.-A
Step 7 Loosen the tube set screw (hexagonal) connecting the filter set and ink supply needle set, then
remove the screw and 0 ring.
Step 8 136-column model:
Remove the CCS screw (M3 X 6) securing the tube cover,
then remove the tube cover.
80-column model:
Remove the CCS screw (M3 X 15) securing the tube cover
base, then remove the base. Remove the tube which is
wound from the base.
Step 9 136-column model:
Remove the CCS screw (M3 X 8) securing the filter set
to the base frame, then remove the filter set.
80-column model:
Remove the CPB screw (M3 X 8) securing the filter set
to the tube cover base, then remove the filter set.
Remove the printhead unit.
Ink Supply
Needle
Filter Set
CCS (M3 X 5)
Tube cover base
Tube set
screw
CPB (M3 X 8)
O-ring-
Tube Set
Screw
Filter Set
Ink Supply needle
Tube cover
CCS (M3 X
CCS (M3 X 6)
8)~
O-ring
Figure 4-6. Printhead Removal
4-11
REV.-A
ASSEMBLY POINT:
WARNING
When connecting the ink supply needle set and filter set, be sure to tighten the set screw
using the specified torque wrench.
136-and BO-column models:
•
When reattaching the head adjusting pin, set the pin so that the projection faces the left. (See Figure
4-64)
136-column model:
•
When reconnecting the ink supply needle set, filter set, and head tube, be sure that they are arranged
in line. (See Figure 4-6)
BO-column model:
•
When reattaching the tube cover spring to the tube cover spring base, check that it is set correctly.
Check that the connected portions between the ink supply needle set and filter set, and the tube
cover base and tube cover spring, are straight. (See Figure 4-6)
•
When reattaching the tube cover spring base, first set the tube against the base, then attach the
tube cover spring hook using your finger. Pass the tube cover spring base under the base frame of
the printer mechanism while holding the tube cover spring hook to the tube base with your finger.
Filter Set
Figure 4-7. Tube Cover Spring Base Assembly
ADJUSTMENT REQUIRED
After replacing the printhead, the following adjustment is required:
• Platen gap adjustment (See Section 4.3.4)
• Printing alignment (See Section 4.3.5)
4-12
REV.-A
4.2.2. Case Removal
This section describes the upper case removal and the control unit panel (SEIPNL) and cover open sensor
removal.
4.2.2.1 Upper Case Removal
Step 1 Remove the sheet guide, printer cover, paper feed knob, options (tractor unit, paper guide, and
CSF).
Step 2 Remove the CBB screw (M4 X 25) in the groove at the front side of the upper case. (136-column
model: two, aO-column model: one)
Step 3 Unlock the two hooks at the front by inserting a hand from the rear side of the upper case,
then lift the upper case a little bit. Insert your hand through the space at the right side, and
disconnect the control panel cable from connector CN6 on the SEIMA board.
Step 4 Lift the front of the upper case by using the back of the case as a fulcrum.
CBB (M4
x
Sheet Guide
25)
CN6: SEIMA
Figure 4-8. Upper Case Removal
ASSEMBLY POINT:
•
When reattaching the upper case, check that the control panel cable is fixed by the bent tabs on
the inside (right side) of the upper case. (See Figure 4-9)
4-13
REV.-A
4.2.2.2 Control Panel Removal
Step 1 Remove the upper case. (See Section 4.2.2.1)
Step 2 Turn the upper case over, and remove the control panel cable from the tabs (A) inside of the
upper case cover.
Step 3 Disconnect the cables from the two connectors on the SEIPNL board. Cover open sensor and
control panel)
Step 4 Push the notch (8) securing the control panel to the upper case, then remove the panel.
Connectors
Control panel cable
SEIPNL
Board
Notch
(B)
Figure 4-9. Control Panel Removal
ADJUSTMENT REQUIRED
After replacing the control panel, the following adjustment is required:
• Printing alignment (See Section 4.3.5)
4.2.2.3 Cover Open Sensor Removal
Step 1 Remove the control panel. (See Section 4.2.2.2.)
Step 2 Turn the upper case over again to the original face.
Step 3 Push the notch securing the cover open sensor, then remove the sensor.
Cover open, senSar
Figure 4-10. Cover Open Sensor Removal
4-14
REV.-A
4.2.3 Tractor Unit Removal
The tractor unit must be removed before removing the various other units.
Step 1 Remove the upper case. (See Section 4.2.2.1)
Step 2 Remove the two CB(N)S screws (M3 X 6) at the left and right, which secure the tractor unit.
Step 3 Pull the tractor unit backward.
CB(N) 8(M3
x
6)
Tractor Unit
Figure 4-11. Tractor Unit Removal
ASSEMBLY POINT:
•
When reattaching the tractor unit, match the unit and the guide pin, and tighten the screw while
pushing the unit frontward.
4-15
REV.-A
4.2.4 Electric Circuit Board Removal
This section describes the SEIMA board unit and SEIPS/SANPSE board unit removal.
4.2.4.1 SEIMA Board Removal
DANGER
• The SEIMA board includes a lithium battery. Read the notes in Section 4.1 thoroughly
before starting the removal.
WARNING
• When disconnecting the connector, pull the female connector out slowly while holding the
board with a finger to prevent the board from being damaged.
• Since the construction of connector CN20 is different from that of the others, handle it with
care to prevent it from being damaged.
Step 1 Remove the upper case. (See Section 4.2.2.1)
Step 2 Remove the tractor unit. (See Section 4.2.3)
Step 3 Remove the connector cover (for optional interface).
Step 4 Disconnect the cables from the all connectors on the SEIMA board. (14 cables: CN3 and CN8
through CN20)
Step 5 Remove the two CPS(P) screws (M3 X 8) securing the shield plate to the (lower) paper guide.
Step 6 Remove the two CPS(P) screws (M3 X 8) securing the board and the noise shield to the base
plate.
Step 7 Remove the CPS(P) screw (M3 X 8) securing the SEIMA board to the base plate.
Step 8 Loosen the four bent tabs fixing the SEIMA board to the lower case,then remove the SEIMA
board.
NOTE 1: To disconnect the cable from connector CN20, the harness latch must be removed.
NOTE 2: When removing the shield plate from the board, remove the two cable latch set screws, CBS
(M3 X 5), at the parallel interface connector.
4-16
REV.-A
Figure 4-12. SEIMA Board Removal
4.2.4.2 SEIPS/SANPSE Board Unit Removal
Step 1 Remove the upper case. (See Section 4.2.2.1.)
Step 2 Remove the tractor unit. (See Section 4.2.3.)
Step 3 Disconnect the cable from connector CN2 on the board.
Step 4 Remove the CPS(P) screw (M3 X 8) securing the board to the base plate. Remove the CB(O)
screw (M4 X 8) securing the ground wire of the AC cable (inlet) to the base plate.
Step 5 Remove the AC cable (inlet) and the POWER switch from the lower case.
Step 6 Loosen the three bent tabs fixing the board to the lower case, then remove the board.
r------------
I
I
I
CN9
---------------1
I
SEIPS Board
SANPSE Board
CN2
I
I
I
I
CN 10/CN 11
CNB/CN17
CN18/CN19
SEIMA Board
I
I
CN8
Pr inter Mechan ism
Control/Sensor
Signal Cables
(Except TH
Sensor Cable I
CN12
IL
Figure 4-13. SEIPS/SANPSE Board Removal
4-17
_
REV.-A
4.2.4.3 Removing Other Electrical Components
•
The base plate can be removed by removing the three eBB screws (M3 X 12) securing the base
plate to the lower case after removing the SEIMA and SEIPSJ/SEIPS/SANPSE boards. (See Sections
4.2.4.1 and 4.2.4.2)
•
The serial interface connector can be removed by removing the two CP screws (M3 X 6) securing
the connector to the plate after removing the base plate.
•
Figure 4-14 shows the cable wiring.
CN2
CPS(P) (M3 X 8)
AC Inlet
CB(o) (M4 X 8)
Power Switch
Figure 4-14. Cable Wiring
4.2.5 Printer Mechanism Removal
This section describes the printer mechanism removal.
DANGER
• When removing the printer mechanism, special care is required for handling the ink. Read
the notes in Section 4.1 thoroughly before starting the removal.
WARNING
• Be sure to check that the printhead is capped correctly before removing the unit.
•
Be sure to remove the ink cartridge before removing the unit.
• Even after the above two steps, some ink remains between the printhead and ink needle.
Because the ink might leak (due to impacts) and get the inside of the printer dirty, we
recommend that you remove the ink before removing the printer mechanism. (See Section
4.1.)
Step 1 Remove the upper case. (See Section 4.2.2.1)
Step 2 Remove the tractor unit. (See Section 4.2.3)
Step 3 Remove the two CPS(P) screws (M3 X 8) securing the SEIMA board shield plate to the (lower)
paper guide. (See Figure 4-12)
Step 4 Remove the two cable clamps (iron core) on the base plate which binds the cables, to release
the cables.
4-18
REV.-A
°
Step 5 Disconnect the cables from connectors CN 1
through CN20 on the SEIMA board. To
disconnect the cable from connector CN20, the harness latch must be removed. (See
Figure 4-12)
Step 6 Remove the CPS (0) screws (M3 X 6) securing the mechanism ground plate to the base
plate. Be careful not to remove the ground plate from the mechanism but from the base
plate.
Step 7 Remove the four mounting screws securing the printer mechanism to the lower case. Take
out the printer mechanism from the lower case.
NOTE: The mechanism mounting screw at the left front is hidden under the printhead when the
printhead is capped. You can see the screw by moving the printhead to the right while
holding the cap section with your finger as shown in Figure 4-4.
Mounting Screw
CPS (0) (M3 X 6)
Mounting screw
Mounting Screw
Figure 4-15. Printer Mechanism Removal
ASSEMBLY POINT:
•
When reattaching the mechanism to the lower case, be careful of the rubber damper at the
screw-clamped point. (Do not attach the unit with the rubber damper deformed.)
ADJUSTMENT REQUIRED
After replacing the printer mechanism, the following adjustment is required:
• Printing position alignment (See Section 4.3.5)
4-19
REV.-A
4.2.6 Printer Mechanism Unit Disassembly
This section describes how to remove each major component of the printer mechanism.
DANGER
• When disassembling the printer mechanism, special care is required for handling the ink.
Read the notes in Section 4.1 thoroughly before starting the disassembly.
4.2.6.1 Paper Bail Removal
Step 1 Remove the printer mechanism. (See Section 4.2.5)
Step 2 Move the carriage to the center of the platen. (See Figure 4-4)
Step 3 Remove the paper bail spring each from frame (L and R).
Step 4 Remove the E ring from each frame (L and R), then remove the paper bail with the scale, paper
bail shaft holder, and paper bail spring.
Paper bail
Carriage
Paper bail
spring
I
E-ring
E-ring
Paper bail
spring
Figure 4-16. Paper Bail Removal (1)
Step 5 Remove the E ring (with no gear attached) at the left side of the paper bail, then remove the
paper bail with the paper bail shaft holder.
Paper bail shaft holder
E-ring
Figure 4-17. Paper Bail Removal (2)
4-20
REV.-A
4.2.6.2 Carriage Motor Removal
Step 1 Remove the printer mechanism. (See Section 4.2.5)
Step 2 Remove the lead wire of the carriage motor from the cable clamp.
Step 3 Remove the CP(P) screw (M3 X 6) securing the carriage motor gear cover, then remove the
carriage motor gear cover.
Carriage motor
gear cover
Cable Clamp
CP(P) (M3 X 6)
='------Lead wire
Figure 4-18. Carriage Motor Removal (1)
Step 4 Remove the two CP(P) screws (M3 X 6) securing the carriage motor, then remove the carriage
motor.
Carriage drive pulley
'-----"--------CP(P) (M3 X 6)
Figure 4-19. Carriage Motor Removal (2)
ASSEMBLY POINTS:
Reattach the carriage motor so that the label on the carriage motor faces up.
•
•
When reassembling the carriage motor, adjust the backlash between the carriage motor and carriage
drive pulley. If the backlash is too tight, printing pitch might become abnormal or printing noise might
become louder.
ADJUSTMENT REQUIRED
After the carriage motor is removed and reassembled, the following adjustment is required:
• Printing alignment (only for the bidirectional printing) (See Section 4.3.5.)
4-21
REV.-A
4.2.6.3 Carriage Unit Removal
Step 1 Remove the printer mechanism. (See Section 4.2.5)
Step 2 Remove the printhead. (See Section 4.2.1)
Step 3 Remove the CPS(P) screw (M3 X 8) securing the belt tension plate, loosen the timing belt, then
remove the belt from the pulley.
Step 4
Remove the two CCS screws (M3 X 8) securing the motor mounting plate set to frame R, then
remove the motor mounting plate from frame R.
NOTE: Be careful not to apply stress to the lead wires of the CR motor.
Frame R
CPS (P) (M3
x
CCS (M3
x
8)
Belt tension
plate
Pulley
Motor mounting plate
Timing belt
Figure 4-20. Motor Mounting Plate Removal
Step 5 Remove the two N4 nuts securing carriage guide shafts A and B to frame R, then remove the
adjust lever from carriage guide shaft A.
Adjust lever
_
Frame R
N4
Figure 4-21. Adjust Lever Removal
4-22
8)
REV.-A
Step 6 Remove the two N4 nuts securing carriage guide shafts A and B to frame L, then remove the
shaft holder link from guide shaft A.
Frame L
N4
Shaft hold link
Figure 4-22. Shaft Holder Link Removal
Step 7 Remove carriage guide shafts A and B from frame L by sliding them along the U groove of frame
L, then remove them from frame R.
Frame
L",
Groove~~
0tf
Frame R
~
B
Carriage guide shaft A
Figure 4-23. Carriage Removal
4-23
REV.-A
Step 8 Remove carriage guide shafts A and B from the carriage by pulling them.
Step 9 Remove the CS screw (M3 X 12) securing the belt holder, then remove the timing belt from
the carriage.
Carriage (Bottom)
Figure 4-24. Timing Belt Removal
ASSEMBLY POINTS:
•
Reattach the timing belt so that no gap exists between the walls of the belt holder and the timing
belt, and the crests of the timing belt and the grooves(nine) of the belt holder match. (See Figure
4-25)
•
Apply adhesive lock to the belt holder set screw. (See Chapter 6)
•
Lubricate the felt (0-2) before inserting the carriage guide shafts into the carriage unit. When inserting
them, be careful not to move the felt. (See Chapter 6)
•
Reattach carriage guide shaft A so that the larger chamfer of eccentric cut is on the upper side. (See
Figure 4-23)
Timing belt
Figure 4-25. Timing Belt Assembly
ADJUSTMENT REQUIRED
After removing and reassembling the carriage, the following adjustments are required:
• Carriage timing belt tension adjustment (See Section 4.3.3.)
• Platen gap adjustment (See Section 4.3.4.)
• Printing position alignment (only for the bidirectional printing positions) (See Section 4.3.5.)
4-24
REV.-A
4.2.6.4 Paper Feed Motor Removal
Step 1 Remove the printer mechanism. (See Section 4.2.5)
Step 2 Remove the paper feed motor lead wire from the spacer clip.
Step 3 Remove the two CP(P) screws (M3 X 6) securing the paper feed motor ,then remove the paper
feed motor.
Paper feed~
motor
~
Spacer clip
CP(P) (M3 X 6)
Lead wire
Figure 4-26. Paper Feed Motor Removal
ASSEMBLY POINT:
•
When reattaching the paper feed motor, adjust the backlash between the gear pinions tightly.
However, be careful if the backlash is hot too tight, or the printing pitch might be abnormal and
printing noise might become loud.
4-25
REV.-A
4.2.6.5 Release Trigger Solenoid Removal
The release trigger solenoid set is composed of the release trigger solenoid and release sensor.
Step 1 Remove the carriage motor. (See Section 4.2.6.2)
Step 2 Remove the paper feed motor and paper feed transmission gear. (See Section 4.2.6.4)
Step 3 Remove the lead wire of the release trigger solenoid set from the cable clamp.
Step 4 Remove the release trigger lever spring.
Step 5 Remove the CP(P) screw (M3 X 6) securing the release trigger solenoid, then remove the release
trigger solenoid with the release trigger lever set.
Step 6 Remove the CC screw (M2 X 10) securing the release sensor, then remove the release sensor.
Release trigger·
lever set
CP(P) (M3 X 6)
Release trigger
lever spring
Release sensor
CC (M2 X 10)
Release
trigger
solenoid
Lead wire
Cable clamp
Figure 4-27. Release Trigger Solenoid Set Removal
ASSEMBLY POINT:
•
Apply adhesive to the release sensor set screw. (See Chapter 6.)
ADJUSTMENT REQUIRED
After disassembling the release trigger solenoid set, the following adjustment is required
during the assembly procedure:
•
Release trigger solenoid position adjustment (See Section 4.3.1.)
• Printing position alignment (only for the bidirectional printing positions) (See Section 4.3.5.)
4-26
REV.-A
4.2.6.6 Pump Unit Removal
WARNING
•
Because there is ink remaining in the pump unit and ink tube, be sure to drain the ink
before starting the pump unit removal.
Step 1 Remove the printer mechanism. (See Section 4.2.5)
Step 2 Loosen the tube set screw at the ink draining side (upper side) of the pump,and remove the
ink draining tube from both the pump and the hook of the valve.
Tube set screw
Pump
Ink draining tube
Figure 4-28. Ink Discharge Tube Removal
Step 3 Move the carriage to the right.
Step 4 Remove the CC screw (M3 X 6) and CCS screw (M3 X 8), which secure the pump unit to frame
L and the base frame, respectively, then remove the pump unit.
Pump unit
Pump unit
CC (M3 X 6)
Figure 4-29. Pump Unit Removal
ASSEMBLY POINT:
After installing the pump unit, check that the ink discharge tube is fixed to the hook section at the
•
back of the valve set.
4-27
REV.-A
4.2.6.7 Pump Unit Disassembly
This section describes how to remove each component of the pump unit. Figure 4-30 shows the pump
unit disassembly procedure.
WARNING
• When disassembling the pump unit, be careful because the remaining ink in the pump unit
and ink tube might leak .
• When installing the pump unit, check that the ink tube and 0 ring are not cut or damaged,
and insert the ink tube fully.
I
I
Pump unit disassembly
( 1)
I
4-29
Pump motor set removal
(2 )
I
4-30
(3)
I
4-31
Cap set removal
-
(5 )
I
4-32
Cleaner set removal
Figure 4-30. Pump Unit Disassembly Procedure
4-28
4-31
Valve set removal
Pump set removal
(4)
I
REV.-A
(1) Pump motor set removal
Step 1 Remove the two CB screws (M2.6 X 5) securing the pump motor to the P frame, then remove
the pump motor set.
P Frame
Pump motor
"':.--_--- CB (M2.6 X 5)
Figure 4-31. Pump Motor Set Removal
ASSEMBLY POINTS:
•
Install the pump motor so that the label side faces down, and apply abhesive to the two screws
securing the pump motor. (See Chapter 6)
•
After installing the pump motor set, lubricate the point at which where the pump motor pinion, pump
transmission gear, and pump drive gear engage one another.
4-29
REV.-A
(2) Pump set removal
Step 1 Loosen the tube set screw, then remove the ink tube from the head cap set.
Step 2 Remove the two CC screws (M3 X 5) securing the pump set, then remove the pump set.
Ink ----------------
tube
CC (M3 X 5)
Figure 4-32. Pump Set Removal
ASSEMBLY POINTS:
•
Install the pump set so that the pin follower of the pump set and the pin of the pin plate mate correctly.
•
Apply locking compound to the two screws securing the pump set.
Screw Hole
Dowel
Pin Follower
Figure 4-33. Pump Set Installation
4-30
REV.-A
(3) Valve set removal
Step 1 Loosen the tube set screw on the valve set, then remove the ink tube from the valve set.
Step 2 Remove the pump set. (See (2))
Step 3 Unlock the bent tab and stud, which fix the valve set to the P frame, then remove the valve
set. (See (2))
Tab
Valve set
P Frame
Tube set
screw
Stud
Figure 4-34. Valve Set Removal
(4) Head cap set removal
WARNING
•
Be careful not to deform the head cap aligning spring.
Step 1 Take the head cap aligning spring out using tweezers.
Step 2 Loosen the tube set screw on the pump set, then remove the ink tube from the pump set.
Step 3 Loosen the tube set screw on the valve set, then remove the ink tube from the valve set.
Step 4 Remove the head cap set from the two hooks of the head cap support.
~---Hooks
Head cap
aligning spring
Figure 4-35. Head Cap Set Removal
4-31
REV.-A
(5) Cleaner set removal
Step 1 Remove the pump set. (See (2))
Step 2 Remove the head cap set. (See (4))
Step 3 Remove the head cap spring.
Step 4 Spread the snap fit of the head cap support, then pull out the head cap support from the P
frame prop.
Head cap spring
Head cap support
Snapfit
P frame prop
Figure 4-36. Head Cap Support Removal
Step 5 Pull the cleaner set out from the P frame prop.
Cleaner set
P frame prop
Figure 4-37. Cleaner Set Removal
ASSEMBLY POINTS:
•
When installing the snap fit, attach it so that a click can be heard, which means the notch of the
snap fit has mated with the groove of the prop.
•
During this installation, remember to lubricate. (See Chapter 6.)
4-32
REV.-A
4.2.6.8 Ink End Sensor and Thermistor Set Removal
DANGER
• The ink supply needle and ink draining needle may be removed during this disassemble
procedure. In this case, be careful of the tips of the needles, which might prick your finger.
Step 1 Remove the printer mechanism. (See Section 4.2.5)
Step 2 Loosen the tube set screw at the ink discharge side (upper side) of the pump set, and remove
the ink discharge tube from both the pump set and the hook of the valve set. (See Figure 4-28
in Section 4.2.6.6)
Step 3 Loosen the tube set screw at the metal tube side of the filter set, then remove the ink supply
needle from the filter set.
Step 4 Remove the four eBB screws (M3 X 12) securing the cartridge holder unit to the base frame.
Step 5 Shift the cartridge holder unit a little bit toward the front of the printer mechanism, unlock the
three hooks of the holder from the cut outs of the base frame, then remove the cartridge holder
unit.
Ink supply needle
Filter set
Tube set
screw
Figure 4-38. Ink Supply Needle Removal (80-column machine)
eBB (M3
x
12)
Ink supply needle
Filter set
Figure 4-39. Cartridge Holder Unit and Ink Supply Needle (136-column machine) Removal
NOTE: When taking the cartridge holder unit out, be careful not to damage the tube, needle, or lead
wire.
4-33
REV.-A
Step 7 Remove the lead wires from the ink end sensor and thermistor set from the hooks ofthe cartridge
holder. And remove the thermistor.
Step 8 Pull out the ink end sensorfrom the two sensor supporting pins while using yourfinger reloosen
the hook securing the ink end sensor.
Hook
Thermistor
Ink end sensor
Lead
wires
Figure 4-40. Ink End Sensor and Thermistor Removal
ASSEMBLY POINTS:
•
When attaching the micro switch to the ink end sensor, be careful of the assembly procedure (the
black lead wirte must be installed first) and mounting direction (see Figure 4-41).
•
Check that the lead wires from the ink end sensor set and thermistor set run correctly.
•
When attaching the cartridge holder unit to the base frame, turn the printer mechanism over so that
the unit can be attached easily, and check that the hooks of the cartridge holder mate correctly with
the cutouts in the base frame.
Thermistor
< Right
Ink end sensor
<Back>
Side>
Figure 4-41. Ink End Sensor and Thermistor Installation
4-34
REV.-A
4.2.6.9 Home Position Sensor Removal
Step 1 Remove the upper case. (See Section 4.2.2.1)
Step 2 Move the carriage to the center of the platen.
Step 3 Cut the wire band securing the home position sensor to the Frame L.
Step 4 Remove the home position sensor from frame L, then pull out the lead wire connector.
Frame L
/
Lead wire
Wire band
/
Home position sensor
Figure 4-42. Home Position Sensor Removal
NOTE: Be careful not to stress the lead wire of the home position sensor.
ASSEMBLY POINT:
•
Install the wire band securing the home position sensor so that the cable clamping section comes
outside of frame L. (See Figure 4-42)
4-35
REV.-A
4.2.6.10 Top Edge Sensor Board and CSF Sensor Removal
WARNING
Be careful not to drop the top edge sensor lever spring in to the printer
mechanism.
NOTE: If you only remove the TE sensor board, you can pass the Steps 1 and 6.
Step 1 Remove the pump unit. (See Section 4.2.6.6)
Step 2 Remove the two CB(N) screws (M3 X 6) securing the both sides of platen cover, then remove
the platen cover.
Step 3 Remove the paper eject guide plate spring from the papger eject guide plate and frame M
(middle).
Step 4 Remove the E ring from the shaft of frame M, then remove the paper eject guide plate and paper
eject paper guide plate spring.
Paper eject guide plate
E-ring
Paper eject guide plate spring
CBS (M3 X 6)
CB(N) (M3 X 6)
Frame M
Figure 4-43. Paper Eject Guide Plate Removal
Step 5 If necessary, cut the cable clamp which binds the lead wires from the top edge sensor board
and CSF sensor to frame M, then remove the lead wires from the hook of the platen shaft holder.
Step 6 Remove the CP(P) screw (M3 X 8) securing the CSF sensor to frame M, then remove the CSF
sensor.
Figure 4-44. CSF Sensor Removal
4-36
REV.-A
Step 7
Remove the top edge sensor lever spring from the top edge sensor board using the tweezers.
Step 8
Remove the CB screw (M2.5 X 4) securing the top edge sensor board set.
Step 9
Remove the two CBS screws (M3 X 6) securing the both sides of (upper) paper guide, then
remove the (upper) paper guide. (See Figure 4-44.)
Step 10 Remove the top edge sensor board with the lead wire and CSF sensor.
TE sensor lever spring
TE sensor board
CB (M2.5 X 4)
Figure 4-45. Top Edge Sensor Removal
ASSEMBLY POINTS:
•
Before installing the (upper) paper guide, insert the top edge sensor board into frame M.
•
Apply adhesive to the screws securing the top edge sensor board and CSF sensor. (See Chapter 6)
•
Adjust the positions of the (upper) paper guide and top edge sensor board so that the lever will be
positioned at the center of the photo coupler on the top edge sensor board.
•
Hook the paper eject guide plate spring at frame M as shown in Figure 4-46.
Frame M
_ _- - Spring
Figure 4-46. Paper Eject Guide Plate Spring
ADJUSTMENT REQUIRED
After removing the top edge sensor board, the following adjustment is required during the
assembly procedure:
• TE sensor roller position adjustment (See Section 4.3.2)
4-37
REV.-A
4.2.6.11 Platen Unit Removal
Step 1 Remove the (upper) paper guide with the top edge sensor board attached. (See Section 4.2.6.10)
Step 2 Remove the CBS screw (M3 X 6) securing each platen shaft holder, L (left) and R (right).
Step 3 Remove the platen unit with the top edge holder and the top edge holder transmission shaft
by moving the platen unit along the slits of frames M and R.
Top edge holder
Transmission shaft
Shaft holder
CBS (M3 X 6)
Figure 4-47. Platen Unit Removal
ASSEMBLY POINT:
•
Apply abhesive to the screws securing each of the platen shaft holders, Land R.
ADJUSTMENT REQUIRED
After removing the platen unit, the following adjustment is required during the assembly
procedure:
• TE sensor roller position adjustment (See Section 4.3.2)
• Platen gap adjustment (See Section 4.3.4)
4-38
REV.-A
4.2.6.12 Top Edge Holder Set and Top Edge Holder Transmission Shaft Set Removal
NOTES: •
•
Be careful so that the top edge sensor lever is not caught by the slit of the platen.
Because the plain washer and two reaf springs are used at the right side of the top edge
holder transmission shaft, be careful not to lose them while removing the top edge holder
transmission shaft.
•
Because the top edge holder arm L, plain washer, and disc springs are released when the
top edge holder set is removed, be careful not to lose them.
•
Disc springs are also used at the right side of the platen. Moreover, the disc springs are
different from those of the disc springs used on the left side. When removing the disc
springs used on the right side, keep them separated from those used at the left side.
Step 1 Remove the platen unit. (See Section 4.2.6.11)
Step 2 Pull out platen shaft holder L from the platen shaft.
Step 3 Remove the top edge holder transmission shaft set.
Step 4 Remove the two CB screws (M2.5 X 3) securing the top edge holder set, then remove the top
edge holder set.
TE holder
transmission shaft
(M2.5 X 3)
~
Shaft holder
Figure 4-48. Top Edge Holder Set and Top Edge Holder Transmission Shaft Set Removal
4-39
REV.-A
ASSEMBLY POINTS:
•
When installing the top edge holder set, confirm that the studs of platen shat holder Land Rare
inserted correctly in the holes of the top edge holder transmission shaft set, then tighten the screws.
•
When installing the top edge holder transmission shaft set, insert the plain washer and two reaf
•
After matching the phases of the left and right sides of the top edge holder transmission shaft set
springs into platen shaft holder R. (See Figure 4-48.)
and top edge holder set so that they are parallel, insert platen shaft L into the platen shaft.
Platen shaft
holder L
Top edge holder transmission shaft set
/
Plain washer
~E'P,,"g,
: / Platen shaft holder R
~%~/
~~
Figure 4-49. Top Edge Holder Transmission Shaft Set Installation
ADJUSTMENT REQUIRED
After removing the top edge holder set and top edge holder transmission shaft set, the
following adjustments are required during the assembly procedure:
• TE sensor roller position adjustment (See Section 4.3.2.)
• Platen gap adjustment (See Section 4.3.2.)
After replacing either the top edge holder set or the top edge holder transmission shaft set,
the following adjustment is required in addition to the
above two:
• Printing alignment - TE holder position adjustment (See Section 4.3.5.)
4-40
REV.-A
4.2.6.13 Paper End Sensor Removal
Step 1 Remove the platen unit. (See Section 4.2.6.11)
Step 2 Remove the two CCS screws (M3 X 6) securing the lower paper guide to the base frame, then
remove the lower paper guide.
Base frame
CCS (M3 X 6)
Figure 4-50. Lower Paper Guide Removal
Step 3 Remove the CCS screw (M3 X 8) securing the paper end sensor set, then remove the paper
end sensor set.
Paper end sensor
Studs
CCS (M3 X 8)
Figure 4-51. Paper End Sensor Set Removal
ASSEMBLY POINT:
• When installing the paper end sensor set, confirm that the two studs of the sensor are inserted
correctly in the holes of the base frame, then tighten the screws.
4-41
REV.-A
4.2.6.14 Paper Feed Roller Shaft Set Removal
Step 1 Remove the platen unit. (See Section 4.2.6.11)
Step 2 Remove the lower paper guide. (See Section 4.2.6.13)
Step 3 Remove the four paper feed lever springs from the hooks of the base
frame, then remove the paper feed roller shaft set.
Paper feed
roller shaft
Paper feed
lever spring
Base frame
Figure 4-52. Paper Feed Roller Shaft Set Removal
ASSEMBLY POINT:
•
Before installing the paper feed roller shaft set, perform lubrication as indicated in Figure 6-4 in
Chapter 6.
4-42
REV.-A
4.2.6.15 TE Motor Removal
Step 1 Remove the carriage unit. (See Section 4.2.6.3)
Step 2 Remove the platen unit. (See Section 4.2.6.11)
Step 3 Remove the (lower) paper guide. (See Section 4.2.6.11)
Step 4 Remove the paper bail. (See Section 4.2.6.1)
Step 5 Remove the two screws (+S tight up set hexagonal (M3 X 6)) securing the paper guide plate,
then remove the paper guide plate set.
Screws
Paper guide plate set
Figure 4-53. Paper Guide Plate Set Removal
Step 6 Remove the two CCS screws (M3 X 8) securing the support frame, then remove the support
frame.
Figure 4-54. Support Frame Removal
4-43
REV.-A
Step 7
Remove the TE motor lead wire from the wire clip.
Step 8
Remove the two CCS screws (M3 X 8) securing frame M by inserting a screwdriver through
the holes (two) in frame L.
Step 9
Remove frame M from the cutout in the base frame while tilting frame M.
Frame L
Wire clip
Holes
Figure 4-55. Frame M Removal
Step 1OUnlock the three bent tabs of the TE motor cover, then remove the TE motor cover from frame
M.
Tabs
Tabs -=------"-Cc+
- - - - - - TE motor cover
Figure 4-56. TE Motor Cover Removal
4-44
REV.-A
Step 11 Remove the two CB screws (M2.5 X 3) securing the TE motor, then remove the TE motor from
frame M.
Frame M
TE motor
CB (M2.5 X 3)
Figure 4-57. TE Motor Removal
ASSEMBLY POINTS:
•
Lubricate the paper feed reduction gear and top edge holder paper feed transmission gear. (See
•
When installing the TE motor, attach it so that no space exists between frame M and the stopper
Chapter 6)
of the base frame.
ADJUSTMENT REQUIRED
After replacing the TE motor, the following adjustments are required:
• TE sensor roller position adjustment (See Section 4.3.2)
• Carriage timing belt tension adjustment (See Section 4.3.3)
•
Platen gap adjustment (See Section 4.3.4)
• Printing position alignment (See Section 4.3.5)
NOTE: When you want to remove only the paper guide plate set and you have a 5.5 mm hexagonal
wrench, you can omit steps 1 through 4.
Hexagonal wrench
Figure 4-58. Paper Guide Plate Removal
4-45
REV.-A
4.3 ADJUSTMENT
This section describes the adjustment procedures required when reassembling the printer. If
disassembly or replacement is performed during maintenance or repairs, be sure to perform the
following adjustments. Although each section explains when these adjustments are required, they can
also be performed when the printer doesn't work as usual or when print quality is not good.
DANGER
Perform the adjustment with the power source disconnected, unless otherwise mentioned.
4.3.1 Trigger Solenoid Adjustment
This adjustment is performed when assembling the trigger solenoid. Be sure to perform this adjustment
priorto attaching the other parts such as the carriage motor. This adjustment is required in the following
case.
•
When the trigger solenoid or trigger lever is removed.
This adjusts the clearance at the point where the trigger solenoid lever meets the release planetary
gear set. (Clearance should not be too narrow nor too wide.) If this adjustment is not performed correctly,
the following may result.
•
Paper selection (selection of tractor or friction feed) won't be performed correctly.
•
Paper feed motor will continue to rotate during paper selection.
Step 1 Fix the paper feed knob and rotate the platen (5 or 6 times) by pulling the trigger lever with
your finger. (Paper select will switch.)
Step 2 Remove your finger from the trigger solenoid and remove the paper feed knob.
Paper feed knob
Trigger lever
Figure 4-59. Preparation of The Trigger Solenoid Adjustment
4-46
REV.-A
Step 3 Loosen the lock screw CP (P)(M3 X 6) clamping the trigger solenoid and trigger lever.
Step 4 Place the finger of your left hand on the bottom of the trigger solenoid and push it up lightly.
(When the carriage motor is installed, push it up over the motor.)
Step 5 While maintaining this situation, place the thickness gauge (0.5 mm) between the trigger lever
and release planetary gear set (Fig. A) and hold the gauge using the finger that is pushing up
the solenoid. (Keep pushing strongly.)
Step 6 Tighten the screw firmly using your other hand.
Thickness
gauge (0.5 mm)
/LOCk screw GP(p) (M3 X 6)
Trigger solenoid
Trigger lever
Figure 4-60. Tightening Down The Trigger Solenoid
4.3.2 TE Sensor Roller Adjustment
This adjustment can be performed without removing the printer mechanism. But the following parts
should be removed, besides the upper case.
•
Paper eject guide plate
•
Platen cover
This adjustment is required in the following cases.
•
When the TE sensor roller is removed.
•
When the TE sensor is removed.
The TE roller detects the top of the paper and the location of the roller influences the sensor's reception.
If this adjustment is not performed correctly, the following may result.
•
The position of paper top edge won't be detected correctly.
(Paper loose
-'>-
paper jam)
•
Top edge holder system won't work.
•
Top edge holder doesn't operate.
(Top edge is always detected
(Top edge is never detected
-'>-
-'>-
paper jam)
paper jam)
4-47
REV.-A
Step 1 Tighten the screw CB (M2.5 X 4) clamping the TE sensor to the paper guide temporarily.
Step 2 Confirm that the roller moves up and down by holding the right edge of the TE sensor and
moving it forward and backward.
Step 3 Set position alignment tool #693 so that the TE roller shaft and the surface of the platen line
up. (When viewed from the position shown in Figure 4-62, the roller shaft must not be visible
because it should be covered by the position alignment tooL)
Step 4 Adjust the TE sensor roller position by moving the TE sensor set forward or backward so that
the dimension of the projected portion above the platen surface becomes the same as that of
the cutout on the position alignment tool. (First set the TE roller to the lowest position, then
adjust the roller position upward step by step until the roller is stopped by the position alignment
tooL)
Step 5 Tighten the TE sensor set screw and glue it (Refer to section 6). At this time, pay attention to
the orientation of the TE sensor, so that the sensor lever is located at the center of the photo
interrupter.
CB (M2.5
x
4)
TE Sensor set
TE sensor roller
Figure 4-61. Top Edge Sensor
#E693
Figure 4-62. TE Sensor Roller Adjustment
4-48
REV.-A
4.3.3 Carriage Timing Belt Tension Adjustment
This adjustment is performed on the printer mechanism alone. Be sure to perform this adjustment prior
to installing the printer mechanism in the lower case.
This adjustment is required in the following cases.
•
When the carriage motor is removed.
•
When the parts affiliated with the carriage mechanism are removed.
Tension should not be too high nor too low. If this adjustment is not performed collectly, the following
may result.
•
The print pitch will not be correct. (Bi-d adjustment won't correct it.)
•
Carriage errors will occur. (In the worst case.)
Step 1 Tighten the screw CCS (M3 X 8) clamping the belt tensioner on the left side of the carriage
mechanism temporarily.
NOTE: Confirm that the carriage timing belt is not twisted.
Step 2 Place the top of the tension gauge in the hook of the belt tensioner.
Step 3 Clamp the mechanism, pull the tension gauge, and tighten the screw firmly with the gauge
reading as follows:
Tension: 2.6 ± 0.2 Kg
Tension gauge
I
Hook
CCS (M3 X 8)
Belt
tensioner
Figure 4-63. Carriage Timing Belt Tension Adjustment
4.3.4 Platen Gap Adjustment
This adjustment can be performed without removing the printer mechanism. This adjustment is required
in the following cases.
•
When the print head is removed.
•
When the platen is exchanged or removed.
•
When the carrige, guide shaft, and frame are exchanged or removed. (The parts affecting the head's
location.)
4-49
REV.-A
The platen gap determine proper printing (= distance between nozzle and paper) and affects the print
quality (dot allignment). If this adjustment is not performed correctly, the following may be affected .
•
Dot condition
•
Print density
WARNING
Both sides of the nozzle have protective guards. When you place the thickness gauge between
the platen and head, be careful not to touch the gauge to the nozzle. (If it touches the nozzle,
the nozzle surface could be damaged and printing will be affected.) In this adjustment, the gap
between the guard and the platen is adjusted.
Step 1 Remove the printer cover and upper case. (Refter to section 4.2.2.1)
Step 2 Move the paper bail up. Move the printhead to the left side of the platen (near the position where
the scale marking" 1" aligus with the right side of the head) by moving the carriage manually
while pressing the pump unit. (Refer to Figure 4-2)
Step 3 Tighten the two screws clamping the print head to the carriage temporarily so that you can
move it manually.
Right side: CP(P)(M3 X 6)
Left side: CP(P)(M3 X 12)
Step 4 Confirm that the head adjust lever is in the usual place (at the narrow side). (Refer to section
1.2.1.1)
Step 5 Confirm that the inclined adjusting pin on the left side is at the center (the direction of the
projection is exactly to the left). If it isn't, remove the head and replace it. (Refer to section 4.2.1.)
Step 6 Place the thickness gauge between the head and the platen (Le. between the nozzle guard and
the platen) from the side and tighten the screw using the torque driver so that the thickness
gauge can be removed easily.
Platen gap: 1.0 ± 0.1 mm
Screw torque: 3 Kg. cm
Step 7 Check the gap at the center and right side of the platen. If it is too narrow (less than 0.9 mm)
or too wide (more than 1.1 mm), go back to Step 6 and adjust it again.
Step 8 When the gap is correct, glue the adhesive to left and right screws. (Refer to section 6)
li' 11 III I 1,0' I11 I1
t
t Ilia'
~:--:=~~==-=~*---x
f
CP(P) (M3
12)
,,
I
I
I
CP(P) (M3
x
6)
I
I
~
I
I
I
Head adjust pin
Figure 4-64. Platen Gap Adjustment
4-50
REV.-A
4.3.5 Printing Alignment
This section describes the various printing alignment procedures.
4.3.5.1 Printing Alignment Items
The printing alignment can be divided into the following items:
•
Top edge holder position adjustment
•
Head slant adjustment
•
Bidirectional printing adjustment
All of the above adjustments can be executed without removing the printer mechanism.
Because the programs for the above adjustments are included in the adjustment cartridge, service
personnel can perform the adjustments (correctthe control circuits for the printer mechanism operation)
in accordance with the messages displayed on the LeD panel. The resulting values overwrite the
previous data stored in the control panel EEPROM. Only the head slant adjustment is performed by
actually adjusting the physical mounting position. This means that no data is stored for this adjustment.
Therefore, the program for this adjustment included in the adjustment cartridge is only a test program.
If any of the adjustments are skipped (see Figure 4-65), the previous data remains. Be careful not to
overwrite the data unnecessarily. The printing alignment is represented in two different ways in
"ADJUSTMENT REQUIRED" indicated in Section 4.2. What each representation means is described
below:
Example
•
Printing alignment (see Section 4.3.5):
Perform all the adjustment items described in this section.
•
Printing alignment (only for bidirectional printing) (see Section 4.3.5):
Perform only the bidirectional printing alignment described in this section. Skip the other adjustment
items.
When the control panel is replaced, no data is present in the new EEPROM.
Therefore, all the adjustment items must be performed. Each adjustment is described below:
Top edge holder position adjustment
This adjustment is required in the following cases:
•
When the TE motor is replaced
•
When the top edge holder is replaced
•
When any part related to the top edge holder mechanism is disassembled or replaced
This adjustment corrects for the difference between the number of steps the motor is driven to position
the top edge holder at the reference position and the actual position the top edge holder is at after
the motor is driven for the specified number of steps. The following problems might occur if the top
edge holder position at paper feeding time is not correct:
•
A paper jam could occur because the paper is not fed correctly during the paper feed/eject operation.
•
Printing may not be possible if the printhead strikes the top edge holder.
4-51
REV.-A
Head slant adjustment
This adjustment is required in the following cases:
•
When the horizontal dot spacing becomes too wide (extra space is added between the characters)
•
When the printhead is replaced
•
When any part related to carriage and head installation, such as the carriage, guide shaft, or frame,
is replaced or removed
The head slant adjustment corrects the head slant angle when the printhead is installed using the head
adjust pin (this is required because every head and carriage has different dimensions within the
specified tolerances). If the head slant is not correct, the following problem could occur if two rows
of nozzles on the printhead were misaligned:
•
Extra space is added between horizontal dots (the printed dots shift).
Bidirectional printing adjustment
This adjustment is required in the following cases:
•
When the horizontal printing positions (characters) are misaligned.
•
When either the control panel, printer mechanism, or both are replaced (unit replacement).
•
When any part related to carriage operation, such as the carriage, carriage motor, timing belt, guide
shaft, or frame, is replaced or removed.
The bidirectional printing alignment uses the control circuit to correct any differences in timing for the
odd-numbered lines and even-numbered lines in the bidirectional printing mode (These differences are
due to the tolerances of the printer mechanism parts). If the printing positions are misaligned, the
following might occur:
•
During bidirectional printing, columns printed in the odd-numbered lines are shifted with respect
to those in the even-numbered lines.
•
Vertical ruled lines are misaligned.
4-52
REV.-A
4.3.5.2 Adjustment Procedure
Figures 4-65 through 4-68 show the flow charts for the adjustment programs.
Once the first step (START) is executed, the subsequent steps in the flow charts
must be executed up to the last step.
•
Start
Remove the printer cover and printer lid, insert the adjustment cartridge in optional cartridge slot
A, and turn the printer power on.
•
Basic operation
•
To skip an adjustment item: Press the MICRO FEED switch.
•
To execute an adjustment item: Press the LOAD/EJECT switch.
NOTE: Select either the 80-or 136-column model. (Since the PROM used is common to both the 80-and
136-column models, this mode must be reset each time the adjustment is started so that the
PROM can identify the model type to be adjusted.)
Press MICRFEED
"7 switch
ENTER
SKIP
Figure 4-65. Main Flow Chart
4-53
REV.-A
A
The top edge holder
moves to the
adjustment position.
Set the exclusive
position alignment
tool #E693 as shown
in the Figure below.
(Do not tilt the tool,
but attach it closely.)
TE Holder
#E693
Paper guide
plate set
NG
OK
Press the
LOAD/EJECT switch.
For the
dimension indicated
by the tool
Press the
MICRO FEED J),. switch as
many times as
needed.
Nallow
Press the
MICRO FEED v switch as
many times as
needed.
Press the
LOAD/EJECT switch.
RETURN
Figure 4-66. Top Edge Holder Position Adjustment
4-54
REV.-A
WARNING
When turning the adjusting pin for the head slant adjustment, be sure to first loosen the
printhead fixing screw to float the printhead. If you try to turn the pin forcibly, the screw head
might break.
B
Load the paper.
{
® {
<?
8 {
0
Press the
ON LINE switch.
Select the pattern,
b(OK), a, or c(NG),
whitch best
categorizes the
printing.
\ \ \
\ \ \
\ \ \
------------
I I I
I I I
I I I
------------
I I I
I I I
I I I
------------
08
Move the printing to the center of the platen,
and loosen the head fixing screw (see Figure 4-5).
Turn the adjusting pin, and make the printhead as it was.
When the printing is categorized as pattern a:
Turn the adjusting pin clockwise.
When the printing is categorized as pattern c:
Turn the adjusting pin counter clockwise.
~
I
Adjust the platen gap (see Section 4.3.4)
RETURN
Figure 4-67. Head Slant Adjustment
4-55
REV.-A
c
Load the paper.
Press the ON LINE switch.
Print five patterns in the LO
mode.
Select the pattern in
whitch vertical misalignment
is the smallest, and input
the value of that pattern.
I DATA
IN I
When the value is negative (-):
is positive (+):
Press the MICRO FEED "7
switch the number of times
corresponding to the value.
Press the MICRO FEED .6.
switch the number of times
corresponding to the value.
Press the LOAD/EJECT switch.
Three patterns are printed:
The pattern selected above, its
pattern value + 1, and its value -1.
Confirm that
vertical misalignment is still the
smallest in the selected pattern.
Select the pattern
whitch has the least
vertical misalignment among
the above three patterns.
Input the pattern data again.
Press the LOAD/EJECT switch
(check printing in the
Draft and high speed modes.)
Since alignment is
based on the LO characters,
aliment in the Draft and
high speed printing modes is
based on a calculated value.
Therefore, if you are not
satisfied with the alignment
in the Draft or high speed
mode, repeat the adjustment
and input another correction
value.
RETURN
Figure 4-68. Bidirectional Printing Adjustment
4-56
REV.-A
CHAPTER 5
TROUBLESHOOTING
5.1 GENERAL
5-1
5.2 UNIT REPLACEMENT
5-1
5.3 SEIPS/SANPSE Power Board Unit Repair
5-10
5.4 DIAGNOSTICS TOOL
5-13
5.4.1 Overview
5-13
5.4.2 Description
5-13
5.4.3 How to setup
5-13
5.4.4 Functions and use of diagnostic ROM
5-13
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 5-1.
Unit Replacement-1
5-3
Figure 5-2.
Unit Replacement-2
5-4
Figure 5-3.
Unit Replacement-3
5-5
Figure 5-4.
Unit Replacement-4
5-6
Figure 5-5.
Unit Replacement-5
5-7
Figure 5-6.
Unit Replacement-6
5-8
LIST OF TABLES
Table 5-1.
Unit Replacement Numbers
5-1
Table 5-2.
Symptom and Reference Pages
5-2
Table 5-3.
SEIPS/SANPSE Board (CN2) Output Voltage
5-3
Table 5-4.
Paper Feed Motor Coil Resistance
5-6
Table 5-5.
SEIPS/SANPSE Board Parts List
5-9
Table 5-6.
SEIPS/SANPSE Board Unit Repair
5-10
5-i
REV.-A
REV.-A
5.1 GENERAL
Troubleshooting is based on the idea that error symptoms vary according to the defective component.
Troubleshooting may involve either unit replacement or unit repair, each of which is treated separately
below.
First try to determine the defective unit by referring to section 5.2. The flowcharts in the section should
help you to isolate the defective unit. Then refer to section 5.3 for instructions for further checking and
for replacement of power supply board components. Section 5.3 lists, for various symptoms, the
potentially defective unit that may account for them. In addition, the section mentions the appropriate
waveforms and resistance values that should be checked for.
If trouble occurs in the printer mechanism and main board, refer to section 5.4, which specifies
procedures for identifying defective components by using the diagnostics tool.
5.2 UNIT REPLACEMENT
This section correlates symptoms with the potentially defective units that may be causing them. The
unit numbers are listed in Table 5-1.
Table 5-1. Unit Replacement Numbers
Description
Name of Unit
SEIPS Board
SANPSE Board
SAMA Board
SAPNAL-W
Model-4460
Model-4410
Printhead for SO-2550
Printhead for SO-850
Fuse (SEIPS)
Fuse (SANPSE)
Power Board of 120V
Power Board of 2201240V
Main Board
Control Panel Board
Printer Mechanism for SO-2550
Printer Mechanism for SO-850
Type-A
Type-B
ULTSC2.0 A-N 1
BET 1.25A
Unit No.
Y502202000
Y567204000
Y502204100
Y502502000
Y503590200
Y502590200
Y426110000
Y426210000
X502061011
X502063040
DANGER
If you need to turn the printer power on without upper case while troubleshooting, be careful to Do
not touch the live part of power line. You should be cover the live part by taping or wareing rubber
glove when you turned ON the power
5-1
REV.-A
Table 5-2. Symptom and Reference Pages
Symptoms
Reference Page
No LE Os are lit on the control panel.
Carriage, pump, and so on don't operate at all.
5-3
An error code is displayed on the control panel
LCD.
5-4
Nothing is printing.
A specific dot is missing.
Print quality is bad (print density or other).
5-5
No paper is fed.
The amount of paper fed is irregular.
Paper jam occurs.
5-6
No paper is fed when you press the return key or
change pages key in OFF L1NEmode.
You can not select function modes using panel
switches.
You can not select ON LINE or OFF LINE mode.
You can not set panel settings.
5-7
The result of the self-test is correct, but data from
the host computer isnot printed correctly.
When printer is operating, an error occurs in the
host computer.
5-8
Problem
Printer does not operate at all
with power switch on
Printer detects an error and
the buzzer rings
Printing error occurs (in selftest)
Abnormal paper feed
Control panel does not operate correctly
Incorrect printing in ON LINE
mode
••
•
•
••
••
•
•
•
••
•
•
5-2
REV.-A
1. The printer does not operate at all with power switch on. (No LEDs are lit.)
No
Yes
>----~
Replace the fuse and
pull out CN 1 on the 1 - - - - - - - - - ,
power board.
No
No
Check the output
voltage of the power
board (Refer to Table
Yes
5-31.
No
Replace the SEIMA
board.
Replace the power
board.
No
Yes
Replace the printer
mechanism.
END
Figure 5-1. Unit Replacement·1
Table 5-3. SEIPS/SANPSE Board (CN2) Output Voltage
Connector Terminal
3,4(GND)
5,6(GND)
Voltage
1,2
Approx. +24 V
7,8
Approx. +4.8 V
Approx. + 12.3 V (+ 11.7 V)
Approx. -12.3 V (- 11.7V)
9
10
NOTES 1: The voltages shown in Table 5-3 are measured when the printer is onstandby.
2: The voltages in parentheses are measured with the optional interfaceboard installed.
5-3
REV.-A
2. Printer detects an error (buzzer rings).
Read the error
message displayed
on the LCD.
Yes
Check the cable
connect ion on the
control panel.
No
No
Yes
Connect the cable
correctly.
Yes
Turn off the power
supply and try to
move the carriage
manually.
Replace the SEIPNL
board.
No
No
Yes
Replace the pr inter
mechanism.
Yes
No
Yes
Replace the SEIMA
board.
Yes
Replace the power
board.
END
Figure 5-2. Unit Replacement-2
5-4
REV.-A
3. Printing error occurs (in self-test)
Set the adjust lever
in the carrect position
and execute self-test.
No
Is pr int qual ity
bad? (a specified
dot is missing or
print density
is incorrect . )
~
Is each
connector on the
SEIMA board
connected
correctly?
<;
No
No
Yes
Connect each connector
correctly.
Execute the adjustment
for pr inthead slant
and Bi-d print.
Yes
Clean the ink path
and re ink. (Refer
to Section 3.1.2.)
No
Yes
END
No
Yes
Replace the pr inter
mechanism.
No
Replace the SEIMA
board.
END
Figure 5-3. Unit Replacement-3
5-5
REV.-A
4. Abnormal paper feeding
No
Yes
Yes
>-------1
Confirm that there
are no stray pieces
of paper or anything
else nothing abnormal
within the paper the
paper path. Remove
any stray pieces ar
other fore Ign obJects.
Yes
Turn off the power
supply and turn the
No
< ';aper feed knob. >------------,
"""<Does the knob
turnsmoothly?
A
Was the p'aper feed
<motor cOil damaged >-N_O
by overheating?
(Refer to Table5-4.)
-.j
Yes
Replace the printer
mechanism.
END
END
Figure 5-4.Unit Replacement-4
Table 5·4. Paper Feed (PF) Motor Coil Resistance
Measurement Terminal
(PF motor reed wire connector)
Resistance
1 pin
5 pin
2 pin
27±0.4 ohmns
3 pin
6 pin
4 pin
5-6
REV.-A
5. The control panel does not operate correctly.
No
Yes
Connect the control
panel cable correctly.
No
Replace the
control panel.
No
Yes
Replace the
SEIMA board.
Yes
Replace the
power board.
END
Figure 5-5. Unit Replacement·5
5-7
REV.-A
6. Incorrect printing in ON LINE mode
Execute self-test.
No
Refer to other sect ion
>--------~for troubleshoot Ing .
Option
Check the setup values
>--'--------1between printer and
1--------,
host computer.
Parallel
Yes
Replace option
interface board.
No
No
Adjust the
Setup values.
Replace the Interface
cable between pr inter
and host computer.
No
Replace the
SEIMA board.
Figure 5-6. Unit Replacement-6
5-8
REV.-A
5.3 SANPS/SANPSE POWER BOARD UNIT REPAIR
This section indicates the points to be checked in response to problems, and the measures to be taken
based on the result of the check. Utilize the checkpoints to determine and correct defective components.
Table 5-6 is divided into the five following columns:
•
Problem:
Indicates the problem
•
Symptom:
Indicates potential condition which may be underlying the problem. You must check
to see which if any of the symptoms apply.
•
•
Indicates the potential cause of the problem.
Cause:
Checkpoint:
Perform this check to determine whether the problem is the result of the cause listed
at left.
•
Indicates the repair that will correct the fault.
Solution:
The Table 5-3 shows the main components used on the SEIPS/SANPSE boards.
Table 5-5. SEIPS/SANPSE Board Parts List
Board
Name
Location
Parts Name
Description
Parts No.
IC 1
IC20
020
03,21
02
R31,32
L5431-AA
TL494CN
2SA1469
2SA1020
2SC3746
Adjustable Plesison REG.
PWM Control
Transistor 60V 5A 20W
Transistor 50V 2A 900mW
Transistor 60V 5A 20W
Fusible resistor 2 ohm 1/4W ± 5%
X440164319
X440034940
X300146900
X300102009
X302374600
X175400207
SEIPS
01
DB 1
F1
T1
2SC3831
D3SBA40
ULTSC 2.0A-N 1
PT-P68A-NF
Transistor 500V 10A
Diode Bridge 400V 4.0A
Fuse 125V 2.0A
Transformer
X302383100
X340330120
X502061011
Y567204003
SANPSE
01
DB1
F1
2SC3460
RBV-406
BET 1.25A
PT-P68E-NF
Transistor 800V 6A 100W
Diode Bridge 600V 4.0A
Fuse 1.25A 250V
Transformer
X302346000
X340400321
X502063040
Y567204002
SEIPS/
SANPSE
T1
5-9
REV.-A
Table 5-6. SIEPS/SANPSE Power Board Unit Repair
Problem
The printer
does not
operate at all.
Symptom
The +24V
line is dead.
Checkpoint
Cause
Solution
Transformer
coils are
open.
Measure the resistance of T1 transformer
coils.
4-3,6-2, 11-12.
Replace T1.
Q 1 is dead.
Check the voltage waveforms at Q 1
(collector).
Replace Q 1.
D" I'-
....
r-
l"-
.
t-
kl>l
>50 V
The voltage
on the +24V
line is below
normal.
Q3, IC1, PC1,
or ZD20 is
dead.
<20I.us
Check the voltage waveforms at Q3
(collector).
Replace Q3,
IC 1, PC 1, or
ZD20.
I
<20 }JS
>ZV
Q2 is dead.
Check the voltage waveforms at the Q2
(collector).
r-
lU.
.~
>'iN
5-10
11
J
L
J
J
I
10.0;
......
r
1I
Replace Q2.
I
L1 IJU. J
<20 ')JS
REV.-A
Table 5-6. SEIPS/SANPSE Power Board Unit Repair (Continued)
Problem
The printer
does not operate at all.
Symptom
The voltage
at +5V line
is dead.
Checkpoint
Cause
Solution
The +24V
line is dead.
Check the +24V line.
IC20 is dead.
Check the oscillation waveform and the
switching waveform.
,
~
" /
J
/
V
1
J
J
V V
Ij
A
" V/
/
V
Ij
>1V
Replace IC20.
<20 ~s
Oscillation Waveform (IC20, 5Pin)
:
<J,
......
w
>10
r
:(
'r
~
~U.
rv
<10 IJJS
Switching Waveform (IC20, 8Pin)
020 or 021
is dead.
Check the switching waveform.
-!""""
Replace
either 020 or
021.
........
>10 V
020, Collector
5-11
>2 )JS
REV.-A
Table 5-6 SEIPS/SANPSE Power Supply Unit Repair (Continued)
Problem
Symptom
Cause
The printer
does not
operate at all.
The voltage
on the ± 12V
line is dead.
The +24V
power supply
circuit is
dead.
Check the +24V line.
Fuse resistor
R31 or R32
is open.
Measure the resistance values of R31 and
R32.
Replace
either R31 or
R32.
Transformer
coils are
open.
Measure the resistances of transformer coils
7-8,8-11.
Replace T1.
Checkpoint
5-12
Solution
REV.-A
5.4 DIAGNOSTICS TOOL
This section describes how to use the tool and explains its functions.
5.4.1 Overview
Epson supplies this diagnostic ROM cartridge as a tool for repair and analysis of the 50-2550/850.
With this tool, the 50-2550/850 can be repaired very easily.
Because the tool consists simply of the single ROM cartridge, handling is also very easy.
5.4.2 Description
The diagnostic ROM cartridge tool consists of the following items:
• ROM cartridge (27256 ROM)
•
Operation manual
5.4.3 How to setup
Check that the printer power is off, then insert the diagnostic cartridge in the printer's option slot A.
< Printer>
I ROM
cartridge
I
---'Jo
Option
slot A
5.4.4 Functions and use of diagnostic ROM
This ROM is equipped with 36 diagnostic modes, which can be selected and executed using the LCD
panel and 10 switches.
a)
Power-on
If power is turned on with the diagnostic ROM installed, the CPU first lights the READY LEDs on
the control panel.
This indicates that the CPU is operating. If the READY LEDs do not turn on, the CPU is not operating
so check the clock signal (IC 1OC pins 2 and 3), Vx voltage 02 collector), reset signal (IC8B pin 47),
and ROM select signals (IC 11 D pins 3 and 11).
Power LED turns on
+ 5V
READY LED turns on
Indicates that The CPU is working.
supply to the circuit.
RAM check start
5-13
REV.-A
Next, the CPU starts the RAM check.
The diagnostic ROM performs three types of RAM tests: a read/write check, an address check, and a
refresh check, and if an error occurs the LCD panel displays the location of the IC containing the error.
If the CPU finds an error, it will be indicated on the display as follows:
For the backup RAM (IC 13C), the CPU checks only the RAM area used for the input buffer and the system
area.
In the case of an error on IC 11 B only:
I RAMO( 1 1B)
RD/WR ERR.
I
Replace RAM chip IC 11 B.
RAMO( 11 B) ADDR. ERR.
Replace RAM chip IC 11 B.
RAMO( 11 B) REF. ERROR
Replace RAM chip IC 11 B or IC8B.
In case of an error on IC 13C only:
[ RAM 1(1 3C) RD/WR ERR.
I
Replace IC 13C.
I
I
Replace IC 13C.
RAM 1(13C) ADDR. ERR.
In case of errors on both IC 11 Band IC 13C:
The READY LED blinks on/off.
Replace IC 11 C and IC8B.
When the RAM check finishes, the buzzer eill sound.
After the above diagnostic operation is finished, the following message will be displayed on the LCD
panel.
RAM CHECK FINISHED!
Diagnostic ROM(X.OO)
The RAMs are normal.
ROM version is displayed.
Then the mode selection screen is displayed on the LCD panel.
FF:dwn LF:up L/E:set
Mode selection screen displayed.
5-14
REV.-A
b)
Mode selection
The following screen is displayed to explain how to select a mode.
FF:dwn LF:up L/E:set
Mode selection screen.
'LF'(line feed) key proceeds to the next diagnostic mode.
'FF'(form feed) key returns to the previous diagnostic mode.
'L/E'(load/eject) key executes the selected diagnostic mode.
The 'LF' and 'FF' keys are used to select the 36 diagnostic modes, and the 'LIE' key executes it.
The modes available for this ROM are shown below:
00: Boot (RAM check)
13: C . S . F sensor
26: TE motor dr ive
01: Switch check
14:CR encoder check
27: TE phase HI/LO
02: LCD(LCDC) check
15:CR position reg.
28: CR motor check
03: Panel LED check
16: Re lease sensor
29: Valve plug on/off
04:Prog. ROM check
17: Buzzer check
30: Pump motor drive
05:CGO/l0B ROM check
18:Bsy,Ack,Pe.Er H/L
31: All head ON/OFF
06:CG1/13B ROM check
19:At.Sin,P/S.lnt RD
32: EEPROM check
07: Case open sensor
20: Parallel data RD
33: 146H timer check
08: HP sensor
21: RS-232C loop back
34: Rotator check
09: Ink cart. sensor
22: PF motor drive
35: Head refresh
10: Ink end sensor
23: PF phase HI/LO
36: EEPROM Edit
11: PE sensor
24:Trig. plug on/off
12: TE sensor
25: CHANGE FR./TR.
5-15
REV.-A
00: Boot(RAM check)
Select this mode to check the RAM. When this mode is selected, the CPU resets the external system.
01: Switch check
Select this mode to check the switches on the control panel. When a switch is pressed, the name of
the switch is displayed on the LCD panel. To exit this mode, press the ON-LINE switch.
02: LCD(LCDC) check
Select this mode to check the functions of the LCD controller (LCDC) mounted on the control panel
board. All the characters that are defined in the LCDC are displayed.
To exit this mode, press the ON-LINE switch.
03: Panel LED check
When this mode is selected, all the LEDs on the control panel blink. To exit this mode, press the ON-LINE
switch. Note that the POWER LED does not turn off.
04: Program ROM check
Use this mode to check the ROM in the diagnostic ROM cartridge.
When this is selected, the read address and data from the ROM is displayed on the LCD.
When the checksum is displayed at the end of this check, compare it with the correct value. They should
both match.
To exit this mode, press the ON-LINE switch.
IAD=xxxx
BK=OO DT=xx I
AD : read address
BK : bank number(ln this mode, BK is always 00)
DT : read data
05: CGO/10B ROM check
Use this mode to check the CG ROM (IC 1OB).
When this is selected, a menu is displayed for selecting the CGROM capacity as follows;
Select CG ROM size
FF:up LF:down L/E:set
Switch explanation.
CG ROM size = 4M bit
Select CGROM size (256K, 1M,2MAM bit)
Select the CGROM size (256K, 1M,2MAM) by pressing 'FF or 'LF, and press 'LIE' to start the check.
The address and data read from the CGROM are displayed on the LCD.
When the checksum is displayed at the end of the check, compare it with the correct value.
To exit this mode, press the ON-LINE switch.
5-16
REV.-A
AD=xxxx BK=OO DT=xx
AD : read address
BK : bank number (In this mode, BK ranges from 00 to 3Fh)
DT : read data
06: CG1/13B ROM check
Use this mode to check the CG ROM (IC 13B).
When this is selected, a menu is displayed for selecting the CGROM capacity as follows;
Select CG ROM size
FF:up LF:down L/E:set
Switch explanation.
CG ROM size= 1M bit
Select CGROM size (256K, 1M,2MAM bit)
Select the CGROM size (256K,1 M,2MAM) by pressing 'FF' or 'LF', and press 'LIE' to start the check.
The address and data read from the CGROM are displayed on the LCD.
When the checksum is displayed at the end of the check, compare it with the correct value.
To exit this mode, press the ON-LINE switch.
AD=xxxx BK=OO DT=xx
AD : read address
BK : bank number (In this mode, BK ranges from 40H to 7FH)
DT : read data
07: Case open sensor
Select this mode to check the case open sensor. The state of the case open sensor is displayed on the
LCD panel. Check case open sensor by operating it manually (i.e. open and close the printer cover ).
To exit this mode, press the ON-LINE switch.
08: HP sensor
Select this mode to check the home position sensor. The state of the home position sensor is displayed
on the LCD panel. Check the home position sensor by operating it manually (i.e. move the carriage in
front of the home position sensor).
To exit this mode, press the ON-LINE switch.
If a problem can not be corrected by replacing the home position sensor, replace IC4B (G.A.).
5-17
REV.-A
09: Ink cartridge sensor
Select this mode to check the ink cartridge sensor. The state of the ink cartridge sensor is displayed
on the LCD panel. Check the ink cartridge sensor by operating it manually (i.e. install and remove the
ink cartridge in the ink cartridge holder).
To exit this mode, press the ON-LINE switch.
If a problem can not be corrected by replacing the ink cartridge sensor, replace IC6B (G.A.).
10: Ink end sensor
Select this mode to check the ink end sensor. The state of the ink end sensor is displayed on the LCD
panel. Check that the ink end sensor by operating it manually (i.e. move the ink end sensor using your
hand).
To exit this mode, press the ON-LINE switch.
If a problem can not be corrected by replacing the ink end sensor, replace IC6B (G.A.).
11: PE sensor
Select this modes to check the paper end sensor. The state of the paper end sensor is displayed on
the LCD panel. Check the paper end sensor by operating it manually (i.e. move the paper in front of
the paper end sensor).
To exit this mode, press the ON-LINE switch.
If a problem can not be corrected by replacing the paper end sensor, please replace IC6B (G.A.).
12: TE sensor
Select this mode to check the paper sensor. The state of the paper sensor is displayed on the LCD panel.
Check the paper sensor by operating it manually (i.e. move the paper in front of the sensor).
To exit this mode, press the ON-LINE switch.
If a problem can not be corrected by replacing the paper exist sensor, replace IC6B (G.A.).
13: CSF sensor
Select this mode to check the CSF sensor. The state of the CSF sensor is displayed on the LCD panel.
Check the CSF sensor by operating it manually (i.e. move the CSF sensor usin your hand).
To exit this mode, press the ON-LINE switch.
If a problem can not be corrected by replacing the C.S.F sensor, replace IC6B (G.A.).
14: CR encoder check
Select this mode to check the CR encoder. The state of the CR encoder and CR moving direction are
displayed on the LCD panel. Check the CR encoder signal and CR direction detection circuit in IC4B
by moving thecarriage with your hand).
To exit this mode, press the ON-LINE switch.
If a problem can not be corrected by replacing the carriage motor, replace IC4B (G.A.).
I ENA=H
ENB=L dir=CW
I
ENA: CR encoder A signal
ENB : CR encoder B signal
dir
: CR direction CW
: to the right
CCW : to the left
5-18
REV.-A
15: CR position regulator
Select this mode to check the CR position register in IC4B (GA).
The register value in IC4B is displayed on the LCD panel in hexadecimal format.
Select this mode after checking modes '08' and '14'.
Check the CR position register in IC4B by moving the carriage with your hand).
To exit this mode, press the ON-LINE switch.
If a problem can not be corrected by replacing the carriage motor, replace IC4B (G.A.).
The CR position register is reset by the home position signal and it is incremented by moving the carriage
to the right.
16: Release sensor
Select this mode to check the release sensor. The state of the release sensor is displayed on the LCD
panel. Check the release sensor operates normally by operating it manually (i.e. move the release sensor
with your hand).
To exit this mode, press the ON-LINE switch.
If a problem can not be corrected by replacing the C.S.F sensor, replace IC 12C (G.A.).
17: Buzzer check
Select this mode to check the buzzer drive circuit. When this mode is selected, the buzzer drive circuit
is activated.
To exit this mode, press the ON-LINE switch.
18: Bsy,Ack,Pe,Er H/L
Select this mode to check the operation of the control signal output lines on the parallel interface.
When this mode is selected, the PE, ERROR, BUSY and ACK signal lines change between HIGH and
LOW at a constant rate so that the operation of each line can be checked easily.
To exit this mode, press the ON-LINE switch.
19: A t,Sin,P/5,1 nt RD
Select this mode to check the operation of the control signal input lines on the parallel interface.
When this mode is selected, the AUTOFEED-XT, SELECT-IN, PIS (PARALLEL/SERIAL), and INIT signals
lines are displayed on the LCD panel so that operation of each line can be checked easily.
To exit this mode, press the ON-LINE switch.
20: Parallel data RD
Select this mode to check the parallel interface.
When this mode is selected, data input through the parallel interface is displayed on the LCD panel
in hexadecimal.
To exit this mode, press the ON-LINE switch.
21: RS-232C loop back
Select this mode to check the operation of the RS-232C serial interface.
Connect the RxD and TxD terminals on the serial interface connector using a jumper.
In this mode, the LCD displays the followint:
5-19
REV.-A
I
Select RS interface.
[
LF:8143 FF:lnternal
LF key: select #8143 (optional serial interface)
FF key: select internal serial interface as standard.
This mode starts a loop back test.
In this mode, the printer itself outputs serial data, receives the data, and checks if communication is
normal.
The data transmitted and received are displayed on the LCD.
If transmission or reception cannot be executed, press any switch. The LCD displays which is not
working, transmission or reception.
In this mode, operation at 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, and 19200 BPS is tested.
22: PF motor drive
Select this mode to drive the paper feed motor.
In this mode, the following displays appear on the LCD:
LF:speed L/E:start
IMODE=O COUNTER= 10001
LF: Select the paper feed speed (mode).
L/E:Execute paper feed.
COUNTER: Step value of paper feed motor.
Press the ON-LINE switch during paper feeding to stop the paper feed motor.
Press the ON-LINE switch again to exit this mode.
23: PF phase HI/LO
Whe thal the waveforms from IC2A and IC3B for the paper feed motor can be easily observed.
To exit this mode, press the ON-LINE switch.
24: Trig. plug on/off
Use this mode to check the operation of the release trigger plunger.
When this mode is selected, the plunger is driven (turned on or off).
Check that operation is normal by listening to the sound made by the plunger.
LF-+ON, FF-+END
LF: Trigger plunger ON
FF: Exit this mode
5-20
REV.-A
25: Change FR./TR.
When this mode is selected, the release/friction function is driven.
Before entering this mode, please check modes' 16':23' and '24'.
Press the ON-LINE switch to exit this mode, or when an error occurs.
An error is indicated when the paper feed motor is stepped, but the state of the release sensor does
not change.
26: TE motor drive
Select this modes to drive the TE motor.
The TE motor is driven CW for 160 steps and CCW for 160 steps.
To exit this mode, press the ON-LINE switch.
27: TE phase HI/LO
When this mode is selected, IC2A (GA) outputs the phase signals A to D for the TE motor at a constant
rate under the holding voltage (+5V).
Using this mode, the waveforms of IC2A and Q 11 to Q 14 for the TE motor drive circuit can be easily
observed.
To exit this mode, press the ON-LINE switch.
28: CR motor check
Select this mode to drive the carriage motor.
In this mode, the carriage speed selection menu is displayed on the LCD as follows:
F:speed L/E:start
speed=O L/E:start
LF: Select CR speed (mode)
L/E: Drive the CR motor
Press the ON-LINE switch during while the CR motor to stop it.
Press ONLlNE switch again to exit this mode.
NOTE: This mode can not detect carriage errors.
29: Valve plug on/off
Use this mode to check the operation of the valve plunger.
When this mode is selected, the plunger is driven (turned on or off).
Check that operation is normal by listening to the sound made by the plunger.
To exit this mode, press the ON-LINE switch.
LF---+ON, FF---+END
LF: Valve plunger ON
FF: Exit this mode
5-21
REV.-A
30: Pump motor drive
Select this mode to drive the pump motor.
When this mode is entered, the LCD panel displays the following menu for selecting the carriage speed.
I LF---*CW(CL)
FF---*CCW(OP)
I
LF: drive pump motor CW(Cap close)
FF: drive pump motor CCW(Cap open)
The pump motor is driven while the panel switches are pressed.
To exit this mode, press the ON-LINE switch.
Note that the valve plunger is always open in this mode.
31: All head ON/OFF
When this mode is selected, IC6B (GA) outputs head data at a constant rate.
Using this mode, the waveforms from IC6B and IC5C to 7C in the head drive circuit can be easily
observed.
To exit this mode, press the ON-LINE switch.
Note that the PTS signal from IC4B is not used in this mode. The head drive timing is performed by
the CPU internally.
32: EEPROM check
Select this mode to check the EEPROM on the control panel unit.
This mode performs two tests: a read/write check and an address check.
This EEPROM stores very important data for the mechanism.
In this test, ifthe CPU does not detect an error in the EEPROM, the current data is restored to the EEPROM,
so do not turn the printer power off until the test is completely finished.
33: 146H timer check
Select this mode to check the 146 hour hardware timer.
When this mode is selected, the LCD displays the following:
LF:Rst. TIMER=xxxxxx
I
LF : This key resets the timer.
xxxxx : Current state of timer
OVER: over 146h
WITHIN: within 146h
If the timer indicate 'over 146h', please press the LF key to reset the timer.
If LCD screen changes from 'OVER' to 'WITHIN' then the timer circuit is normal.
In this mode, CPU pin 42 can be switched between HIGH and LOW from the control panel, so operation
of the timer reset circuit can be easily checked.
To exit this mode, press the ON-LINE switch.
5-22
REV.-A
34: Rotator check
Select this mode to check the rotator in the ICSB gate array.
This gate array has the following functions:
VERTICAL--HORIZONTAL
S X S-bit vertical-horizontal change function
HALF PROTECT
24-bit half-protection function
Triple
Tripled data function
Doubled data function
Double
MSB
~
LSB
Exchange msb and Isb.
If an error is found 'ICSB error' is displayed.
To exit this mode, press the ON-LINE switch.
35: Head refresh
Select this mode to execute a head cleaning or to drain the ink from the printer mechanism. When this
mode is selected, the LCD displays the following:
LF:clean FF:charge
LF: same as cleaning operation (same as pressing the cleaning switch)
FF: same as charging operation (same as pressing cleaning switch while turning power
on)
If the LF key is pressed:
The LCD panel displays the following to select loop time:
LF:No. FF:Start
Loop=OO FF:Start
LF: select loop Number.
FF: start
If the FF key is pressed:
Performs one ink charge.
36: EEPROM check
This mode is used to check or edit the data in the EEPROM. The EEPROM stores following data.
Bi-directional printing position adjustment value
TE motor adjustment value
Column width setting flag
5-23
REV.-A
When this mode is selected, the LCD panel displays the data in the EEPROM.
L/E:Edit FF:NEXT
UE switch: Press this switch to enter the editing mode.
FF switch: Press this switch to display the next byte of data.
ADD=OOH DATA=01
ADD: address
DATA: data in the EEPROM
When the UE switch is pressed, the display is as follows:
ON:Next FF:+ 1 LF:-1
ON (ON-LINE) switch: Press this switch to exit the editing mode and display the next
byte of data.
FF switch: Increment the data in the EEPROM
LF switch: Decrement the data in the EEPROM
I ADD=OOH E DATA=01 I
E: Indicates the editing mode.
After exiting the editing mode, press the ON-LINE switch to exit this mode.
The data in the EEPROM is as follows:
ADDRESS
00
DATA01H
; EEPROM ID (01 :Standard Format)
ADDRESS
01
DATA xx
; CR Bi-D in 120DPI
ADDRESS
02
DATA xx
ADDRESS
03
DATA xx
ADDRESS
04
DATA xx
ADDRESS
05
DATA xx
ADDRESS
06
DATA xx
ADDRESS
07
DATA xx
ADDRESS
08
DATA xx
ADDRESS
09
DATA xx
ADDRESS
OA
DATA xx
ADDRESS
OB
DATA xx
ADDRESS
OC
DATA xx
ADDRESS
OD
DATA xx
L~R
L+-R
180DPI
L~R
L+-R
240DPI
L~R
L+-R
360DPI
L~R
L+-R
; Head Bi-D 120DPI
L~R
L+-R
180DPI
L~R
L+-R
240DPI
5-24
L~R
REV.-A
ADDRESS
OE
DATA xx
; Head Bi-D 240DPI L-+-R
ADDRESS
OF
DATA xx
360DPI L--+R
ADDRESS
10
DATA xx
L-+-R
ADDRESS
11
DATA xx
; TE Motor Position Adjust
ADDRESS
12
DATA xx
; Country Setting
ADDRESS
13
DATA xx
; Other Setting
; bit 2 : Ink charge Finish (1)
1 : Japan (1 )/World (0)
o:
136 (1)/80 (0)
ADDRESS
14
DATA OOH
; reserved
ADDRESS
15
DATA OOH
; reserved
ADDRESS
16
DATA OOH
; reserved
ADDRESS
17
DATA OOH
; reserved
ADDRESS
18
DATA OOH
; reserved
ADDRESS
19
DATA OOH
; reserved
ADDRESS
1A
DATA OOH
; reserved
ADDRESS
1B
DATA OOH
; reserved
ADDRESS
1C
DATA OOH
; reserved
ADDRESS
1D
DATA OOH
; reserved
ADDRESS
1E
DATA OOH
; reserved
ADDRESS
1F
DATA OOH
; reserved
ADDRESS
20
DATA OOH
; CHECK SUM
5-25
REV.-A
REV.-A
CHAPTER 6
MAINTENANCE
6.1
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
6.2
LUBRICATION AND
ADHESIVE APPLICATION
6-1
6-1
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 6-1. Correct Adhesive Application
6-2
Figure 6-2. Lubrication Points Diagram 1
6-2
Figure 6-3. Lubrication Points Diagram 2
6-3
Figure 6-4. Lubrication Points Diagram 3
6-4
Figure 6-5. Lubrication Points Diagram 4
6-6
Figure 6-6. Adhesive Points Diagram
6-7
LIST OF TABLES
Table 6-1. Lubricants and Adhesive
6-1
Table 6-1. Lubrication Points
6-1
Table 6-2. Adhesive Application Points
6-2
6-j
REV.-A
6.1 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Proper maintenance is essential to assuring optimal and long-term printer performance and to minimize
malfunction frequency.
The case exterior should be regularly cleaned with alcohol. Vacuum cleaning should be occasionally
applied to the mechanism's interior to remove accumulated dust and paper particles.
After the unit has been cleaned, check that it is adequately lubricated (refer to section 6.2, immediately
below). 8efore returning the printer to the customer, inspect the springs, paper-feed rollers, and the
basic operation of the unit.
WARNING
8e sure to disconnect the printer from the power supply before maintenance. Do not apply
thinner, trichloroethylene, or ketone-based solvents to any of the printer's plastic components.
6.2 LUBRICATION AND ADHESIVE APPLICATION
EPSON recommends lubrication at the points illustrated in Figure 6-2 through 6-5. Table 6-2 provides
a list of these points, and the recommended lubricant to be used for each. The lubricants--EPSON 0-2,
and EPSON G-14---have all been thoroughly tested and fUlly meet the needs of this printer. (Table 6-1
lists details of these lubricants.)
8efore applying any lubricant, make sure that the part to be lubricated is clean. Do not apply excess
lubrication, as this could potentially cause damage.
Following its disassembly or replacement, adhesive must be applied to the part indicated in Table 6-3.
EPSON recommends application of Neji lock #2 (G) adhesive to the point illustrated in Figure 6-1. When
applying the adhesive, be careful that no excess overflows onto nearby parts.
Table 6-1. Lubrication and Adhesive
Type
Name
Capacity
Availability
Part No.
Oil
0-2
40cc
®
8710200001
Grease
G-14
40gm
®
8701400001
Adhesive
Neji lock #2 (G)
®
8730200200
®:EPSON-exclusive product
Figure 6-1. Correct Adhesive Application
6-1
REV.-A
Table 6-2. Lubrication Points (Refer to Figures 6-2 to 6-5)
Ref. No.
Lubrication Points
Lubricant
Fig. No.
(1)
Release lever shaft (1/3 of the way from the end)
G-14
6-2
(2)
Tractor transmission gear shaft (1/3 of the way from the end)
G-14
6-2
(3)
Movement portion of release lever and tractor
transmission gear
G-14
6-2
(4)
Paper feed reduction gear holder
(1/3 of the way from the end)
G-14
6-2
(5)
1/4 perimeter of paper feed reduction gear
G-14
6-2
(6)
Top edge holding transmission gear shaft
(1/3 of the way from the end)
G-14
6-2
(7)
1/4 perimeter of top edge holding transmission gear
G-14
6-2
(8)
Platen shaft holder (R and L)
G-14
6-2
(9)
Paper
•
•
•
•
G-14
6-3
feed lever shaft (following points)
Portion contacting the base frame (Two points)
Portion contacting the right frame
Portion contacting the release lever
Paper feed lever shaft support portion of the base frame
(10)
Top of the self-aligning bearing of the
paper feed lever (four points)
G-14
6-3
(1 1)
Platen unit and paper guide plate set stopper (two points)
G-14
6-2
(12)
1/4 perimeter of platen gear, 1/4 center gear
G-14
6-2
( 13)
Paper feed transmission gear shaft
(1/3 of the way from the end)
G-14
6-2
(14)
1/4 perimeter of paper feed
G-14
6-2
(1 5)
1/4 perimeter of tractor transmission gear
G-14
6-2
(16)
1/4 gear perimeter of top edge holding transmission
shaft set (Both left and right sides)
G-14
6-2
(17)
Portion of the shaft contacting frames M and R of
eject paper guide board (Two points)
G-14
6-2
( 18)
Felt portion of carriage shaft holder (Three points)
0-2
6-2
(19)
Points of contact between release pin and release roller
G-14
6-4
(20)
Points of contact paper feed lever shaft and
paper feed lever spring (Four points)
G-14
6-4
(21)
Points of contact between paper feed roller and
paper feed roller holder (Four points)
G-14
6-2, 6-4
(22)
Engaging portion of the clutch cam and clutch spring of
the pump unit (two points)
G-14
6-5
(23)
Pump unit cam follower (Lubricate before installation)
G-14
6-5
6-2
REV.-A
Lubrication Points
Ref. No.
(24)
Pump
•
•
•
•
•
unit (Contact points of following parts)
Pump motor cam follower and pump transmission gear
Pump drive gear and pump transmission gear
Cleaner drive gear and cleaner transmission gear
Cleaner planetary gear and cleaner transmission gear
Cleaner driven gear of cleaner set and cleaner
transmission gear
Lubricant
Fig. No.
G-14
6-5
(25)
Pin follower of pump set (two points)
G-14
6-5
(26)
Bellows set shaft of pump set (two points)
G-14
6-5
(27)
Contact portion of the gear and disc spring of the cleaner
planetary gear set (Total four points)
G-14
6-5
6-3
REV.-A
Table 6-3 Adhesive Application Points (Refer to Figure 6-6)
Ref. No.
Adhesive Application Points
Point Quantity
( 1)
Set screw CB(M2.5X3) for top edge holder board
2
(2)
Set screw CB(M2.5X4) for Top edge sensor board set
(screw threads)
1
(3)
Set screw CP(P)(M3X8) for CSF sensor (screw head)
1
(4)
Lock screw SCP(P)(M3X6, M3X 12) for head unit
2
(5)
Top edge sensor holder shaft center holder cutout
1
(6)
Lock screw CS(M3X 14) for cable clip contacted to CN8
1
(7)
Set screw CS(M2X 10) for trigger solenoid release sensor
1
(8)
Set screw CS(M3X 12) for carriage belt holder
1
(9)
Set screw CS(M3X5) for pump set
2
(10)
Set screw CS(M2X6) for pump lid
4
(1 1)
Lock screws CBS(M3X6) for Land R platen shaft holders
(1/4 perimeter of screw head)
2
6-4
REV.-A
Figure 6-2. Lubrication Points O'l agram - 1
6-5
REV.-A
(10)
Figure 6-3. Lubrication Points Diagram - 2
( 21)
4
~
(21~
Lf"
~./
~
..
(19)
~!
Figure 6-4. Lubrication Points Diagram - 3
Figure 6-5. Lubrication Points Diagram - 4
6-6
REV.-A
Pomts
.
"
0"lagram
F"Igure 6-6. Adh eSlve
6-7
REV.-A
APPENDIX
A.1 PRIMARY IC SPECIFICATIONS
A.1.1 SEIMA Board
A-1
A-1
A.1.1.1
HD64180
A-2
A.1.1.2
E05A09BA
A-6
A.1.1.3
E05A21 AA
A-8
A.1.1.4
E05A22EA
A-11
A.1.1.5
E05A24GA
A-14
A.1.1.6
E05A23GC
A-17
A.1.1.7
SLA4390
A-20
A.1.1.8
SLA7020M
A-21
A.1.1.9
TL494CN
A-22
A.1.1.10 L5431-AA
A-23
A.1.1.11 MN6275AS
A-24
A.1.1.12 HD74HC292P
A-25
A.1.2 SEIPS/SANPSE Board
A-26
A.2 DIAGRAMS AND SCHEMATICS
A-27
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure A-1.
HD64180 Pin Diagram
A-2
Figure A-2.
HD64180 Block Diagram
A-3
Figure A-3.
OP Code Fetch Timing
A-5
Figure A-4.
Memory Data Read/Write Timing
A-5
Figure A-5.
E05A09BA Pin Diagram
A-6
Figure A-6.
E05A09BA Block Diagram
A-6
Figure A-7.
E05A21AA Memory Map
A-7
Figure A-8.
E05A21 AA Pin Diagram
A-9
Figure A-9.
E05A22EA Pin Diagram
A-11
Figure A-10. E05A24GA Pin Diagram
A-14
Figure A-11. E05A24GA Block Diagram
A-14
Figure A-12. E05A23GC Pin Diagram
A-17
Figure A-13. SLA4390 Case Outline Drawing
A-20
Figure A-14. SLA4390 Functional Equivalent Circuit
A-20
Figure A-15. SLA7020M Case Outline Drawing
A-21
Figure A-16. SLA7020M Functional Equivalent Circuit
A-21
Figure A-17. TL494 Block Diagram
A-22
A-i
REV.-A
Figure A-18. L5431-AA Pin Diagram
A-23
Figure A-19. L5431-AA Internal Circuit
A-23
Figure A-20. MN6275AS Pin Assignment
A-24
Figure A-21. MN6275AS Block Diagram
A-24
Figure A-22. HD74HC292 Block Diagram
A-25
Figure A-23. SEIPS Board Component Layout
A-27
Figure A-24. SEIPS Board Circuit Diagram
A-28
Figure A-25. SANPSE Board Component Layout
A-29
Figure A-26. SANPSE Board Circuit Diagram
A-30
Figure A-27. SEIPNL-W Board Circuit Diagram
A-31
Figure A-28. SEIMA Board Component Layout
A-32
Figure A-29. SEIMA Board Circuit Diagram
A-33
Figure A-30. SQ-850 Exploded Diagram
A-34
Figure A-31. SO-2550 Exploded Diagram
A-35
Figure A-32. Model-4410 Printer Mechanism Exploded Diagram A-36
Figure A-33. Model-4460 Printer Mechanism Exploded Diagram A-37
Figure A-34. SQ-850 External Dimension Diagram
A-39
Figure A-35. SO-2550 External Dimension Diagram
A-40
LIST OF TABLES
Table A-1.
SEIMA Board Primary ICs
A-1
Table A-2.
HD64180 Terminal Functions
A-4
Table A-3.
E05A09BA Terminal Functions
A-7
Table A-4.
E05A21 AA Terminal Functions
A-10
Table A-5.
E05A22EA Terminal Functions
A-12
Table A-6.
E05A24GA Terminal Functions
A-15
Table A-7.
E05A23GC Terminal Functions
A-18
Table A-8.
HD74HC292P Function Table
A-25
Table A-9.
SEIPS/SANPSE Board Primary ICs
A-26
Table A-10. Parts Name Reference Table
A-ii
A-38
REV.-A
A.l PRIMARY IC SPECIFICATIONS
This chapter describes the primary ICs used in this printer.
A.l.l SEIMA Board
Table A-1 shows the primary ICs used on the SEIMA board.
Table A-1. SEIMA Board Primary ICs
Location
10C
2A
8B
6B
12C
4B
1D
3B
5C,6C,7C
3C
2D
BT1
13E
13D
11 C
11 D
9A
8A
Name
HD64180R1P10
E05A09BA
E05A21AA
E05A22EA
E05A24GA
E05A23GC
SLA4390
SLA7020M
LZ1008AD
TL494CN
L5431-AA
CR 17335SE-FT1
MN6275A
HD74HC292P
74LSOO
74LS32
SN75188N
SN75189N
Description
CPU
MCU
MMU
PHC
PIF
DCU
HIC
HIC
FET array
PWM controler
Adjustable presision shant regurator
Litium battery
C-MOS
C-MOS
TTL
TTL
Quad line transmitter
Quad line receiver
A-1
REV.-A
A.1.1.1 HD64180
The HD64180 is an 8-bit one-chip CPU, and is software compatible with model Z-80 and higher models.
The chip includes a DMA controller (DMAC), asynchronous serial communication interface (ASCI) (2
channels), serial I/O port, and timers (one with internal and one with external output), in addition to
the CPU.
The main features are as follows:
• MMU: 512K-byte physical address space
• DMAC (2 channels): High speed data transfer between memories (including memory mapped I/O)
• ASCI (2 channels): Start-stop asynchronous system (full duplex) SCI modem control signals
• CS I/O port (1 channel): Serial to parallel conversion shift register
•
16-bit timer (2 channels): Pulse output function
• Interrupts: Internal (4), external (8)
• Bus I/F: 80 CPU-line bus I/F
• Dynamic RAM refresh controller: Programmable refresh interval
•
Low speed memory input/output I/F: Programmable number of weight states
•
Built-in clock oscillator circuit
• CMOS
Figures A-1 and A-2 show the pin diagram and internal block diagram. Table A-2 shows the terminal
functions.
Vss
XTAL
EXTAL
WAIT
o
BUSACK
BUSREQ
RESET
NMI
INTo
INi~
INT,
ST
Figure A-1. HD64180 Pin Diagram
A-2
REV.-A
o
~
o
a:
U)
W
«
:::>
3
co
CO
1
-
1
1
r
r
1
11
1 1
r
Bus State Control
Timing
Generator
~r-
IWa:u-
W
1-~
1~ I-I
~ ~'"
0
I III 1 1TT
I
Interrupt
CPU
p
16-bit
!/
Programmable',",
Ala/ TOUT -...- Reload Timers
(2)
U)t-
:0I
'\
(!)
~
DMACs
-
....
:0I
I'..
f--DREQl
I---TENDl
(2)
(2.
m
m
CO
CO
::l
::l
m
m
TXS- I RXS /CTS1-
~
Clocked
Serial I/O
Port
t'il
a;
~
I'..
I--TXAo
0
"0
"0
~ J:CKAoIDREQo
«
CKS- I-
"----./
Asynchronous
SCI
(channel 0)
!--RXAo
-RTSo
Ioo-CTSo
Ioo-DCDo
"MMU
V
/
V
II
I-- TXAl
Asynchronous
SCI
(channel 1)
Ioo~ CKA1/TENDo
I--- RXA1
'\
I-
l".)
Address
Buffer
-U
Data
Buffer
0
Figure A-2. HD64180 Block Diagram
A-3
-Vcc
- Vss
REV.-A
Table A-2. HD64180 Terminal Functions
Pin No.
Terminal
I/O
32
1,33
Vcc
Vss
I
+5 VDC
GND
2
3
XTAL
EXTAL
I
I
External oscillator (12.2 MHz)
64
<P
0
Pulled up
7
RESET
I
Reset signal
13-31
AO-A 18
0
Address bus (19-bit, 512K-byte)
34-41
DO-D7
I/O
Data bus (8-bit)
63
62
59
RD
WR
ME
0
0
0
Read pulse
Write pulse
Memory enable
-
-
Description
58
4
10E
WAIT
0
I
Pulled up
Pulled up
60
E
0
Enable (synchronous clock)
6
5
58
61
12
BUSREO
BUSACK
HALT
L1R
ST
I
0
0
0
0
Pulled
Pulled
Pulled
Pulled
Pulled
0
Refresh signal
I
I
I
Pulled down
Pulled up
Pulled up
INT2
I
Interrupt 2
47
54
55
45
46
DREOO
DRE01
TEND1
TXAO
RXAO
I
I
0
0
I
Data request signal
Pulled up
Pulled up
Pulled up
Pulled up
42
43
RTSO
CTSO
0
I
SCI channel 0 RTS
SCI channel 0 CTS
44
DCDO
I
Pulled down
48
49
TXA1
RXA1
0
I
SCI channel 1
SCI channel 1
50
CKA1
110
Pulled up
51
52
53
TXS
RXS
CKS
0
I
110
CSO I/O TXD
CSO 110 RXD
CS I/O clock
57
8
9
10
11
-
REF
--
NMI
INTO
INn
--
up
up
up
up
up
A-4
Notes
REV.-A
CPU Timing
• Two oscillator cycles define one state.
• One machine cycle, such as OP (operational) code fetch or memory read/write, requires three states.
a) OP code fetch timing
During the first half of state n, the contents of the program counter (PC) are output on address bus
lines AO to A 18. During the latter half of state n, the ME and RD signals go active, and the memory
is accessed.
The OP codes on the data busses are fetched at the trailing clock of state T2.
The L1R signal goes active from the first half of state n to that of state T3, and indicates that this cycle
is an OP code fetch cycle.
I"
OP code fetch cycle
T1
Ao -
Al8
T2
==x
T3
07
Tl
!PC !
I
I
Do -
"I
T2
X
PC+ 1
I
,..1_ _---...,
- - - - - -.....
: --« OP code )>------1
I
--------~----------------------
~
I
---------------
1
!
I
\:
1
\.....__
I
\ :I
1
\
1....-._-
Figure A-3. OP Code Fetch Timing
b) Memory Data Read/Write Timing
The memory data access timing is different from the OP code fetch timing in the following points:
• The L1R signal does not go active.
• Read data is valid a half clock later, as comparing with the OP code fetch timing. (The data is fetched
at the trailing clock of state T3.)
For memory data write timing, the ME signal and WR signal are activated at the latter half of state n
and the first half of state T2, respectively, and the write data is output on DO to D7 from the latter half
of state n. The ME and WR signals go inactive in the latter half of state T3, and the write data remains
valid on the data bus unitl just before state T1 starts.
1·..__R_ea_d_c_ir_c_le_ _•.. I...•__w_r_it_e_c_ir..;..c1..;..e_ _..1....__
Tl
AO- A18
==x
1'3
12
Memory ;address:
I
DO- D7
Tl
I
------l!-«Read
_______
~
__
1'3
12
X ;Memor y: address
I
Tl
x==
I
?ato/--t-<~w:':"r-;'i;l:-te-d:-a~ta----">-~---L--~--------
------./ : \...-t---+-- / : '-------_.
\ : :1 :\ : I '-\
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
\
I
I
'--
1
Figure A·4. Memory Data Read/Write Timing
A-5
REV.-A
A.1.1.2 E05A09BA
The E05A09BA is a gate array used to separately control two 4-phase stepper motors.
POT 2
24
DO
23
CS
2
Voo
CO I
3
22
RSf
POT 0
4
21
TMI
POT
5
20
TM2
80 I
6
19
SCK
AO I
7
18
RCK
POT3
002
AD 0
8
17
AD I
9
16
AD 2
10
15
CO 2
AD 3
11
/4
802
Vss
12
13
A02
Figure A-5. E05A09BA Pin Diagram
09
09
OA
1-----.+--_ AO I
MOTOR I
I--+.---o..j PHASE
PULSES
GENERATOR
1-----.+--- 80 ,
1-----.+--- CO,
1-----.+--- DO
01
I
08
MOTOR 2
'i'ii'2
-+----o~
OA
03
AO 2
.-7----o~PHA~tLSESI----------IGATEI--I---GENERATOR
EN 1--1---.-
-------,
00 01020304 O!l 06 0708 09
I
L
MODE
ADDRESS
OA
DO 2
09
SELECTOR
DECODER
- ---+--+-+-+-+CS
802
C02
I
04
POT 0
O!l
1-----.+--- POT 1
06
1--+---
POT 2
07
1----1---.-
POT 3
I
AD3 AD2 AD' ADO SCK
RCK
RST
Figure A-6. E05A09BA Block Diagram
A-6
REV.-A
Table A-3. E05A09BA Terminal Functions
Pin
No.
Terminal
I/O
8
9
10
11
ADO
ADl
AD2
AD3
I
I
I
I
Address
Address
Address
Address
I
I
Motor synchronous pulse
Motor synchronous pulse
I
I
Read pulse
Write pulse
21
20
18
19
--
TMl
TM2
---
RCK
SCK
Description
bus
bus
bus
bus
0
1
2
3
---
4
5
POTO
--
POTl
0
0
---
1
POT2
--
0
Motor reference
#0 OFF/ON
Motor reference
#1 OFF/ON
Motor reference
#2 OFF/ON
Motor reference
#3 OFF/ON
POT3
0
7
6
3
2
AOl
801
COl
DOl
0
0
0
0
Motor
Motor
Motor
Motor
coil
coil
coil
coil
A
8
C
D
13
14
15
16
A02
802
CO2
D02
0
0
0
0
Motor
Motor
Motor
Motor
coil
coil
coil
coil
A
8
C
D
I
I
Reset signal
Chip select
I
+5 VDC
Ground
17
22
23
24
12
--
RST
CS
VDD
Vss
-
voltage
voltage
voltage
voltage
A-7
REV.-A
A.1.1.3 E05A21AA
•
Lower address latch, and out put
•
Bank latch output
•
Bit caluculation
• MMIO address decode, MMIO signal output
• Character genelator, PROM, RAM decode and chip enable signal output
• Select built-in PROM / external PROM
• Reset signal generator (power on reset / cartridge mount, dismount)
• ON LINE SW state reading
7FFFF
MMIO
7FDOO
l28K
RAM
60000
OOH-3FH 40H-1FH 80H-BFH COH-CFH DOH-DFH EOH-EFH FOH-FFH
(BANK)
40000
256K
CGO
CGl
KCG
KCGO
CAO
CAl
RAM
256KB 256KB 256KB 256KB 256KB 256KB 256KB
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
64
64
64
16
16
16
16
20000
EXTERNAL
PROGRAM
64K
INTERNAL
PROGRAM
64K
10000
00000
Figure A-7. E05A21AA Memory Map
A-8
REV.-A
1. P2(AD17)
64. MMIO 04
2. P 1(AD 18)
63. MMIO 03
3. PO(ADI9)
62. MMIO 02
4.
ITN
61. MMIO 01
5.
CAR2
60. MMIO 00
6.
CAR 1
59. PROE
7.
ROUT
58. PRO)
57. VDD(+5V)
8. VSS(GND)
9.
THLD
56. RAM
10.
DISC
55. CSBFO
11.
CPU
54.CSBEO
12.
MLT
53.CSBDO
13.
RD
52. CSBCO
14.
WR
51. CSB40
15.
ALE
50. CSBOO
16.
A 15
17.
A14
48. BANK
18.
A 13
47.BANK5
19.
A 12
46.BANK4
20.
A 11
45.BANK3
21.
AlO
44.BANK2
22.
A9
43. BANK 1
23.
A8
42.BANKO
E05A21AA
49. BNK80
24. VSS(GND)
41. A7
25.
AD7
40. VDD(+5V)
26.
AD6
39. A6
27.
AD5
38. A5
28.
AD4
37. A4
29.
AD3
36. A3
30.
AD2
35.A2
31.
AD1
34. Al
32.
ADO
33.AO
Figure A-S. E05A21 AA Pin Diagram
A-9
REV.-A
Table A-4. E05A21 AA Terminal Functions
Pin No.
1- 3
4
Terminal
I/O
P2(AD 17)PO(AD19)
I/O
-
Description
Address bus 17 - 19
IIN
-CAR2
I
ON LINE switch read (interrupt)
I
Cartridge install signal 2 (reset signal)
CAR1
I
Cartridge install signal 1 (reset signal)
ROUT
0
Power ON reset signal output
8
VSS(GND)
-
GND
9
10
THLD
DISC
I
0
Reset signal generator thleshold lebel input
Reset signal generator discharge control
11
12
CPU
MLT
I
I
CPU initialize signal
13
14
15
RD
WR
ALE
I
I
I
Read strobe
Write strobe
Address latch enable
16 - 23
A 15 - A8
I
Address bus 15 - 8
24
VSS(GND)
-
GND
25 - 32
AD7 -ADO
I/O
Multiplexed lower address bus 7 - 0 / data bus 7 - 0
33-39
AO-A6
I/O
Address bus 0 - 6
5
6
7
--
40
VDD(+5V)
41
A7 ,
42 -47
-
Power sourse
I/O
Address bus 7
BO- B5
0
Bank change signal 0 - 5
48
BANK
0
Bank signal for external CG board
49
BNK80
0
Bank signal for external CG board (KCG area)
50
51
52
53
54
55
CSBOO
CSB40
CSBCO
CSBDO
CSBEO
CSBFO
0
0
0
0
0
0
Decoded
Decoded
Decoded
Decoded
Decoded
Decoded
56
RAM
0
RAM bank change signal
57
VDD(+5V)
-
Power sourse
58
59
PROI
PROE
0
0
Internal program ROM enable signal
External program ROM enable signal
MMIO 00MMIO 04
0
Memory Mapped I/O signal
60- 64
Chip
Chip
Chip
Chip
Chip
Chip
A-10
Select
Select
Select
Select
Select
Select
signal
signal
signal
signal
signal
signal
(CGO area)
(CG 1 area)
(KCGO area)
(CAO area)
(CA 1 area)
(RAM area)
REV.-A
A.1.1.4 E05A22EA
•
Printhead discharge/charge control
Discharge/charge pulse width variable setting
Discharge pulse timing valiable setting (depends on print direction and nozzle line stuggerd)
•
Printhead data conversion
Print data
---*
image data
---*
printhead (nozzle) data
•
Half protect enable/disable
•
Print Timing Signal (PTS) sampling and dammy PTS genelate
•
Data Request (DREQ) signal output for DMA control
•
Equipped general purpose I/O port
•
Push-pull/open drain FET head nozzle drive port
1.
CHGB
64. VDD(+5V)
2.
CHGA
63.P7
3.
A3
62.P6
4.
A2
61. P5
5.
A1
60. VSS(GND)
6.
AO
7.
TEST
59. P4
58. H24
8.
RSET
57. H23
9.
VSS
56. H22
10.
D7
55.H21
11.
D6
54. H20
12.
D5
53.H19
13.
D4
52. VSS(GND)
14.
D3
51. RD
15.
D2
16.
D1
17.
DO
50. WR
E05A22EA
49. PTM(PTS)
48. DREQ
18. VSS(GND)
47. CE
19.
H12
46. XOUT
20.
H 11
45. XIN
21.
H 10
44. VSS(GND)
22.
H9
43.H18
23.
H8
42. H 17
24.
H7
41. H 16
25.
H6
40.H15
26.
H5
39. H 14
27. VSS(GND)
38. H 13
28.
H4
37. P3
29.
H3
36. VSS(GND)
30.
H2
35.P2
31.
Hl
34. Pl
32. VDD(+5V)
33.PO
Figure A-9. E05A22EA Pin Diagram
A-11
REV.-A
Table A-5. E05A22EA Terminal Functions
Pin No.
1
2
Terminal
I/O
Description
CHA
CHB
0
0
Printhead charge pulse A
Printhead charge pulse B
AB3 -ABO
I
Address bus 3 - 0
7
TEST
-
Test terminal for production
8
RST
I
Reset signal terminal
9
Vss
-
GND
3-6
10- 17
D7 -DO
I/O
Data bus 7 - 0
18
Vss
-
GND
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
H12
H11
H10
H 9
H 8
H 7
H 6
H 5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Head
Head
Head
Head
Head
Head
Head
Head
27
VSS(GND)
-
GND
28
29
30
31
H
H
H
H
0
0
0
0
Head
Head
Head
Head
32
VDD(+5V)
-
Power sourse
33 - 35
4
3
2
1
PO- P2
36
VSS(GND)
37
P3
38
39
40
41
42
43
H
H
H
H
H
H
44
I/O
I/O
data
data
data
data
data
data
data
data
output
output
output
output
output
output
output
output
12th nozzle
11 th nozzle
10th nozzle
9th nozzle
8th nozzle
7th nozzle
6th nozzle
5th nozzle
data
data
data
data
output
output
output
output
4th nozzle
3rd nozzle
2nd nozzle
1st nozzle
Multi purpose I/O (TTL level)
GND
Multi purpose I/O (TTL level)
0
0
0
0
0
0
Head
Head
Head
Head
Head
Head
VSS(GND)
-
GND
45
46
XIN
XOUT
I
External x'tal terminal
47
CS
-DREQ
48
13
14
15
16
17
18
data
data
data
data
data
data
output
output
output
output
output
output
13th
14th
15th
16th
17th
18th
nozzle
nozzle
nozzle
nozzle
nozzle
nozzle
0
0
Chip Select signal
0
DMA Request signal
-~
49
PTM(PTS)
I
Print Timing Signal input
50
51
WR
RD
I
I
Write strobe
Read strobe
52
VSS(GND)
-
GND
A-12
REV.-A
Table A-5. E05A22EA Terminal Functions (Continued)
Pin No.
Terminal
53
54
55
56
57
58
H19
H2O
H21
H22
H23
H24
59
P4
60
VSS(GND)
61 - 63
64
P5 - P7
VDD(+5V)
Description
I/O
0
0
0
0
0
0
I/O
I/O
-
Head
Head
Head
Head
Head
Head
data
data
data
data
data
data
output
output
output
output
output
output
19th
20th
21th
22th
23th
24th
nozzle
nozzle
nozzle
nozzle
nozzle
nozzle
Multi purpose I/O (TTL level)
GND
Multi purpose I/O (TTL level)
Power sourse
A-13
REV.-A
A.1.1.5 E05A24GA
This gate array
le
has an 8-bit parallel I/F circuit and an expanded port function.
DINO
DINl
DIN2
DIN3
DIN4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Vcc
DIN5
DIN6
DIN7
STB
RXD
INIT
GND
lOUT
ITO
TM
RST
N.G.
SlGT
IBF
RDY
N.G.
BUSY
AGK
N.G.
ERROR
N.G.
PE
GND
P20
P21
P22
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
GND
P14
P13
P12
Pl1
PlO
GND
AFXT
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
Dl
DO
GND
GlK
TESTEN
SOUT
WDOG
WR
RD
GE
A2
Vcc
Al
AO
SlGTIN
PIS
GND
P23
Figure A.10 E05A24GA Pin Diagram
..
..
DIN7-0
STB
ACK
BUSY
PE
ERROR
SlCT
INIT
AFXT
SUN
PIS
IBF
ITO
lOUT
RDY
Vcc
GND
Serial
IIF
..
•
.....
..
General
I/O
Port
..
RXD
---t"-SOUT
-----TM
__- - t.._ P10 - P13
- - - - - - e..
_ P14
Parallel
IIF
Watch
Dog
Timer
----ClK
WDOG
- - - - - - e..
_
- - - - - TESTENB
_-----e.._
-
System
Power
System
Bus
D7 - 0
..
A7-0
-----CE
..
RD
-----WR
-----RST
Figure A.11 E05A24GA Block Diagram
A-14
REV.-A
Table A-G. E01 A24GA Terminal Functions
Pin No.
Name
I/O
11
35
9
8
7
5
4
3
2
1
10
24
23
28
26
12
36
57
19
6,39
46
13,29,
34,48,
RXD (IN)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
0
0
0
0
I
I
I
I
I
PIS
DIN7
DIN6
DIN5
DIN4
DIN3
DIN2
DIN1
DINO
STB
ACK
BUSY
PE
ERR
INIT
SUN
AFXT
SlCT
VCC
ENSTENB
GND
-
-
Function
Receive serial data
Parallel/serial select
Data bus 7
Data bus 6
Data bus 5
Data bus 4
Data bus 3
Data bus 2
Data bus 1
Data bus 0
STROBE signal
ACKNlG signal
BUSY signal
PE signal
ERROR signal
INIT signal
SlCTIN signal
AUTO FEED XT signal
SlCT signal
+5 VDC
Pulled down
Ground
58, 64
63
30
31
32
33
16
61
60
59
62
21
20
15
47
42
43
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
37
38
40
44
I
P14
P20
P21
P22
P23
TM
P12
P11
PlO
P13
READY
IBF
ITO
ClK
RD
WR
DO
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
AO
A1
A2
WDOG
0
0
0
0
0
I
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
I
I
I
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I
I
I
0
Multi purpose I/O
Multi purpose I/O
Multi purpose I/O
Multi purpose I/O
Multi purpose I/O
Not used (open)
Multi purpose I/O
Multi purpose I/O
Multi purpose I/O
OULLt::1
READY lED
BUSY latch signal
INIT latch signal
Watch-dog timer clock
Read strobe
Write strobe
Data bus 0
Data bus 1
Data bus 2
Data bus 3
Data bus 4
Data bus 5
Data bus 6
Data bus 7
Address bus 0
Address bus 1
Address bus 2
Watch-dog timer
A-15
REV.-A
Table A-G. E02A24GA Terminal Functions
Pin No.
Name
I/O
27,22,
NC
0
-
Function
Not used
25, 18
14
lOUT
41
CS
17
RST
I
I
Chip select signal
45
SOUT
0
Output Serial data
Not used
Reset signal
A-16
REV.-A
A.l.l.6 E05A23GC
•
DC motor control by selected built in PLL or PRC control er
• Abailable full braking, full acceleration control
•
Print Timing Signal (PTS) generate
• STOP signal output and automatically enter the short brake mode
•
Moving position count and direction detection
•
Home position sensor signal detection and load
•
Print start position setting fuction
1.
R1
2.
VCOIN
64.POUT
63. AGNO(GNO)
62.PCA
3.
R2
4.
CS
61. PCS
5.
CA
60.INH
6.
VCOOUT
59. VCC(+5V)
58. TSTV
7. AVCC(+5V)
8. AGNO(GNO)
57. RST
9.
TRIG
56. VCC(+5V)
10.
CTRL
55.PTS
11.
N.C.
54.CPMP
12.
THR
53. STOP
13.
DISC
52. TEST
14.
lOUT
51. RISE
15.
POUT
16.
MINUS
17.
50. TSTO
E05A23GC
49. GNO
PLUS
48.07
18. AVCC(+5V)
47.06
19.
GNO
46.D5
20.
ENCA
45.D4
21.
ENCB
44.GND
22.
HOME
43.D3
23.
XOUT
42.02
24.
XIN
41. D 1
25.
AO
40.00
26.
A1
39. N.C.
27.
A2
38. N.C.
28.
CE
37. NPN2
29.
OE
36. NPN 1
30.
WE
35.GND
31.
VCC(+5V)
34.N.C.
32.
PNP 1
33. PNP2
Figure A-12. E05A23GC Pin Diagram
A-17
REV.-A
Table A-7. E05A23GC Terminal Functions
Pin No.
Terminal
I/O
1
2
4
5
6
R1
VCOIN
R2
CB
CA
VCOOUT
I
I
I
I
Internal VCO unit oscilation setting resister
VCO input (from phase comperator)
Internal VCO unit oscilation setting resister
VCO Charge/discharge control
0
0
VCO output
7
8
AVcc
AGND
-
9
10
11
12
13
14
TRIG
CTRL
N.C.
THR
DISC
lOUT
15
16
17
18
POUT
MINUS
PLUS
AVcc
0
-
Internal voltage comperater output
Comperater input
Comperater input
Analog power sourse
19
GND
-
GND
20
21
ENC A
ENC B
I
Encoder signal input (CMOS schmitt trigger)
22
HOME
I
Home position siganal input
23
24
XOUT
XIN
0
External x'tal terminal
AO-A2
I
Address decoder input
28
29
30
CE
OE
WE
I
I
I
Chip enable signal
Output enable signal
Write enable signal
31
Vcc(+5V)
-
Power sourse
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
PNP1
PNP2
N.C.
GND
NPN1
NPN2
N.C.
N.C.
0
0
PNP transistor drive signal (open drain)
PNP transistor drive signal (open drain)
3
25 - 27
-
40- 43
44
45 -48
DO-D3
GND
D4-D7
-
I
I
I
0
0
I
I
Description
• 4046 compatible
Analog power sourse
Analog GND
Internal timer trigger signal
Timer control signal
Timer threshold signal
Timer discharge output
Timer output
• 555 compatible
I
-
0
0
NPN transistor drive signal (push-pull)
NPN transistor drive signal (push-pull)
-
I/O
I/O
Data bus
GND
Data bus
49
GND
-
GND
50
TSTQ
I
Clock input for timer output simulation (N.U.)
A-18
REV.-A
Table A-7. E05A23GC Terminal Functions (Continued)
Pin No.
Terminal
--
I/O
Description
RIBE
0
PNP transistor drive signal (N.U.)
TEST
-
Test terminal for production
STOP
0
Stop signal output
CPMP
0
Phase comperator charge signal output for timer (CTRL)
PTS
0
Print Timing Signal generator output
Vcc(+5V)
-
Power sourse
I
Reset signal input (Low: all counter, register initialized)
TSTV
I
Clock input for VCO output simulation (N.U.)
59
Vcc(+5V)
-
Power sourse
60
INH
I
VCO outout initialize signal
61
62
63
64
PCB
PCA
AGND
POUT
I
I
-
Internal phase comperater test signal input (N.U.)
Phase comperater test signal input (N.U.)
Analog GND
Comperater output (N.U.)
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
--
--
--
RST
--
0
A-19
REV.-A
A.1.1.7 SLA4390
The SLA4390 is a four-circuits, darlington transistor array.
/-$-" SK
JAPAN
,-$-
I
I
I
'--
H
H
H
H
H
I
H
H
H
I-i
I-
H
I--
Pln1
12
Figure A-13. SLA4390 Case Outline Drawing
4
2
11
9
.---+,
I
I
•
Rl=Z.5KnTyp
I
RZ = ZOOnTyp
I
UVI~~rvIr+J
7
6
Figure A-14. SLA4390 Functional Equivalent Circuit
A-20
R3=
3KnTyp
R4=
IOOnTyp
REV.-A
A.1.1.8 SLA7020M
The SLA 7020M ia a two-circuit, 4-phase step motor driver for unipolar constant current driving.
lJllf Jl ll Jl llJlfJllf IllfJllfll)
I 2 3 4 S 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Figure A-15. SLA7020M Case Outline Drawing
Vcc
I
~
L_-_L-_-_-~--_-------------...2-+--+-----+
.J
L
~____t-_+--6------......J
a
»
:u
»
(J)
Do
Db
1,C2
Cl~
Figure A-16. SLA7020M Functional Equivalent Circuit
A-21
REV.-A
A.1.1.9 TL494CN
The TL494 is pulse width modulation control. The block diagram is shown in Figure A-17 shows
r - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ( 13
Output Control
Vcc
Low Voltage
Stop
Ref out
GND
RT
CT
Dead Time Conrol
Non Iny. Input
1 ~---1;"'"
Iny. Input
Non I nv. Input
Iny. Input
Feedback
Figure A-17. TL494 Block Diagram
A-22
REV.-A
A. 1.1.10 L5431-AA
The 431 is a high-accuracy temperature-compensated shunt regulator. The output voltage can be set
anywhere between 2.5 V and 36 V through addition of two external resistors. The 431 is highly stable
and outputs a large current, so that it is capable of replacing various Zener diodes. The 431 is especially
suitable for driving the photodiode in the photocoupler section of the feedback circuit used in the RCC
system switching regulator.
• Temperature-compensated reference voltage (50 ppm/C TYP)
•
High response speed
•
Low noise
REF
NC
A
NC
CATHODE
ANODE
REF
Figure A-18. L5431-AA Pin Diagram
CATHODElll
(8IREFERENCE
Vref
~---L---oCathode
L -_ _- ' -
ANODE(6)
Figure A-19. L5431-AA Internal Circuit
A-23
~
Anode
REV.-A
A.1.1.11 MN6275AS
The MN6275AS is a C-MOS circuit for a analog-type quartz clocks. The device operates with a 32-KHz
quartz crystal unit and provides driving pulse outputs for a 1-Hz stepper motor. The device is also
provided with a 4096-Hz intermittent alarm output, and has a voltage stabilizer.
ALO __---1-. 1
All
01
2
02
3MN6275A6
XI
7
4
5
\00
Vss
XO
Figure A-20. MN6275AS Pin Assignment
3-Stage
r-+-J'Mr--4~--r---l" Div ider
1--.....--.1
13-Stage
Divider
XO
r------.m
All
r----IN1nput Circuit TEST
Figure A-21. MN6275AS Block Diagram
A-24
REV.-A
A.1.1.12 HD74HC292P
THe HD74HC292P is a programable frequency divider/digital timer.
Table A-S. HD74HC292P Function Table
Clear
Clock1
Clock2
L
X
X
Clear to'L
L
Count
H
S
Q Output Mode
H
L
H
H
X
Inhibit
H
X
H
Inhibit
S
Count
CLR -C_Do~:>o.----,
eLK 1
CLKZ
rp,
rpz
rp,
Figure A-22. HD74HC292 Block Diagram
A-25
REV.-A
A.l.2 SEIPS/SANPSE Board
Table A-9 shows the primary ICs used on the SEIPS/SANPSE board.
Table A-9. SEIPS/SANPSE Board Primary ICs
Description
Location
Name
IC 1
L5431-AA
Adjustable presision shant regurator
IC20
TL494CN
PWM controler
A-26
REV.-A
A.2 DIAGRAMS AND SCHEMATICS
The exploded and schematic diagrams shown in Figures A-23 to A-35 are provided as additional
reference.
uuuuu
C28
.-
....
8
N
N
__
'?_--, t"..'--Cl
.. 32
~
---i
'"
:J
==:J
~
==:J
-=:J
O~ll
b==::I co
J6
J7
N
S El PS
IJ
........"'..
L-...=:=....2.~~~~~..,..::::..~=.=o:.J
[ r----.
". ,.,1:
I
~~
":g
~,.,
.. ~I-_-----L.-+-,--JI
0.....
BOARD CMl(~XT8'M
1:::j~i']~1
--........-
11
2!!
UNIT"2
E!II
~~ Y567202<X>OOO
1
T
1
1
T I!)J e J
L-..._ _--'
]
~
T
I
Figure A-23. SEIPS Board Component Layout
A-27
N
»
(Xl
3
III
Q
III
co
.,
t:
;:+
(')
c.
Q
.,
.,III
0
I:J:I
en
'1::1
m
en
~
N
l>
CD
.,t:
cC·
"11
\
SW
47
R 1
L1
ElF1BD
290P
(
cm.
/
RO
R4
062
lw
1/
" i
200V
300JJF
resistor
N
N
L
L
®. Fuse
1
3
F1
lA
25011
Cl
o 22).lF
~ ,2200PFlI2~
~Fi~'~
N
390~
RI
~~"
~'
+
01
l';>.
03
1.7
OS
sw
G)
Rl1
36K
1
t
~:1
-.J
I
1,
13
-'4
L
PC
@
CD
T LP521-2 (GB)
8
71
6
sr-
·
(£\
ISV
·
CD
®
~
tD
JSv
R22
390
R)3
10K
2$ ~~~
/
680~~~ ,i
>----
1Z0DpF
50011
C17
v
.....
O~
C 16
R1J
390
1',6
sov
R14
R36
100'
3
IC 20
14
R 18
39K
112W
R1S
l1K
11/1W
"
j~
"iiO-nF
1
15
~~
R 37
lK
1
~
R17
2;m"F
ISV
ISV
~~ZJ~JJF
ERA3B-Cl,
010
EMf-G12S
l100pF
SOOv
1c28
T
v
022
[RAJa- 04
T1
PT P69ATD
·
0
22fJF
+C9
18K
R6
560
r-t~
IC'
~
Rll
360
0--
.,1
RID
1K
ERA B2-004
A1020
l 54]1
R9
lDD
)60
R8
O,OljJF
sov
CID
R)
nB44-06
R13
>---
01
C3746,...1
-vr
04
22000F
,.V
lC8
U
~
>------
~L
C3831
ERA~-OO4
D)
R7
3aQK
2W
RS
56.
v
01
ERB4t.·06
G:)
11
1
j
T
5
6
®
®
RIO
SEIPS
VL
Z D2 2
I
L-
:1
I
HZ,to-l
R19
43K
7
10
L
011
- 00'
01'
ERC8'I
LP401
- alSO
R3S
10 K
R)4
610
10V
100~~~
lW x2
R38
022
Cl
i
O~
~
~,
~,
+12V
01A
CN2
ONO
ONO
+SV
OS A
lOA
+]411
01A
o - 12 V
~,
Board (1 20V)
Y502202000
HZ~C-l
Z021
v
Hl~-)
ZDlO
-RTF
1I~10
S-Ol
A 1020
R30~
1 8K
L2D
170
lWx2
W~
~
A 1469
010
.'
2 1!4W
T L 494
11
~11
001
4
1)
1/4W
RJ1
1
R 31
:i>
m
~
:c
REV.-A
I
.
011
-
IV
_
.:......+ 1
fiI T
Ra
Rla
UNIT
Y56720400000
L----'
n'S-g~
Z ,.
fit
-
C
:Ill
I
Figure A-25. SANPSE Board Component Layout
A-29
3
0
VJ
:p-
3
III
cc
..,
III
0
~
c:
(")
..,
(")
C.
III
..,
0'
0
m
Cl)
"C
»
2
Cl)
0)
N
»
CD
cc
..,c:
"T1
L1
\
sw
RI
10
ElF18D
290G
R2
390K
l
~
Cl
250V O.47).JF
L
L
®: Fuse'
I
RO
,
/
fe-sistor
N
N
40g~
, SO}JF
470DpF1l2
-
~f-------<
N
~-HTr
390K
RI5
~
~;1'_2SA
-
RBV4Q6
~'
.
Z
/
.
R4
13
2W
v
R13
l.BK
>---
cm6,..-1
02
04
2W
lOOK
L
O.OljJF
<>N
Rll
360
'Cl
~
R6
560
I
,---4
::
2K
RlO
05
EAAB2-(X)4
R3
120 2W
>-----
.,.L
A~62n
ZOI
;"'-2
l5431
R'
200
620
Re
CID
ERB44-10
02
Le
PF
LJ4700
IKV
~
>--
ER~2'OO4
03
}ri-
C3460
R7
300K
RI4
30QK
R5
E'RB41,-10
'0',
~
L
si
PC2
J
4"'--
51
I
I,
..J
~:,
022
R27
200K
"70uF
25'
. . en
25'
ri ZfJIJF
::
R23
3.0
R37
2K
[':
3~'r
R36
"
I C 20
R"
"K
R25
2.2K
1I2W
1/2W
2.2K
R24
~L
lOOK
IS
1- 2023 ~
L~HZ5C'2 H~
R 33
10K
ERA3B-04
.....
03.;
V
Rn
3.0
35V
68~2J p.+
020
FMP-G12S
ERAJa-DJ.
TLP634 (GB-LF2J x 2
--~,
t
=--
.l:C_"-- - l 2
@
"®
@
~
tB
T1
PT-P68ENF
R12
3.6K 4 r -
CD
"
CB
'C'
22lJ F
25'
"
"
CD
0
®
4
I
11
®
®
All
R3~
1.8K
I
l-
'l
I
Al020
r::
021
WX2
H2~,'1
l021
..-
H~~-3
2020
820
021
ERCSl
- 00'
-0250
R 35
10K
10 ,
oo~~} ~.
R"
620
1
R3'
0)2
IW
lW
R 38 0.22
LP'OI~-
n
LlO
I
r
I
r
o 10
CN2
GNO
GNO
'5'
O,5A
1.0 A
+UV
0.1 A
-l'lV
9 ., '1 V
0.1 A
SA NPSE Board (2 20-240V)
Y567204000
H~~~2_1
10
~~6
~.rI<
T L494
12
Cl5
.OluF
13
020
A 1.'.69
1,f.W
W-
R32
1/4W
~~O
2
2
R31
:i>
:<
m
:JJ
w
3
tu
cc
.,
tu
l:
n
;:j:
C
Q
.,
0.
0
0'
.,tu
~ ~
~
"C
Z
m
CIJ
"
N
»
CD
l:
.,
cc
!!
c{
eNl
6
m
330P
+5V
10K
-"- 220p
7 LS04
+5V
,
o1-----_+ 5V
8
CAS_'_2
OPEN
3
GND0
+S
C5SW
74LS04
ON LINE
+
J
+f
10K
~SW5
4.7fJF/16V
10K
J;
10K
t5V
.....
~
220
;i330 P
*
+5V
10
9
1
_7
TXS, '"'
CKS
4
I<J
READY
02-----/
SHLD 0
GND
+5V
OLSW
iJiLEo
RXS
3
READY :)2
LED2
tSV
10K
1
117
I
I
680p
10K
f5V
T7
2.2fJF/16V!z:
MA165*
~
~
4.7K
~
~1000P
;-,1-;.
10K
..........
ClF
DI
Trr
r
INH
10
11
I
13
F 4
G S
H 6
~ ~4
74HC165
2 CLK
SER
q QH
A
B
1 SH/LD
C
SWl
...
....
...
h
SW2
LED6
LED4
=R
J Vo--.lifc
CS f---<>--1
3.3K
NMC9306
ER59256
~ DOTEST~
2
3
O.lIJF
LED5...
...
v
LED3 ....
RD
OCRl
SEG50
I
SEGl
COMI6
I
COMl
31
SW4
_
_
NM
~lI'!~----
"'
V1
d
Vi
0
0
11
rh
SW6
10K X7
NMC9306(NS)
,;W9 ...
MA165X4
SW7 ....
....
T
Ir
~<;;;l*
SW10
s;~
8 VDD
5
VSS
~'
+5V
Ilro . .
r
0.01
SEGl - SEG50
~I~I~I---- ~I
"' V1 V1
300K
u
~
- -Cell
LCD
NM
, "' "'"'
'"U
SEIPNL Board Unit
- J (for Japan) Y502501000
-W( for Others) Y 502502000
If /'
SW3
j
I r -"'_
220 X 4
tI
500K
7
SED1200FOA (Japan)
SED1200FOB (Others)
DBO
1~
DBI
34
DB2 OCR2 J2
33 DB3
,...........1.. AO
38
CS
VLCD
"-"- WR
+~
2 470p
13
LJ-
l'-l
~~7~B30_
;t;1000 P
j""iUr=
CSA3.00MG011
MSM58371RS
16
01
02 '0
03 14
---l DIN
04 11
12
L--...1. LD
05
06 . 11
+5V
07
10 CLK
08 7
09 6
lOOK
lOOK
010 5
MAI65
011
4
,.....
17 RST
012 3
'I
LEDI
1"
POWER
+5V
0.01
0.01
0.01
001
,P>
,P>
74lS04
m
::xl
j;.
<
REV.-A
.... ..
-rw=i C3
CO2
c"C~1
Cl]
;:., 1•
T
n
HO""ICNlI'IO
w
-
..
-
~g
.
-
T
!J
n
.~
T
CN2
~
4 .. 11M/,,./nll(
~
I
•
...,
.
'Ill
OM'
I
I I
-
Figure A-28. SEIMA Board Component Layout
A-32
~'--I
.._-- 3
----+--- 2
----+-
4
--.---._+---
5
---+---
8 ----+---- 9 - - - + - - - - 10
---+---- 7
6
11
---+----
12 - - - ! - - - - - - 13.
REV.-A
14 - - - - + - - - - 15
16--
----t------
1
CN2
819
10ptlon
IZ
~L~
It:a::
't~
jgl~ 1'.11)"'1'1(\1
~~~ 11).11).
I
Ibt. CG boardl
CN7
!lFI
~l..
fifi
•.
:r,~,~~~~--~,
IIII!,
(~~
J
REV
'I
CN31
I~SIFI
,
I
~..
m
2
m
3
I
C78
5
I
IK •9Ar-j,000P
1
s~ ~
'
8f
~tGf.tf~
m
IParalleIC~'~FII ~
RI~~
68
"'I~
-
~""2
=.i~~
~~L,P,...
i'
I,,,
'.I~m'
LI ~.'~O
~
~ ,~C71
l
.'
j, '
."
~I cal
GNO
...
~
~FG
,G
u,
i
I
I
j,
.
1011
I~:sr
~:.. 1"~
lj..r:fI
m
=I~
•
I
~!i
E05A24GA
1,
R211
HD641AORIPIO
3.3X
I F-l"'1
'
(lOCI
l~dl1i
: .
il'~':
I ~lll!
I
I
*
i! II~~~:
I~
~1=1:ii
.",Iiii~
I
'i
I'
I
1
lRelease
CNI4
1
iir.CiOrf
RS-
ERAI&
020 RI73
s.,m""l02~~ ~:~~,~ ~o,: : :v'"
~
~14 ~
c,.B3~1 ~15
'Ai
eNI6
vss
XTAL
IPF
Motor)
8vs
fl
__ "
A
~~-.
~~""IH
RF
GB
~'
1"1
TI"~RII
'.
~!!.N"
.,~4()G3H,~1:
i _ "..
c~o
I
RR: ,
uTI
RSI
2200P!'
RFB.!!-
R31
"---
r~:;;,
24
'.
&
010
TEA
I
lTE
TEi
)
EO
C1815~9 '~R3~orOK
l'
E:;~:~0~4
012
:~._~
Cl':;
,:c,p
~
10
IW
-fO'143
GH
01843
II
1
I
I
---<
I'"
I'
GH
GH
lfHC96
•
..
~
"2
..
~,:~_ _ ~~ &2
1
~
'"
IcE
lE
Ii
ICI
_
_~
--
IDI
C2
1-
I
5
-
.5
1.
TE
PE
.S .SI·5
<C
.5
.,!.
il,
IIC)..8 SOOOOH
Q...
nnk
Q
CNII
Encll
\~
0
,...
:3
~~ \
-I
0
3.31<
~~978
oS
Jumper settlnQ>u
If If
T
i
·~~·IiSIIUIOS
I
I'
I. I
'I'
~
i
CG Only
c
lEa
':
~HiG
I
:=-I-
I
....I i_I
r5~
~~
!
!
iI
~
i
I
I
~-
.I.
I,
I'
o
;
~ ....
!~
II1
i 11'
1 :1
..,.
,'1
!
O
I
:::
i
i,
I:,
1
1' ,
'11"
11
!
VSS 14 0.1
I
aE"
----:----------~--+-+-l++++-t-~=~----1I---
~lf
~
+-+--+-h
I
11
I
;
:~o
I
P I I I l f '
::-~
E
Aa
~
-u~ti=i--~
-
::,.
--_'--_---:_-~~~~~~T~:~oo~~~~~------~--~~=.~~~~~--'---~
--~~I
•
IM1=:Ol
21121.5
::::
1/2..145.611
RI"
RI97
R20533K
\
~~~
~207
100P_2~=J:
I
rcf8~
CSA4'00M~GmC56 :
I
i
.&
041
~:~65' H074H~:~66
zoo
CI85Y
\
!
040'1
=': ~
t
".I~ICE
;~~- ~~~1'15Y
~~:K
cs:z~
8
~
1181
-
rlK
~w
RI9
R26'
430
C8
GH ......... D2
01t7~
01
~
Z
"I
CNlt
lvalvel
IM
1
07
3
r - 2
lIBI
'-
5
I"~
~
~:
I
4
~
12~V
1
I'
~.
L
,.
~~~ LJCI~ II ~~ Ir=g j'=g Ij o.~a II ~~
J6 _. _ PIF
~~ ~g =g 016 R~
~~i.
GND Jumper
J9 . .
!tTJj Jumper
FG"
GHO Jumper
JIO • - -.
~ 1/0 .elect Jump.r
~4
~ 110 6 ~9
10
110
8
16
1""'1:
R74
25V
T~
:l~ :::
r
~ I~W -T'
i ~ I I1
GH500e, I:
I:~
I!!'I
R&4
RtITIS
31<
lOOK
;ll,iflooop~~R372.4~~~~ :~~
300K
VRI
I '
_'
L5431
1201 A
~'
Rq~WR87
,
i
El
'
10.0....-
Cl
:;;
L------
L---
,
= i
r:: I
~ i '8~
C
-
I
.....
~
VII
RS8
30 K
_1.&0
~-'!!
-
l\l
le.
~ ~/
"
I"
:CL~1008AD
1
1
\
C3117
I
R
'5
IM
I
nY
'~3 ~±~.
T
VCOOUT
ca
Del
Cl
la.!
13-1
~
f
_
~rx!
..
..:.~.
2=~~!~!!.
.
x:t:t:n:n1:
Tr.=
XOUT
4
~A·~
CNI2 (Therml.ter)
CN20
IHeCldl
.t.
CNIS
(Encooerl
::~ $~2 mY""
~~5
H~
1~9 r. ~. ~.:
~Q&
.5
'"
.
--
0.01
VOO
AGNO
VvSSSS
"-MP
:IT:- UK
~
C27
.S
Q8
Rl'l
r.::
C181&Y
I_~
lH.
_~
_
.....
~ ~~-
rh
M-e.
..
E*++f~."f~
~~
~
IM_8
GH
4
ii~~!~!! 83
I
1- - I
I
I
-
-
-;'1.1-;5 -;12- VCC
~4
~O.ll
1 - ~ g.,8
C49
7S188
:
19AI
I
-9110112
GNO
7
_ vcc
fliT
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
':-':-.1:" -
-
14
VCC
7SI89
(8AI
(~
'14J;~
-\..0 -
---
....
7
:~16S
-12
~nl-"
-
I
DI2
L ,f,.7h- ri-r-Jr
74ALSOO
74ALS32
leR homel
ONO
fllln
CTR
VDO
•
2
....
,
VOQ
rtfIIll.-
:~
115......
~~
10V
1:I"~II~.~+-H4II4!W'<'
.
'.3.
OIlC
CJ
I
v.
IDJ.-4
AVCC
eN'O
,703
I
E.
__ e-,", •
T T
XIN
H
'-0...
!.5
4
C32.11. C33 RI72 10K
O_,~~
= !!!!
OS3~O-S~~S+---!
~1Q"";Flt
I.,'"
I;;'
~::
,....- f:O~
019
"
~.t--!--!
01040
G
'OIl
,h . . . . 7110X3.31<
6CI
titT
(CR Motorl
1I0~ SLA-i3:O/~
MINUS 16
mv
ZlaZ8XS8oL£.3- 2.!,
4.7IC.
CM-
Of
"RKI4-2
f1~\i .. .-~ "'~OI<~L
~:~P RI:'~~. ~~ =~ =rI¥-i:"
f f.. £IIA]
,J,.~K2~~4
C2}~~P.P CA '!' ~~;;'r~"OPr.t
~:
' :CLllOOeAO
~
~,_
:::
'
00
CIk] CNIS
~~
RKI4
RKI4 0708
4"- 2
-4"""
1
.4 __
GH.-j
NPH2 37
ir
:1r.. ~.. ~;; C"'141~~~,
I
:W
=:::::;:
:CL~~~~8AO
l1li
I , DJ7
11
lIE
&
11:
i~~';~~'" ':~~:'~eNLJ
I
-
471("
AI~5860 ~
U:
I
CIII&
l-49 ,
017
R43
150
7
•
JI2
4
=!![!
10K
...,
. I
~!l
~4700P
06
ti9: ,...
1IIIIIlll~:~_~,-~,-,
-~,--,--~~~."mll
ll~::j
I---.~---=~--~-lll--- ._=- --~ll,."I('",I!".,
GH
R81
1
I
Bll:
024
1101 7
e-P,-~ PL""~~~~.rg~=,,,
>-------
i
N_.OII-
:'
·foo4· '
l0 V
~l~56 Zt!8Xa~
BaXIXtil
~
!! I!
[!
I~
...
I,:;
, ,~__~:;l
I?~"
30K
1Ii!
HZ27-1
lOOK Z03
RM
2.15K
1'7'
~:K
-
I.... C7.
Ne
AI
loO 1481
-~ JW"
f t 1FLI,
=
CL!t-...::
RII.
I"
N
I'll
~
gS irumrd.iiiUimmi
I,
-_....:~
I
ft44
NC
n AI
. .
580
C3187
VOD
.. ..~_/ 2
P. . I 32
~oo
FL4·&
vu ,.
I"
I
OS310-550104M_2
1681
·
R79
V ll
1
"38j
0
A22EA
J-< .;~t;::~=~~;;
~CI
~' EVc~CC~C~T~
~7
li~1~~ES'=;
RI~I ~Q24 ! ~~IWK·
~~.1"""
,
.~
:
IOK-&
1
'l1
.C42
2~~~ ~
, R80
1301
39K
1!
11
~
R76
11 002f-th
---
74ALS32'
256
lR75~ ~
,Y4
:
4 010
2
1
PT-P 6 5STD
T1
2SK429L
RD13CI FB
OC
DTC
~
CNI8
lpumpl
7
R5~V 9·
0.047
~~W~ 5~~11 :~';;wO.1
~W
I C401J1~C3e
\~...
'--. .-J
.:
CI5
1
VII
n \
430
.
-'GH TH3CI'0/2
I
3501·
~~2
-~
:~~n ~:::
C::.
!
2
11
V.
4cHZ3S-3T
I 470
Ir: r
'R20
I
l
:fg
5
03
.. .- 0
0 21
I
I,
I
I
I
-----~
-
,..1: -1 t~~~ '" ~ ~~~l!!~
i r i ... :=4~ SZUaBc;i
~0~':a~R~I,~2-. -=t~i~ I:
~'-I'-,~'~' I 11
CI".1~~Of'
ZD5
H
K
:
,
IO"t
6
"7
-
TSL0707-1011<
LI
!
[ Ii
I
Eo c
f~· 139~RO'=;I·I.I~.90~KI'OY -I!_~~ -:-:-:~_:-:~:\~.J~i~~~.
I
TIT
1J;l
~~
IK
I!
I
I
T
I
CR2
R9&
MA 165
10"'--- 3
0; R,';<::'", '"
0
040
R213 i
680 I
~l7~:"pm~M::"" I~L":~~g~l
.....33Lt-;it'S..Ll,J, fr=
'.. llL~ IP' ·~
021
I
nll
j
----+---------I=O'-------+-++++-++-+...-++-t-+-+++~------AlL-.n-----Hl+-H..--,-ll
R:~:
_~ V.a11
24
il
- -
F
:0:
~ -~~~:~~
8: '":~
~.WSL"4
WIt
-.::~_-~_-~.:.~~--~~~~~~~--~~_-~--...;J=nr~~-=-- ----+-+.+-+-+-~--H-..,~-+-h~-----==---_1f=_-=-=-
----
I
I
1.1015
-----~.
I
_
1.0.
Cartrlo. .
00
~
Mii'i02
I'
CN4
ISlot AI
---1~g:
f---.
10
5 0
J043
~5
Q
~IIO
CNI3
lTE CSFI
•
~_IO
T~3ClO/2
ViN'
....
;:!:
I
!
,:
"Ilv I
07
"'..
~
~
IIC
~
- --._--
~
-I
15S166
,.24
I,'
i~ ~ ~¥- _~~+ I ~ o! ~ jo
RI~330 2W
e:";~l
;ill,.; ~.~ 2 ~~ ~ 0
AI'
J1'
J;j, ij p,. a:: l\lp,
_ o:~v l\l -1'
"0'" -~ l\l 11)0'" - "'6 l\l6
• 0I)6~'"
CN8
124VI
vss 14 0.1
----+4+++·14+ -'-'I=--+-------------'----+--+-H+r---+-+-'' -~~"
VEil
I'
a::
I~..,!!C=OC-.CC-I'CC-CC."'C.CC-CO:~.
,.c~
voo
.s
!
eNS
(Slot 81
: r11r--,-++++++-l++++t+++---4l-O::
I1
1',1
O.
:~
lie
I
,,1043257 113CI
.,..~J t:'.~~:II.~~
I':
__
-~---...-,
.~
1
1
1
r
III
I",
'I; 1
,1l i 1 ItI
HM65256 11181
,.
~'O'
Ij;
I 1
1""", ill
'11
~_
L
1.40
••
!,
r:::--,ccw~W
1413
~--~ ~M
D2
III
1
4+- -+
~ I
I
.~
~"II."74.~LSOO ~::=',----,
!,
8GllltOO
UT
AA3'ao-
eATl
IBI
IK 4
If
sllmaS
~
111111
..
.l5
fi
1,·5
i
1:'
I
11.16:
e
E
I'
~I
CiF
5
C~ \ ~ ~ ~ ~/
H
.13
I
",
. ..
_---AL.:..~ ~.:
I
100/11
13
I
I , .....~~_+_l-+-+-+_+_--+-....Ml.....-_----_______
I
I
I'
!
••
TEA
j
~r£
11
.. 0.1
.24
1---:7-JVIJIK~8~-,_----~--.!!..
GH
I
~I
'flfNi
ii)
I!I:!!~
wlil!
·1'
1 1
I,
VOO~
~
4M/2M1IM1256K
~ Bllll-.!'
SllIIloS--
1
Il
...... 0.11
:
-4-- - ------:U
-- - J~
.L t
PO
IK 6
3
SA
i
I
_ll! IIIi
mT
4M/2M/IM/256K
6
1,1
I
ceeACll'
etCS
ICl
I
(2AI
"01843
GH
5
I
',;,'
I
05
etC.
vss~"
09BA
~Vll
GH I843
TEA
.K
~--------Il.l
011
3
P2
IX
10.!~~.&
0------,
TES ~-
~I
Cl~!
1'T
5
GH:H
R33
2. K
A35 10K
o!-
47
1I
---
.~r~7~-~~~~~~~~-~~~~~~~~-~!~:~l~~-·---~----------_-_-_~!lli=:
~c~~
er,
!:C22
C21
VDO~,'.~J,r J,.
11. g~
100P-2'
tR2t"°708
i.lli'l
.
!Gj
I
11~
~,~!!jl
1
1
::
=J£jRgii=f+E_~ij~nH_tL=_=_=-~-_~~'~~~--~-~---=-_--~=~~=-'-=-=l-:E:-~ - ~ "t jt~-4-+4lt-=-=-=-=-=-~-=-=~=- = _~~~f±~fj~±~j;~§~~===±E=3t==~~ - H-t~~::_:::r: :-==:-I:t=;~=:~-Uttt+==!1m~======_=__=~=_- ,=!~ t ~
I,
., 1
~ .20 - T .,
~ffi--+
241<~4.12K 2~ P3
B
RSAS2:::
1381
C9 TR30
CM.
1.16
I
"il
I
'
B
.• ~~
!l
tt.ttttti-++H-
------ - ------
"1204K
1470P-2
~: l!I~~!~6=t~_~
PF~ ~ _ GAr:Jr;;GHCI"~~
PFI
CNI7
Motorl
III
PFA
1 ;IRl- -92L-.j- -.~05LH
[!
" ,'
CA..2
rlTl
------~~----
:
1
~374ALSU~
L
'_--~--~,." ~.AII~32 ~
1
110
I
°C661
~* "'Srrn~mmOS
~ I ~Ia'
YI
I
[~-J 11 ~~I---~JIr~-~-----~-~-~-=~---~--~~~
r.h-f>"
lij5 13
14
n
Ill: i 1
1
i
8O
~,.. ......"'.. _o• • ,...... ['
~!::_!!_!!=2._,..• • _ .. _o o. I=:"'M
C~>::~CCCCCCIICOC8=IC~::~.5~j ~~::;CCCCCC:I~~:C"CC "pcccicl=~==:~~~
I
.&
VOO
VSS
13.3X-2
~ 11
1'1:
11281
> 27256/27512
C53
100,.
~
HC
Ci3- ••, 9/U,
UP lI'e.432MMIJ
7i~N~·fS.
D~·,j(.O 19: IfF'~
~~8 I
i5 11:;: :;:
oLJ
n!..-.....!
PF"
PFA
_~
t
I
I!j!' I'
1
I
f-
l
-'Gr:i,~~'3~-"~
~
,
c..!!c ...
c- ..
c-c=c- ..
cc·,..cc
....
c ..
ccC c· ...
II'OV
1
1---
1
I
.
'I
1I
I
,I,'
.
+ ..
.5
I
I!
:
I ,
I
1
li,I1nFI274ALS32111
,iI'1'"
r - -
I
~
";8
18BI
80
1
1
0
~
i I' I .. ~ll i i III
I
AJ4
1
~:r!~~ ig~~tt~~t~==jtt~jttjjtt-*~ffl~-~-~~~~~~~~~~y~~~~:~,----------------~
,!
H-.. . ~
~~ ..
I -------- _-:~n3~----+-+-H-+--.
, - ~-_
__ _
iox.e
etCS
_
I
I
I " X S . . . . . .
',
,
I.,.L Ij
if-- ~~-_--+H-+++--H-++H----I+-
mm
*C78
~II
I
"It
RiO
dr .+;
1I1Ci
l
II I
1
~~O__
63
C ~ I~ ~2=- =i~ ._I- ">- -
I, ,,;
CB>
ftM3 -;
I
l!jI!
i~~~~~I~ ~~~
,I
~8
I' Ii !
I:
r1iiDY*------I
lijiji
~
I
!
tl:ili 'lIlI:lJ
""0 1
It • •",.-~ .,.. .. on ......
f-~~~05
Jiltm _. CC:CC:CCC~C:=!C=~~:C~[4o
J
"
I
Ri)
I
~i1~RJ'~r""l1~
tlJI 11 szmzos~
.~~.~
0on'" ~tl_'"
!1~rOK~91541.1
1
•
"!
1
I
I
'1
I"
1
E05A21AA
.r
I
1',,1
I
I'
1
,
I1 '. ~o"i I!.
I
1
1
I
I] 11
'
I
"1
PHAI
~':S
1'
I'-
I
112CI
=ii SX81:Bci8
i,'i
[All
54
I!
1,1
11
~~
~ Dim
R203
'1
'I
!
IQ ~
rii
III
~-fhr,-
~~
,
CN6
[I I:ls
.
ll~ Eif!!2ff~ tllIl.
I
I Control Ponell
'
1
::::~:;
~,. "flr1":1,f1 1~ '11i mi ji1i-
I
6
itiSREO~oS
8'
05
34 vss
I~::" ~
::
'-'-U:
I'
vO~i~S ta ~. ~ I i I Si
~~ &1 "'IIII.~Ir. c;1!c;!!~a ~ dt!
:;19::1=
+
::~gl.
I ,lu.l:r
!1,1 i I
':..1'
oS
,~.~~Il!.~
.lJt'I,
B
~ :~
AS
"~lf
Ii I
I
It"=~li"'iI
u~.'
-_~~
::
AO
1
~;'
1
~~
1~;
I.
i~~~mm~~~~~~~~~mm~m~~~~~~~m~~~~~~m~~~~~~~~m~~~~~m~~:~}
~~$~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~m~~~~a~~
-I
I
I~~.~~~~
~-----~-~
:~ ~-++#-t-t++t+-t+---~::."A52~---+++--+++-+++-lI+++HH-+++1H+++-lf-*--+---·-+----·-1+-:-~~+-+~:"~.....-=-~-=-_-_-_-_-_-_:-_-+~~_:+-+H+-~+4+:~-H-~-=--=--=--_-_~~;--=_- ....t-_~+-_~~+-+H+-~+4~+~~-'--_-_-_-=--_-=--_-_--!+-_~~~~"+-'--=-
RXAI
1;1
••",;:
'" i
,h'
05310-5Oft.",,3s0IUlllpe,
MC
All
1
&
,
~~ ~~
:: RJ=~#$:1*rn:n==~A~I~===$a:=*l$=fm.m~m~mmm~$~=~~~=====:t=$:um:a;::===:i~;=~:ttm~======tW~====iF-!l~============ffiffi~=====H~AI2
A~
J:
---tflO~~O
I
._
Itll,
m.
All
1tIII.1
:
~
. . 0'":';."
VII
AI
1~IHAL'"S~~~ ~i! ~, =
,--------1
~®!:
,*3.3KIForelQnl I ,1Uit
36~f}"'4tfi_
1_1~~J~p~.!.. _J I = X ••
:1
::i
1.5
"
lM.
e
m=t==~~!tj~ttdji=====j~t=~--~~~~~~~~~~~~~~-----------~---~------~:~~~~
!
il!.:'t'J'j
Jt
71 3
1 4
A 1%\0
A
1.10
'+-_++H-1~_...++t"H-++-+---+---:4~9
~~
RM8~nntt~·S
DO
[~r~ ~
MA":;"
__
u~
I '
o~.
;r-~,:f1~1f.f;--+++----H-+++-+---+tb",",
0
CN9 (Powerl
Not mounted
~~~M~~"_S~+I~!_!~i~!~~~,,~!~~-_-~~~~~·_~~~~~~~~~~:~=~l:,~~~~~!!HI~~B~I-~------~~~~~~~~~l!='='-1~1==============~I:==--L-~1~~~ ~
i
I :
~K·:8Iil= ~ ~laE "~.I.I!J~,"
,mn71
gi
1
I '
~
_ _ __
9
07
,
!:
I
11 8
l~~~=
,
:T
·,il,,1
-~~
1
j! 1
i
4·5 I ,
7&:1
kit
.~R2:0
.
18
~i~\~ :~11 fW8XS8.~:'y :tl~ r-m~o :;rct~'~ ~~.1{ :1~ .~ ~.~~~ ~~~~~.~., ~
L_J
GND
5
C"·7
~
0.1
I
1
1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
--
I~I 0.1
K
Figure A-29. SEIMA Board CirCUit Diagram
A..33
1
REV.-A
Table A-10. Parts Name Reference Table
Ref. No.
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
200
201
202
203
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
330
331
332
333
334
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
400
401
402
403
404
405
450
500
501
502
Name
Lower Case Assembly
Upper Case
Option Board Cover
Printer Cover A
Sheet Guide Assembly
Base Plate
Ground Plate
Transport Locking Bracket
Printer Mechanism Mounting Screw
Printer Cover B
Platen Knob
Shield Plate
Logo Plate
Ink Cartridge Cover
Rubber Foot
Latch
CBB (M4X14)
CPS(P) (M3X8)
CPS(O) (M3X8)
CBO (M4X8)
CBB (M4X12)
CBB (M4X25)
CBB (M3X12)
CP (M3X6)
CBS(F) (M3X6)
Notice Sheet
SEIMA Board Unit
Heat Sinker
CBS (M3X5)
Shield Plate A
SEIPS Board Unit
Fuse 125V/2A
Heat Sinker
Heat Sinker
CP (M3X6)
Cup (M3X8)
Insulation Spacer
Cable Set #8D2
Cable Set #8E5
Cable Set #8DF
Cable Set #8DE
Cable Set #8E4
SANPSE Board Unit
Fuse 250V/1.25A
Heat Sinker
Heat Sinker
CP (M3X6)
Cup (M3X8)
Insulation Spacer
Power Cable
Power Cable
Power Cable
Power Cable
Cable Set #8DW
Cable Set #8EY
SEIPNL-W PANEL
Printer Mechanism
Base Frame
Frame Assembly (Right)
Ref. No.
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
Table A-10. Parts Name Reference Table (Continued)
Name
Frame Assembly (Left)
Frame Assembly (Middle)
Motor Mounting Plate
Carriage Motor
Paper Release Trigger Assembly
Belt Driven Pulley
Paper End Sensor
Top Edge Sensor
Carriage Assembly
Timing Belt Holder
Timing Belt
Relay Flexible Printed Cable
Cable Holder B
Cable Holder A
Printhead Unit A (for SO-2550)
Printhead Unit B (for SO-850)
Platen Assembly
Top Edge Holder Plate Assembly
Top Edge Holder Transmission Shaft
Paper Feed Roller Shaft Assembly
Paper Feed Roller Assembly
Paper Guide Plate
Paper Holding Roller Assembly
Paper Holder Mouting Plate
Paper Holding Shaft Holder
Paper Holding Drive Gear
Tractor Unit
Tractor Shaft
Tractor Support Shaft
Tractor Base Frame
Tractyor Assembly (Left)
Tractyor Assembly (Right)
Tractor Frame (Left)
Tractor Frame (Right)
Platen Shaft Holder
Tractor Gear
Paper Support
Pump Unit
Valve Assembly
Pump Assembly
Head Cleaner Assembly
Pump Motor
Head Cap Assembly
Pump Tube
Nozzle Tube Assembly
Cap Support
Sub Cap Spring
Cap Spring
Pump Tension Gear
Pump Driving Gear
Tube Set Screw
Pump Transmission Gear
Pump Driving Gear
Tube Set Screw
o Ring
Cartridge Holder Unit
Ink End Sensor
Thermistor
Discharged Ink Needle
Ref. No.
558
559
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
619
620
621
A-38
Name
Guide Shaft B
Guide Shaft
Tube Cover Holder
Paper Eject Guide Plate
Paper Guide (Upper)
Paper Guide (Lower)
Platen Cover
Head Adjustment Pin
Connector Cap
Belt Driven Pulley Mounting Plate
Adjustment Lever
Shaft Holder Ring
Carriage Motor Gear Cover
Top Dege Holder Arm (Left)
Paper Eject Guide Plate Spring
Top Edge Holding Transmission Gear
Top Edge Holder Motor Cover
Top Edge Sensor Spring
Top Edge Holder Motor Cable
Platen Shaft Holder (Left)
Paper Feed Reduction Gear
Tractor Transmission Gear
Tractor Transmission Gear Spring
Paper Release Lever
Paper Feed Motor
Trriger Lever Assembly
Trriger Lever Spring
Paper End Sensor Cable
Paper Holding Spring
CSF Sensor
Top Edge Holder Motor
Discharged Ink Tube
Paper Feeding Reductiongear
Home Position Sensor
Head Adjustment Bush
Support Frame
Pump Cover
Base Rubber
Wire Edging
Stopper Rubber
Mini Clamp
Wire Clip
Edge Saddle
CP(P) (M3X6)
Cup (M3X12)
Cup (M3X5)
CB (M2.6X5)
CP(P) (M3X8)
CBB (M3X12)
CCS (M3X6)
CCS (M3X10)
CB (M2.5X3)
CHS (M3X6)
Cup (M2X10)
CB(N)S (M3X6)
CBS (M3X6)
Leaf Spring (11)
Leaf Spring (15)
Leaf Spring (22)
Ref. No.
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
Name
Leaf Spring (6)
Plain Washer (12)
Plain Washer (13)
Plain Washer (15)
Plain Washer (6.1)
Plain Washer (22.2)
Plain Washer (10)
Hexagon Nut with OW (M4)
Hexagon Nut with Frange (M4)
Retaining Ring E (3)
Retaining Ring E (4)
Retaining Ring E (6)
Cable Clip
Ferrite Clanp
CCS (M3X8)
CB (M2.5X4)
Wire Band
SCC(P) (M3X6)
SCC(P) (M3X 12)
CBS(F) (M3X6)
Ferrite Clamp
Ferrite Clamp
Ferrite Clamp Base
REV.-A
,
~
-r-::--
-:
,
(
J. ,)
~F=
1='---
E
~\
u
I'-
c--'
I--
f-
I
~
=-
l
'--
i
---i---- -
I
J
hJ
==--
I
I
-
r
J.~
0
""--'===
,:
-
!
'-----
1
1-
--
,
I
'"""'
I
I,'
--~-~~~m
§&,;;- - -
" '--1
<
~-Oqg
,
-~.
"1<1- _
.::'1'
il-E-------~::-.~
(,bO- ~
1
'1
2'j4 . :-i
I
- ----.~-----.-- - ---- ---':.~
'
I,
1
!JI:~'~~~~~~d~;;;~~h~\i~
-~-- .. - --
!
:
0
~
L,\---l~----------ih-----------.-J,
IL...-~========~~========::=Jr---'
80.6 :-1'---"'"'- -------
176
.
,
--:;~
Figure A-34. 80-850 External Dimension Diagram
A-39
REV.-A
GG4
542
31
~
. ')
~,
I
0'
C
-
f---
~ ~-
Cl
Cl
:
T
---
!
I
1-
~
-~
0,- ~ ~l
111------\"L.L---------------------''-''t"--1ll1~
.... L
,
iI
Ln
.' NI
]----_.~
r ...
I
I
...
D
t.
--
I
I
!
I
Ir--~80
6 I
176
-..:....*-~-~----____30.
,
~_._---_.-
-
413
..
- _ . ._ - _ . - - _ .
Figure A-35. 80-2550 External Dimension Diagram
A-40
i
~
~//
_.-.-._.~
--~~--
- - - -
EPSON
SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION
PRINTER DIVISION
EPSON OVERSEAS MARKETING LOCATIONS
EPSON AMERICA. INC.
2780 Lomita Blvd.,
Torrance, Calif 90505, U.SA
Phone: (213) 539-9140
Fax: (213) 539-0953
EPSON DEUTSCHLAND GmbH
ZUlpicher StraBe 6, 4000 OUsseldorf 11
F.R. Germany
Phone: (0211) 56030
Fax: (211) 504-7787
EPSON UK LTD.
Campus 100, Maylands Ave,
Hemel Hempstead, Hertfordshire,
HP2 7EZ, U.K.
Phone: 0422-61144
Fax: 0422-227227
EPSON FRANCE S. A.
68 bis, rue Marjolin 92300,
Levallois-Perret, France
Phone: (1) 47-373333
Fax: (1)47-371510
EPSON AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.
17 Rodborough Road,
Frenchs Forest. NSW 2086, Australia
Phone: (02) 452-0666
Fax: (02) 975-1409
EPSON SINGAPORE PTE. LTD.
No_ 1 Raffles Place #26-00
Oub Centre, Singapore 0104
Phone: 5330477
Fax: 5338119
EPSON HONG KONG LTD.
25/F, Harbour Centre,
25 Harbour Road, Wanchai,
Hong Kong
Phone: 5-8314600
Fax: 5-725792
EPSON ELECTRONICS TRADING LTD.
(TAIWAN BRANCH)
10F, No. 287 Nanking E. Road Sec. 3,
Taipei, Taiwan, R.O.C.
Phone: (02) 717-7360
Fax: 02-7129164
EPSON ITALlA S.p.A.
V. le F. lIi Casiraghi, 427
20099 SESTO S. GIOVANNI MI, ITALY
Phone: 2-26233.1
Fax: 2-2440750
EPSON IBERICA S.A.
Paris, 152,08036 Barcelona, Spain
Phone: 410-3400
Fax: 3-239 9517
SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION
(Hirooka Office)
80 Harashinden, Hirooka
Shiojiri-shi, Nagano-ken
399-07 Japan
Phone: (0263) 52-2552
Telex: 3342-214 (SEPSON J)
1990 Aug.
EPSON
Printed in Japan
90.11-.15-G